Home

Sprint Color User's Manual.book

1. ExSync Cycle 6 A2 Image of point 2 acquired by line A A E Drawing not to scale UPPER BUFFER LOWER BUFFER H A3 H Image of point 3 acquired by line A am Line B P DIAS E Object Passing Camera Movement d Point 1 Point 2 Point 3 Fig 49 Enhanced Raw Line B First A Delayed Line Acquisition ExSync Cycle 6 Basler sprint Color Cameras 89 Line Acquisition Modes AW00069909000 3 4 2 1 Pixel Value Transmission for the Enhanced Raw Line B First Line Acquisition Mode For the Enhanced Raw Line B First line acquisition mode you can select a 2 4 or 8 tap video output mode for transmitting pixel data at bit depths of 8 10 or 12 Not all camera models support 4 or 8 tap video data output mode Not all combinations of video data output modes and bit depths are available For information about the available video data output modes and bit depths for your camera model see Section 5 1 on page 115 The Enhanced Raw Line B First line acquisition mode provides a frame valid FVAL signal which indicates line B in a sequence of consecutive lines being transmitted When the frame valid signal goes high the line being transmitted wi
2. 4 x M4 6 deep O 3 EH EN 4 x M4 6 deep BASLER S3 Photosensitive surface S 8 FF of the CMOS sensor 9 a a sprint 8 ec M E z e T rF A A A i T i 10 1 48 0 A 4 x M3 setscrews To for locking a lens g55 9 mount adapter pL 40 2 62700 reference plane i Tolerances are typical Drawings are not to scale N E 2 No i JB E o g g 5 E g S a L Fig 5 Mechanical Dimensions in mm 2k and 4k Cameras Basler sprint Color Cameras 13 Specifications Requirements and Precautions AW00069909000 1 5 2 Sensor Positioning Accuracy for 2k and 4k Cameras The sensor positioning accuracy is as shown in the drawings below Center of sensor X axis 3129 SERIE ees TA Camera Link medium full 9 Ll gt deie D ec o Oy Camera Link base q J Photosensitive surface of the CMOS sensor 0 08 gt reference plane Tolerances are typical Drawings are not to scale Fig 6 Sensor Positioning Accuracy in mm unless otherwise noted 2k and 4k Cameras Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 5 3 S
3. ExSync Cycle 4 A1 Image of point 1 acquired by line A A f Drawing not to scale UPPER BUFFER A2 Image of point 2 acquired by line A LOWER BUFFER Line B CBS EL Object Passing Camera Movement M Point 1 Point 2 Point 3 Fig 47 Enhanced Raw Line B First A Delayed Line Acquisition ExSync Cycle 4 Basler sprint Color Cameras 87 Line Acquisition Modes AW00069909000 ExSync Cycle 5 B2 Image of point 2 acquired by line B A Drawing not to scale UPPER BUFFER A2 Image of point 2 acquired by line A LOWER BUFFER H AS3 Image of point 3 acquired by line A Line B anes Object Passing Camera Movement d N Point 1 Point 2 Point 3 Fig 48 Enhanced Raw Line B First A Delayed Line Acquisition ExSync Cycle 5 88 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Line Acquisition Modes
4. E Line A Line B Object Passing Camera Movement M 9 N Point 1 Point 2 Point 3 Fig 45 Enhanced Raw Line B First A Delayed Line Acquisition ExSync Cycle 2 Start up Situation Basler sprint Color Cameras 85 Line Acquisition Modes AW00069909000 ExSync Cycle 3 B1 Image of point 1 acquired by line B A pares il Drawing not to scale UPPER BUFFER P A2 Image of point 2 acquired by line A LOWER BUFFER Al Image of point 1 acquired by line A AU Line B unis 7 Line A Object Passing Camera Movement d Point 1 Point 2 Point 3 Fig 46 Enhanced Raw Line B First A Delayed Line Acquisition ExSync Cycle 3 86 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Line Acquisition Modes
5. Le T LS Line B nee Object Passing Camera Movement N Point 1 Point 2 Point 4 Fig 29 Raw Line B First Line Acquisition ExSync Cycle 1 Basler sprint Color Cameras 61 Line Acquisition Modes AW00069909000 ExSync Cycle 2 A2 Image of point 2 acquired by line A Drawing not to scale BUFFER Line B Line A Object Passing Camera Movement 9 N e Point 1 Point 2 Point 3 Point 4 Fig 30 Raw Line B First Line Acquisition ExSync Cycle 2 62 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Line Acquisition Modes ExSync Cycle 3 B3 Image of point 3 acquired by line B A i 7 Drawing not to scale BUFFER A4 Image of point 4 acquired by line A NOO Line B Object Passing Camera Movement N Point 1 Point 2 Point 3 Point 4 Fig 31 Raw Line B First Line Acquisition ExSync Cycle 3 Basler sprint Color Cameras 63 Li
6. Port Camera Frame Bit Assignment Grabber 3 Tap 10 Bit Port DO TxINO RxOutO not used Port D1 TxIN1 RxOut1 not used Port D2 TxIN2 RxOut2 not used Port D3 TxIN3 RxOut3 not used Port D4 TxIN4 RxOut4 not used Port D5 TxIN6 RxOut6 not used Port D6 TxIN27 RxOut27 not used Port D7 TxIN5 RxOut5 not used Port EO TxIN7 RxOut7 D1 Bit 0 Port E1 TxIN8 RxOut8 D1 Bit 1 Port E2 TxIN9 RxOut9 D1 Bit 2 Port E3 TxIN12 RxOut12 D1 Bit 3 Port E4 TxIN13 RxOut13 D1 Bit 4 Port E5 TxIN14 RxOut14 D1 Bit 5 Port E6 TxIN10 RxOut10 D1 Bit 6 Port E7 TxIN11 RxOut11 D1 Bit 7 Port FO TXIN15 RxOut15 D1 Bit 8 Port F1 TxIN18 RxOut18 D1 Bit 9 MSB Port F2 TxIN19 RxOut19 Not used Port F3 TxIN20 RxOut20 Not used Port F4 TxIN21 RxOut21 not used Port F5 TxIN22 RxOut22 not used Port F6 TxIN16 RxOut16 Not used Port F7 TxIN17 RxOut17 Not used LVAL TxIN24 RxOut24 Line Valid FVAL TxIN25 RxOut25 Not Used DVAL TxIN26 RxOut26 Data Valid Spare TxIN23 RxOut23 Not Used Strobe TxINCLK RxOutCIk Pixel Clock Table 17 Bit Assignments for 3 Tap Output Modes MDR Conn 2 Transmitter Y Basler sprint Color Cameras Video Data Output Modes 129 Video Data Output Modes AW00069909000 The tables below show the line valid delays for the RGB line acquisition mode see Figure 18 on page 46 when the camera is set for full resolution and 3 tap video data output mode Note that the delays depend on the line acquisition mode setting and the cam
7. Camera Link medium full Al ie S Hi H Camera Link base ps reference plane Tolerances are typical Drawings are not to scale Fig 10 Sensor Positioning Accuracy in mm Unless Otherwise Noted 8k Cameras 18 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 5 7 Sensor Line Location for 8k Cameras The location of the lines on the sensor chip is as shown in the drawing below f O o c Camera Link medium full 4 o 12 VDC O Camera Link base i J L E Sensor lines S b p i Line B pixel 1 e P Ea reference plane Tolerances are typical Line A pixel 1 Drawings are not to scale Fig 11 Sensor Line Location 8k Cameras Basler sprint Color Cameras 19 Specifications Requirements and Precautions AW00069909000 1 6 Color Creation The sensor used in the camera is equipped with an additive color separation filter known as a Bayer filter The pixel data output formats are related to the Bayer pattern so you need
8. sese 273 Line Stamp Mode CSR sssssseeeeeeeeem eene 273 Line Stamp Low Pixel Threshold CSR eese 274 Line Stamp High Pixel Threshold CSR seessesss 275 Lookup Table Mode CSR seeeeenneen 276 Lookup Table Selector CSR ssssseeeeee 276 Lookup Table Index CSR ssseeeeeeeeneneenn 277 Lookup Table Value CSR sseeeeeeeennennn 278 Camera Reset S a EE E EE E E ETTE 278 Serial Communication CSR ssesseeeeeeeeenneen 279 7 2 3 Bulk Data and the Bulk Data Control and Status Registers 280 7 2 8 1 Using the Configuration Set Bulk Data CSR 281 Basler sprint Color Cameras V Table of Contents AW00069909000 7 2 3 2 Using the Shading Values Bulk DataCSR 282 7 2 8 8 General Procedures for Working with Bulk Data CSRs 283 7 2 3 4 Bulk Data Control and Status Register Details 286 Gontiguratiom Set CSR ausente te eddie ee 286 shading Values GSRh aiit eene erus 287 7 3 Using Binary Read Write Commands 00 0 cee tee 288 7 3 14 The Binary Read Write Command Protocol 000000s 289 7 3 1 1 X Error Checking and Responses cee eee aee 292 7 3 2 Basic Read Write Command Explanations 2 000005 293 7 3 2 1 Read Command 00 ee 293 7 3 2 2 Write Command
9. ss 241 Imaging Sensor Temperature Inquiry eeessssss 241 7 2 2 Feature Control and Status Registers llis 242 7 2 2 1 Raw Value Fields vs Absolute Value Fields 242 7 2 2 2 Feature Control and Status Register Details 243 Camera Link Clock Speed CSR sseeeeeeeeee 243 Video Data Output Mode CSR seseeeene 244 Line Acquisition Mode CSR seen 244 Low Line Rate Compensation CSR eese 245 FVAL Length CSR E A RN 245 Exposure Time Control Mode CSR seeeeeeeeeee 246 Exposure Time CSR cccceeceseceeeeceeeeeneeeeeseeeeeeeeenerseseneenesaneeneaes 247 Line Period GSR ua triti ceret eic i e toner oae 249 Ciel 251 eiue ie S 252 Gain Red CSR e Pie o ren Pe REESE ueni cenehels 254 Gain Green CSR ied ri en ER ratae ipee ns 255 Gain Blue CSR r cii t ide dene RR RENE ient aai 257 Gain Green 2 CSR ii Ire tiet Rip naa aisiara P Fei oMdrdneiia 258 Gain Green 2 Enable CSR eee 259 Area of Interest Starting Pixel CSR sese 260 Area of Interest Length CSR ssssee 261 shading Mode GCSE tendientes 262 Shading Value Generate CSR sese 262 Gamma CSR usitata am np 263 Color Adjustment CSR essen 265 Test Image Mode CSR
10. Saturation Color Name field Saturation adjustment of the selected primary or secondary color For more information about the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 234 on CSRs see Section 7 2 on page 235 Color Name stands for the chosen color Table 41 Setting Hue and Saturation Adjustment Parameters via CCT or via CSRs 182 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Features 6 6 2 Adapting the Color Adjustment Settings to Different Light Sources On the initial wake up after delivery the Basler sprint color camera loads the factory configuration set into the work set The color enhancement feature is deactivated in the factory configuration set This factory set contains neutral values concerning color settings see values without correction in Table 42 on page 187 Depending on what you want to achieve by adapting the color adjustment settings you have the following possibilities A If a high color accuracy is important to you i e you want the camera to capture an object and you want the monitor to display the colors of an object as seen under a standard light source i e the exact numerical values of the object s pixels make sure that you use a standard color chart within your camera s field of view when you adjust the color enhancements B If you want to rely on your visual impression i e you want to achieve that the monitor you use displays the colors of the captured
11. With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 234 you use the Voltage Error parameter in the Camera Information parameters group to determine if a camera power undervoltage or overvoltage condition has been detected If the value is 1 a camera power undervoltage or overvoltage condition is present By Reading Inquiry Registers You check for a camera power overvoltage condition by reading the value of bit 6 in the Camera Status field of the Camera Status Inquiry Register see page 238 If the bit is set to 1 a camera power overvoltage condition is present See Section 7 2 1 on page 236 for an explanation of Inquiry Registers and Section 7 3 1 on page 289 for an explanation of using read write commands Note The Voltage Error parameter in the CCT and bit 6 in the Camera Status field of the Camera Status Inquiry Register will be set to 1 when the camera detects a camera power undervoltage or overvoltage condition They will remain set to 1 until the condition is corrected i e the camera power voltage is returned to its normal range Applying a camera power voltage greater than 25 VDC may seriously damage the camera See Section 6 11 on page 222 for more information 224 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Features 6 13 Camera Status Checks During operation the camera performs a continuous series of self checks You can view the current camera status in several ways by using the Camera Configuration Tool Plus see Sect
12. tee B 1 17 86 Calculate the width of conveyor that will be viewed by each sensor line at this magnification 40 96 mm x 17 86 731 55 mm Option 2 Calculate the conveyor movement that will generate 3 encoder steps 3 steps x 0 09 mm step 0 27 mm Calculate the magnification needed to make 0 27 mm of conveyor movement result in 10 um movement of the image i0um _ 0 27 mm EOS 96 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Line Acquisition Modes 1 0 037 ROS B 1 27 03 Calculate the width of conveyor that will be viewed by each sensor line at this magnification 40 96 mm x 27 03 1102 92 mm If you choose to use 2 encoder steps to move the image 10 um you will require a 1 17 86 magnification and at this magnification the field of view of each sensor line will be 731 55 mm If you choose to use 3 encoder steps to move the image 10 um you will require a magnification of 1 27 03 and at this magnification the field of view of each sensor line will be 1102 92 mm Since our conveyor is 850 mm wide and since it is usually more acceptable to have a field of view slightly larger than the conveyor assume that we choose option 2 Step 4 Select an appropriate lens and determine the mounting distance for your camera You can contact Basler technical support if you need help with this procedure Step 5 Make sure that the line acquisition mode is set correctly In this case it would be set to Enhanced Raw Line A Firs
13. AW00069907000 4 Jul 2011 Updated the camera version ID number in Section 1 1 on page 1 Added 80 MHz pixel clock speed for the spL4096 39kc in Section 1 2 2 on page 4 Section 2 8 5 on page 38 and Section 5 1 on page 115 Modified the representation of the UNIFOC 76 in Figure 2 and added information about coosing a suitable lens and assembling optical components in Section 1 3 2 2 on page 9 Added line acquisition modes in Section 3 1 on page 41 Raw Line B First Enhanced Raw Line B First A Delayed Added a note about delays in Section 4 1 1 on page 99 Added low line rate compensation in Section 4 1 3 on page 102 Section 4 1 4 on page 103 and in the register descriptions on page 238 and page 240 Corrected the increments for starting pixels and AOI lengths applicable to setting AOls for cameras with 8192 pixels in Section 6 3 on page 163 Corrected the maximum brightness values for 10 bit and 12 bit output when gamma correction is enabled in Section 6 5 on page 177 310 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Revision History Doc ID Number Date Changes AW00069907000 4 Jul 2011 Modified the Section 6 7 on page 189 and Section 6 8 on page 206 to take account of the added line acquisition modes Modified the camera power undervoltage condition and renamed the overvoltage error as voltage error in Section 6 11 on page 222 and adjusted Section 6 12 2 on page 224 Section 8 3 on page 2
14. Frame grabber that you use with the camera 5 CCT version that you use with the camera 6 Describe the problem in as much detail as possible If you need more space use an extra sheet of paper 7 l fknown whats the cause of the problem 8 When did the problem occur After start While running After a certain action e g a change of parameters 9 How often did does the problem fr Once fr Every time occur Regularly when Occasionally when Basler sprint Color Cameras 307 Troubleshooting and Support AW00069909000 10 How severe is the problem Camera can still be used Camera can be used after take this action Camera can no longer be used 11 Did your application ever run r Yes r No without problems 12 Parameter set It is very important for Basler technical support to get a copy of the exact camera parameters that you were using when the problem occurred To make a copy of the parameters start the CCT select the File menu and click Dump Current Settings to File Send the generated file to Basler technical support If you cannot access the camera please try to state the following parameter settings Video data output mode Exposure time control mode Exposure time Gain Offset Line rate 13 Live image test image If you are having an image problem try to generate and
15. Y 61ed 4 Ig z799 l 13 vod a l Le Ta vod l l Paniesey I pexesey p r 200 p pn 46 1e n OF 200 ar 2 Pl 0a uod l Sed l sane 9 l 2 f eama l 1 l dud OK S E ped z Vz Ox vad l POO TI z ulead Sz asa POO oxy xL EIERE emaj e I Ou fema I PONTSSOU I penesen za uod 0A z zu Je Fr st 0A Za Hod 00 Si Sr zi zr 799 away PY aha I XL axe l I e I Veiled oara l l L f foara l I I I l I I I I I l 1006S I A Jepnusue 78249068 I I 600 8i i c aii m jy X55 Ponas PoNoson I l l I 690 t 30L Jed ve Iez 690 l E74 l AZ I I I Idd 9r oF E W Ww Od es Sinon Obed uox sqong 3PX l l 19x I iE l E l I ODd P zi z pied Is lod AZ t T 01 ied Hz I vo iz I I aqong 19 UDTOXL qois pesi Fu I EOL Pemon I ES 6 Tiled 8r 8r AX I Lva 2K I I PSN ION B n pesn iON POSTION Sexe Sex POS ION Pemon 9 Z Si Si i med zu Va EZ s f pamon l tet I XL Lug l ux IHWod I I Tower LR l ke 10 uod jog o om 7 IO HOE X iz ve gied E 9 E 90 uod I OH Vod dl Z z z L sled Sz I sz Z x SH uod I I Tauog I HXL Ta Hod 19 uod 19 uod oxy OLXL I 99 pog 2H I praan 99 uod I I 9g uod X 9 8 G Jed 6L I 6r X 98 uod E I Fazx I 1vwog 93 xk ZV Vod l WAG za En TAG syueg 228 I L Havra I WA WM I I gva I l 92x1 roy E woa WAC WAG em RU al ZZ EH 1 1 6 Jed 0L lo ez ze y I I swag se l l Sel W vexed b2XL S pesnioN
16. spL2048 70kc Housing Size 48 0 mm x 87 0 mm x 62 0 mm without lens adapter or connectors Lx WxH 84 9 mm x 87 0 mm x 62 0 mm with F mount adapter and connectors Weight 360 g without lens adapter Table 1 General Specifications for 2k Cameras Basler sprint Color Cameras Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 2 2 Camera Models with 4k Pixels Specification spL4096 39kc spL4096 70kc Sensor Size 2 lines 4096 pixels per line Sensor Type Linear CMOS with Bayer color filter Pixel Size 10 um x 10 um Camera Link 40 MHz or 80 MHz switchable Clock Speed Maximum Line Rate in Raw Line Acquisition Mode in Enhanced Raw Line Acquisition Mode 38 6 kHz 70 kHz 77 2 kHz 140 kHz In ExSync operation 137 kHz see note on page 99 Data Output Type Camera Link base and medium full configuration Data Output Modes 2 tap 8 10 or 12 bit 3 tap 8 or 10 bit 4 tap 8 10 or 12 bit 6 tap 8 bit 8 tap 8 bit Synchronization Via external trigger signal or free run Exposure Control Edge controlled level controlled or programmable Gain and Offset Programmable via a serial link Requirements Connectors One 6 pin Hirose micro miniature receptacle Two 26 pin female MDR connectors Power 12 VDC 10 Max 10 0 W 12 VDC Lens Adapter F mount M42 Housing Size 48 0 mm x 87 0 mm x 62 0
17. Low byte of the min value Byte 2 High byte of the min value Field Name Raw Max Offset 0x0011 Size 2 Bytes Type Read only Description Maximum allowed integer value for the raw gain setting The bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the max value Byte 2 High byte of the max value Basler sprint Color Cameras 253 Configuring the Camera AW00069909000 Gain Red CSR Note The gain specifically for the red pixels can be set by writing a floating point value to the Absolute Gain Red field or by writing an integer value to the Raw Gain Red field See Section 7 2 2 1 on page 242 for an explanation of the difference between these two fields Register Base Address 0x0E80 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Absolute Gain Red Offset 0x0001 Size 4 Bytes Type Read Write Description Writing a floating point value to this field sets the gain in dB The value in this field is a standard IEEE 754 single precision 32 bit floating point number See Section 6 1 on page 155 for more information about gain red Field Name Absolute Min Offset 0x0005 Size 4 Bytes Type Read only Descr
18. sees 189 three tap video data output modes 126 troubleshooting eeesssss 300 two tap video data output modes 119 U undervoltage protection 222 V vendor info inquiry register 236 ventilation essssseseeeeeee 21 video data output mode control and status register 244 video data output modes 115 Vittual pIXel 3 5 nd e ian 42 316 AWO00069909000 W weight 2k cameras eeenme 3 AK cameras eene 4 8k cameras eee 5 white balance eem 159 Basler sprint Color Cameras
19. the third pixel has a red value of 1 a green value of 1 and a blue value of 1 and so on WG D bi Co UJ J ER Pop l A WQD S WG ZJ Aan l eo C5 no WD amp DOD 1 NN i AL T ag i oo QD Co A POD D D D y I wo Po I Om OC I AAR I Ano NN R G B R G B R G B Pop UJ PoP j Co QD PoJ DIS QD VOD o QD PoJ I AL NIN I 1 aa N I oo UJ C ZU WG WI T a i o P OD l N T Co Fig 70 Pixel Values in the Upper Left Corner of Test Image Two Generated with RGB Line Acquisition Mode Basler sprint Color Cameras 191 Features AW00069909000 AE E VA SE B Gray Y AA PA E et Level z oo ub 2 P3 PA H PA gl LZ az 0 Dd 1 768 1024 line 1 Pixel Number line 2 Me line 3 Fig 71 Formation of Test Image Two for 8 bit Output Modes Generated with RGB Line Acquisition Mode on a Camera with 4096 Pixels Per Line 2048 Virtual Pixels I Fig 72 Test Image Two Generated with RGB Line Acquisition Mode When you view the output of a camera that is set for test image two the pattern should appear to be gradually moving up the screen This feature is useful for determining if the camera is receiving an ExSync signal from your frame grabber and if the frame grabber is receiving every line that is output from your camera Test image two i
20. 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x02 The generation process failed 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Generate Offset 0x0001 Size 1 Byte Type Read Write Description Writing an integer to this field sets the shading correction mode 0x00 No generation 0x01 Generate DSNU correction values 0x02 Generate PRNU correction values and do not use DSNU correction during generation 0x03 Generate PRNU correction values and use DSNU correction during generation See Section 6 4 on page 165 for more information about the shading correction feature 262 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Configuring the Camera Gamma CSR Register Base Address 0x4300 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Absolute Gamma Offset 0x0001 Size 4 Bytes Type Read Write Description Writing a floating point value to this field sets the gamma correction value For example if the value in this field i
21. FVAL Length 2 Line Valid Data Valid Pixel Clock DO Pixel Data 12 10 or 8 bits D1 Pixel Data 12 10 or 8 bits _ Frame Valid Delay see Table 13 Table 14 and Table 15 B E k Frame Valid Delay see Table 13 Table 14 and Table 15 oan l zal 0 050 us for 40 MHz Camera Link clock cycle 0 025 us for 80 MHz clock cycle d LL Jo L d L 1 L UU UU UL UU OOO0O04eG0C0949 X000 9 99 X00 XX OOM BOON OOO OO XXX Timing diagrams are not to scale N At full resolution N 4096 on 4k models and 2048 on 2k models If the AOI feature is used N will be determined by the AOI settings Fig 50 Two Tap Mode with Edge Level Controlled or Programmed Exposure Enhanced Raw Line B First Basler sprint Color Cameras 91 Line Acquisition Modes AW00069909000 4 Tap Output Mode ExSync Signal Or End of Programmed Time Frame Valid FVAL Length 2 Line Valid Data Valid Pixel Clock DO Pixel Data 12 10 or 8 bits D1 Pixel Data 12 10 or 8 bits D2 Pixel Data 12 10 or 8 bits D3 Pixel Data 12 10 or 8 bits E Frame Valid Delay see Table 24 and Table 25 Q j I Frame Valid Delay see Table 24 and Table 25 p 0 050 us for 40 MHz Camera Link clock cycle 0 025 us for 80 MHz clock cycle fo en ee ae Tl I STUVUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUU OO00e 0ee 900000 0e9 000 OO00 099 000
22. Frame Valid Delay for the Raw Line Acquisition Mode 40 MHz Min Max Programmable 3 09 us 3 24 us Edge Controlled Exposure 3 09 us 3 24 us Level Controlled Exposure 3 09 us 3 24 us Frame Valid Delay for the Enhanced Raw Line Acquisition Mode 40 MHz Min Max Programmable 3 12 us 3 27 us Edge Controlled Exposure 3 12 us 3 27 us Level Controlled Exposure 3 12 us 3 27 us Table 23 Line Valid Frame Valid Delays with the 2k Camera Set for 4 Tap Video Data Output Modes 136 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 4k Cameras Video Data Output Modes Line Valid Frame Valid Delays for 4 Tap Modes 4k Cameras Line Valid Delay for the RGB Line Acquisition Mode 40 MHz Min Max Programmable 3 10 us 3 23 us Edge Controlled Exposure 3 15 us 3 28 us Level Controlled Exposure 3 10 us 3 23 us Frame Valid De lay for the Raw Line Acquisition Mode 40 MHz Min Max Programmable 3 15 us 3 30 us Edge Controlled Exposure 3 15 us 3 30 us Level Controlled Exposure 3 15 us 3 30 us Frame Valid Delay for the Enhanced Raw Line Acquisition Mode 40 MHz Min Max Programmable 3 17 us 3 33 us Edge Controlled Exposure 3 17 us 3 33 us Level Controlled Exposure 3 17 us 3 33 us Line Valid Delay for the RGB Line Acquisition Mode 80 MHz Min Max Programmable 2 94 us 3 04 us Edge Controlled Exposure 2 99 us
23. Line Valid Delay for the RGB Line Acquisition Mode 40 MHz Min Max Programmable 3 08 us 3 21 us Edge Controlled Exposure 3 13 us 3 26 us Level Controlled Exposure 3 08 us 3 21 us Line Valid Delay for the RGB Line Acquisition Mode 80 MHz Min Max Programmable 6 45 us 6 55 us Edge Controlled Exposure 6 80 us 6 90 us Level Controlled Exposure 6 45 us 6 55 us Table 20 Line Valid Delays with the 8k Camera Set for 3 Tap Video Data Output Modes Basler sprint Color Cameras 131 Video Data Output Modes AW00069909000 5 2 3 4 Tap Output Modes 4 Tap 12 Bit Output Mode In 4 tap 12 bit mode on each pixel clock cycle the camera transmits data for four pixels at 12 bit depth a line valid bit and a data valid bit In the Raw and Enhanced Raw line acquisition modes the camera also transmits a frame valid bit unless the FVAL Length parameter is set to zero For more information about the frame valid bit see Section 2 8 1 on page 36 In the 4 tap output modes the camera uses the output ports on Camera Link Transmitters X and Y to transmit pixel data a frame valid bit in the Raw and Enhanced Raw line acquisition modes only a line valid bit a data valid bit and the Camera Link pixel clock The assignment of the bits to the output ports on Camera Link Transmitters X and Y is as shown in Table 21 on page 134 and Table 22 on page 135 respectively The Camera Link clock is used to time t
24. Note When the camera is operating in an 10 bit or 12 bit output mode and when the lookup table feature is enabled only the 8 MSBs of the transmitted data will carry information The 2 or 4 LSBs respectively will be packed with zeros The lookup table has 1025 indexed locations with an 8 bit value stored at each index like this Index Data 0 User defined 8 bit value 4 User defined 8 bit value 8 User defined 8 bit value 12 User defined 8 bit value 16 User defined 8 bit value e e e 4080 User defined 8 bit value 4084 User defined 8 bit value 4088 User defined 8 bit value 4092 User defined 8 bit value 4096 User defined 8 bit value Table 44 Lookup Table Basler sprint Color Cameras 217 Features AW00069909000 When the lookup table feature is enabled the camera will operate for each color in this manner If the sensor reports that a pixel has a 12 bit value of 0 the 8 bit value stored at index 0 will be transmitted If the sensor reports that a pixel has a 12 bit value of 4 the 8 bit value stored at index 4 will be transmitted If the sensor reports that a pixel has a 12 bit value of 8 the 8 bit value stored at index 8 will be transmitted If the sensor reports that a pixel has a 12 bit value of 4084 the 8 bit value stored at index 4084 will be transmitted If the sensor reports that a pixel has a 12 bit value of 4088 the 8 bit value stored at index 4088 will be
25. Note that the ExSync signal is edge sensitive and therefore must toggle In order for the camera to detect a transition from low to high the ExSync signal must be held high for at least 1 3 us when the camera is set for the level controlled exposure mode and for 100 ns when the camera is set for programmable or edge controlled exposure mode If the enhanced raw line acquisition mode is selected in ExSync operation the Valid for the spL2048 70kc and for the spL4096 70kc only maximum line rate for these camera models is 137 kHz Basler sprint Color Cameras 35 Physical Interface AW00069909000 2 8 Output Signals Data is output from the camera in accordance with the Camera Link standard The camera s output signals include pixel data qualifiers such as frame valid line valid and data valid pixel data a Camera Link clock signal and a SerTFG signal 2 8 1 Frame Valid Bit As shown in Figure 15 on page 34 a frame valid FVAL bit is assigned to the Tx25 pin on the X Y and Z Camera Link transmitters as defined in the Camera Link standard In a sequence of lines being transmitted the frame valid bit helps to discern lines A and lines B When the frame valid bit goes high the line that is being transmitted is line A And the next line transmitted will be line B By setting the FVAL Length parameter you can set a number of consecutive lines and during the transmission of those lines the frame valid bit will sta
26. Resume communication The RS 644 serial port on some Camera Link frame grabbers will only support a bitrate of 9600 If you are using a Camera Link frame grabber check the grabber s documentation before attempting to change the bitrate At reset or power off on the camera returns to the 9600 bps setting Basler sprint Color Cameras 279 Configuring the Camera AW00069909000 7 2 3 Bulk Data and the Bulk Data Control and Status Registers The term bulk data refers to a collection of values used by the camera as a block A configuration set see Section 6 15 on page 226 is an example of one type of bulk data A single configuration set contains values for all of the normal parameter settings needed to configure the camera and the values within a configuration set are used by the camera as a block A set of shading values see Section 6 4 on page 165 is an examples of another type of bulk data The set of shading values contains all of the values needed to do shading correction and the camera uses the shading values as a block The camera has a file system similar to the file system used on PCs The camera can store blocks of bulk data such as a configuration set or the set of shading values in named files within the camera s non volatile memory The camera s bulk data control and status registers CSRs are used to save blocks of bulk data to files in the non volatile memory For example you can use the configuration set bulk data co
27. The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Control Offset 0x0001 Size 1 Byte Type Read Write Description Writing an integer to this field selects a bulk data control function 0x00 Enumerate 0x01 ENext 0x02 Read 0x03 Write 0x04 Erase 0x05 Activate 0x06 Copy Field Name Info Offset 0x0002 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description If you are performing a bulk read or write operation this field will indicate when no more data exists 0x00 More data exists 0x01 No more data exists 0x02 File operation error 0x04 This is an activated file Field Name File Name Offset 0x0003 Size 20 Bytes Type Read Write Description Character string indicating the name of the bulk data file The field contains 20 characters left aligned and zero padded Only the following names are allowed FactoryShading UserShading Field Name Size Offset 0x0017 Size 4 Bytes Type Read only Description If the file name refers to an already existing bulk data file this field will contain the file size in bytes Otherwise the field contains zeros Field Name Data Offset 0x001B Size Variable Type Read Write Description Byte sized register that is used to sequentially write to or read from a b
28. absolute field and the raw field in a CSR Section 7 3 1 on page 289 explains using read write commands Basler sprint Color Cameras 161 Features AW00069909000 6 2 2 Gain Green 2 The camera s sensor includes two different lines with green pixels Line A with red and green pixels and line B with green and blue pixels Line B BB BB BB T BB BB 2 4 6 N 2 N RA RA RA RA l RA RA 1 3 5 am INES N 1 Line A Fig 60 Green Pixels in Line A and Line B Gain Green 2 in combination with Gain Green lets you specify the gain settings for the green pixels in Line A and for the green pixels in Line B separately can be enabled or disabled via the Gain Green 2 Enable CSR see page 259 By default Gain Green 2 is disabled If the Gain Green 2 feature is enabled the Gain Green parameter is used to set the color specific gain of the green pixels in Line A The total gain for the green pixels in Line A will be the sum in dB of the global Gain and Gain Green the Gain Green 2 parameter is used to set the color specific gain of the green pixels in Line B The total gain for the green pixels in Line B will be the sum in dB of the global Gain and Gain Green 2 the Gain Green 2 parameter is by default set to the current value of the Gain Green parameter If you change the Gain Green 2 parameter afterwards these new Gain Green 2 setting will be valid as long as the Gain Green 2 feature stays enabled and until the camera is turned
29. data stream DO will transmit data for pixel 5 in the line Data stream D1 will transmit data for pixel 6 Data stream D2 will transmit data for pixel 7 And data stream D3 will transmit data for pixel 8 On the next cycle of the pixel clock the frame valid line valid and data valid bits will all be high On this clock cycle data stream DO will transmit data for pixel 9 in the line Data stream D1 will transmit data for pixel 10 Data stream D2 will transmit data for pixel 11 And data stream D3 will transmit data for pixel 12 This pattern will continue until all of the pixel data for the line has been transmitted After all of the pixel data for the line has been transmitted frame valid the line valid and data valid bits all become low indicating that valid pixel data is no longer being transmitted Figure 19 on page 47 Figure 27 on page 58 and Figure 43 on page 80 show the data sequence when the camera is operating in edge controlled or level controlled exposure mode or in programmable exposure mode Basler sprint Color Cameras 133 Video Data Output Modes AWO00069909000 MDR Conn 1 Transmitter X Port Camera Frame Bit Assignment Grabber 4 Tap 12 Bit 4 Tap 10 Bit 4 Tap 8 Bit Port AO TxINO RxOutO DO Bit 0 DO Bit 0 DO Bit 0 Port A1 TxIN1 RxOut1 DO Bit 1 DO Bit 1 DO Bit 1 Port A2 TxIN2 RxOut2 DO Bit 2 DO Bit 2 DO Bit 2 Port A3 TxIN3 RxO
30. not used Field Name Raw Max Offset 0x0015 Size 4 Bytes Type Read only Description Maximum allowed integer value for the raw exposure time setting This field is updated to reflect limitations caused by the way that any related fields are set The bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the max value Byte 2 Mid byte of the max value Byte 3 High byte of the max value Byte 4 Always 0x00 not used 248 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Configuring the Camera Line Period CSR Note The line period can be set by writing a floating point value to the Absolute Line Period field or by writing an integer value to the Raw Line Period field See Section 7 2 2 1 on page 242 for an explanation of the difference between these two fields Register Base Address 0x1600 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Absolute Line Period Offset 0x0001 Size 4 Bytes Type Read Write Description Writing a floating point value to this field sets the line period in us For example if the value in this field is set to 180 6 the line period will be 180 6 us The allowed range for the absolute lin
31. page 26 for the base configuration as defined in the Camera Link specification one camera model has only the MDR connector for the base configuration The camera models include one differential line transmitter The transmitter in the camera is designated as Transmitter X When a camera is set for a 2 tap or 3 tap video data output mode it uses the base Camera Link configuration Camera models with two MDR connectors implement the medium full configuration as defined in the Camera Link specification and include three differential line transmitters The transmitters in the camera are designated as Transmitter X Transmitter Y and Transmitter Z If a camera is set for a 4 tap video data output mode it uses the medium Camera Link configuration and employs transmitters X and Y If a camera is set for an 8 tap video data output mode it uses the full Camera Link configuration and employs transmitters X Y and Z Note Cameras that implement the medium full configuration can also be used as base configuration cameras To do so simply set the camera for a 2 tap video data output mode In this situation only one Camera Link cable is required The cable should be connected to MDR connector 1 on the camera and to the base connector on your frame grabber Table 5 on page 27 and Table 6 on page 28 show the pin assignments for the MDR connectors The schematic in Figure 15 on page 34 shows the full configuration Camera Link implementation f
32. please take a look at the form that starts on page 307 before you call Filling out this form will help make sure that you have all of the information the technical support team needs to help you with your problem You will also find helpful information such as frequently asked questions downloads and technical notes at our website www baslerweb com 8 2 Obtaining an RMA Number Whenever you want to return material to Basler you must request a Return Material Authorization RMA number before sending it back The RMA number must be stated in your delivery documents when you ship your material to us Please be aware that if you return material without an RMA number we reserve the right to reject the material You can find detailed information about how to obtain an RMA number on the Basler website at www baslerweb com Basler sprint Color Cameras 297 Troubleshooting and Support AW00069909000 8 3 Fault Finding Using the Camera LED During bootup the camera loads firmware and performs initial self checks Once bootup is complete the camera performs a continuous series of self checks If an error condition is detected the LED will begin to flash The number of flashes indicate the detected error as shown in Table 45 If several error states are present the LED outputs the error code that has the highest priority To get more information about the camera s current condition you can check the camera status as described in Sectio
33. the image of the object will cross line B first and line A second as is apparent from Figure 22 through Figure 25 After having enabled the Raw Line A First line acquisition mode the following will occur in a sequence of ExSync cycles The first cycle of the ExSync signal will trigger the start of image acquisition i e exposure on both lines in the sensor The exposure time you are using will apply to both lines time the start of pixel data readout for both lines time the start of transmission of line A pixel data The values from line B are held in a buffer in the camera The second cycle of the ExSync signal will time the start of transmission of line B pixel data No exposure will occur The third cycle of the ExSync signal will trigger the start of image acquisition i e exposure on both lines in the sensor The exposure time you are using will apply to both lines time the start of pixel data readout for both lines time the start of transmission of line A pixel data The values from line B are held in a buffer in the camera The fourth cycle of the ExSync signal will time the start of transmission of line B pixel data No exposure will occur And so on For more information about triggering line acquisition and controlling exposure see Section 4 on page 99 To better understand how Raw Line A First line acquisition and object movement relate consider the example that is illustrated in Figure 22 through Figu
34. then the camera would be set for 3 42 dB of gain Note You do not need to set both the raw field and the absolute field Setting just one of the fields is sufficient and you can choose to set whichever field best suits your needs 7 2 2 2 Feature Control and Status Register Details Camera Link Clock Speed CSR Register Base Address 0x3900 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Clock Speed Offset 0x0001 Size 1 Byte Type Read Write Description Writing an integer to this field sets the clock speed for the Camera Link interface 0x06 40 MHz clock speed 0x0e 80 MHz clock speed See Section 2 8 5 on page 38 for more information about the camera link clock speed Basler sprint Color Cameras 243 Configuring the Camera AW00069909000 Video Data Output Mode CSR Register Base Address 0x1700 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set ou
35. 00 eee 294 7 3 2 3 Calculating the Block Check Character 295 7 4 Binary Command Sample Code 0 0 cette 296 8 Troubleshooting and Support lleeslslleeeesseeee 297 8 1 Tech Support Resources rirani pat are pe nean aA DPA EEO eee 297 8 2 Obtaining an RMA Number sssssesesee eee 297 8 3 Fault Finding Using the CameraLED 0 0 cece 298 8 4 Troubleshooting Charts 0 cette eee 300 8 4 No Image eben See ta edet Mees Wa oe Sa age a ee 301 8 4 2 Poor Quality Image llis 303 8 43 Interfacing vier Se ae ew edes oe PEDEM ae 304 8 4 4 RS 644 Serial Communication llle 305 8 4 5 Before Calling Basler Technical Support lille 306 REVISION HIStory oce coon ei turend oraa rane EERZRERPELEWCeRPqes REA ed 309 hr ap rr H es 313 vi Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 Specifications Requirements and Precautions This section lists the camera models covered by the manual It provides the general specifications for each model and outlines the basic requirements for using the cameras This section also includes specific precautions that you should keep in mind when using the cameras We strongly recommend that you read and follow the precautions 1 1 Document Applicability This User s Manual applies to sprint color cameras No
36. 1 eabe de begets sig g 10 01 eje Jexid cd sug g 10 01 ejeq Iexid La sug 8 10 01 eje J8xig od 90D lexid PI EA geq PIIeA eur SUI powwes6 Old JO pug 10 jeubis ou SX3 Basler sprint Color Cameras 212 Features AW00069909000 euynsodx3 pewwes6o1g 10 pejoduoo jaAe7 e6py ui apo indino ereqg oepiA deL v pue apon uonisinboy eur gou uim UOISsiWsUBI Jexig duiejs 06 614 suq g 40 OL ZE eje OXld ed suq g 40 OL ZL eq 8Xld ea suq g 40 OL ZL eeq OXld Ig sig g 40 OL ZL ejeq Jextid od 90D lexid PIIEA eed PI EA our Sul powwesb 01d Jo pus 10 jeubis ou SX3 2138 Basler sprint Color Cameras Features AW00069909000 6 8 2 Line Stamp with Raw Enhanced Raw Line Acquisition Mode With Raw or Enhanced Raw line acquisition mode the stamp pixel values are transmitted for each related color separately as contiguous data streams on all available taps This is illustrated in Figure for e g Raw Line A First and Enhanced Raw Line A First line acquisition modes When stamp pixel values are transmitted for line A the stamp pixel values RS related to the red pixel values RA are transmitted on all available taps first and the stamp pixel values GS related to the green pixel values GA are transmitted on all available taps second When stamp pixel values are transmitted for line B the stamp pixel values GS related to the g
37. 1 on page 234 you use the Exposure Time Control Mode parameter in the Exposure parameters group to select the free run edge controlled or free run programmable exposure time control mode The Line Period parameter is used to set the line period If you select the free run programmable mode you can use the Exposure Time parameter to set the exposure time By Setting CSRs You select the exposure time control mode by writing the appropriate value to the Mode field of the Exposure Time Control Mode CSR see page 246 You set the line period by writing a value in us to the Absolute Line Period field or by writing an integer value to the Raw Line Period field of the Line Period CSR see page 249 If you select the free run programmable mode you will also need to set the exposure time You set the exposure time by writing a value in us to the Absolute Exposure Time field or by writing an integer value to the Raw Exposure Time field of the Exposure Time CSR see page 247 Section 7 2 2 on page 242 explains CSRs and the difference between using the absolute field and the raw field in a CSR Section 7 3 1 on page 289 explains using read write commands 4 2 3 Guidelines When Using Free Run When using free run mode to control exposure the following guideline must be followed In the free run programmable mode the minimum exposure time and the maximum exposure time must be within the limits specified in the Exposure Time CSR see page 247
38. 3 09 us Level Controlled Exposure 2 94 us 3 04 us Frame Valid De lay for the Raw Line Acquisition Mode 80 MHz Min Max Programmable 9 43 us 9 55 us Edge Controlled Exposur 9 43 us 9 55 us Level Controlled Exposure 9 43 us 9 54 us Frame Valid Delay for the Enhanced Raw Line Acquisition Mode 80 MHz Min Max Table 24 Line Valid Frame Valid Delays with the 4k Camera Set for 4 Tap Video Data Output Modes Basler sprint Color Cameras 137 Video Data Output Modes Line Valid Frame Valid Delays for 4 Tap Modes 4k Cameras Programmable 9 45 us 9 57 us Edge Controlled Exposure 9 45 us 9 57 us Level Controlled Exposure 9 45 us 9 57 us AW00069909000 Table 24 Line Valid Frame Valid Delays with the 4k Camera Set for 4 Tap Video Data Output Modes 8k Camera Line Valid Frame Valid Delays for 4 Tap Modes 8k Camera Line Valid Delay for the RGB Line Acquisition Mode 40 MHz Min Max Programmable 3 08 us 3 21 us Edge Controlled Exposure 3 13 us 3 26 us Level Controlled Exposure 3 08 us 3 21 us Frame Valid Delay for the Raw Line Acquisition Mode 40 MHz Min Max Programmable 3 21 us 3 36 us Edge Controlled Exposure 3 21 us 3 36 us Level Controlled Exposure 3 21 us 3 36 us Frame Valid Delay for the Enhanced Raw Line Acquisition Mode 40 MHz Min Max Programmable 3 23 us 3 39 us E
39. 9 on page 114 Chapter 5 Entered Table 10 on page 115 instead of text Simplified Table 11 on page 116 Chapter 6 Integrated Gain Green 2 in Setting the Additional Color specific Gain on page 161 Added new section on Gain Green 2 feature on page 162 Integrated information in Section 6 4 5 on page 168 about the possibility to generate shading values when the AOI is set to a smaller value than the full length of the sensor Basler sprint Color Cameras 311 Revision History AW00069909000 Doc ID Number Date Changes AW00069908000 8 Nov 2012 Added new section on adjusting the color performance of the camera on page 184 Added new section on special color settings for different light sources on page 187 Chapter 7 Added note box on camera versions on page 233 Added to the Feature Control and Status Registers section Low Line Rate Compensation CSR on page 245 Gain Green 2 CSR on page 258 Gain Green 2 Enable CSR on page 259 AW00069909000 31 May 2013 Updated the mail addresses on the back of the front page Entered for 2k and 4k that a V mount lens adapter is also available Section 1 3 1 on page 6 Entered restriction for 2048 70kc and spL4096 70kc 137 kHz line rate for ExSync operation Section 1 2 on page 2 Section 2 7 2 on page 35 Section 4 1 1 on page 99 Inserted note on cable length limitations for 80 MHz cameras in Section 2 4 1 on page 31 Inserted note on Exposure Time
40. Basler sprint Color Cameras 105 Exposure Start and Exposure Time Control AW00069909000 4 3 Maximum Allowed Line Rate Minimum Line Period If the enhanced raw line acquisition mode is selected in ExSync operation the Valid for the spL2048 140km and for the spL4096 140km only maximum line rate for these camera models is 137 kHz Knowing the maximum allowed line acquisition rate or the minimum line period will be particularly important when you want to operate the camera under the control of an external sync signal see page 35 The formulas given below provide insight into the factors limiting the maximum allowed line rate For most camera settings the formulas will allow determining the maximum allowed line acquisition rate For some camera settings however the maximum allowed line acquisition rate may be lower than suggested by the formulas We therefore recommend to generally determine the maximum allowed line acquisition rate via the CCT or the line period CSR To determine the maximum allowed line acquisition rate check the Line Period parameter in the Exposure parameter group of the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 234 or check the absolute min field of the Line Period CSR see page 249 and use the line period value to calculate the maximum allowed line acquisition rate Check the line period value before setting the camera to operate under the control of an external sync signal The line period value will e
41. Blue sets an additional amount of gain for the blue pixels The total gain for the blue pixels will be the sum of Gain and Gain Blue The following default settings apply to the additional color specific gains Additional Color specific Gain Setting dB of Color specific Gain Gain Red 4096 0 Gain Green 6144 3 5 Gain Blue 8192 6 0 Table 38 Default Settings of Additional Color specific Gain By default Gain Green 2 is disabled The additional color specific gain used for white balancing works like the global Gain see Section 6 1 on page 155 and the same formula applies for calculating the dB from the integer settings Additional Color specific Gain in dB 20 x log g 8 amp dltional color specific setting The following minimum and maximum settings apply to the additional color specific gain and to the total gain i e global Gain plus the additional color specific gain must not exceed 12 0 dB Gain Setting dB of Gain 2731 minimum allowed 3 5 16383 maximum allowed 12 0 Table 39 dB of Gain at Various Settings Basler sprint Color Cameras 159 Features D AW00069909000 Note High gain settings will degrade the image quality and high settings of the global Gain will limit your ability for white balancing We therefore strongly recommend using settings that will keep the sum of the gobal gain and the color specific gain distinctly below 12 0 dB This recommenda
42. Color Cameras 165 Features AW00069909000 The file format of the user shading value file for a Basler sprint ESC camera is different from the file format for a standard Basler sprint camera Accordingly a file generated by a Basler sprint ESC camera can not be used in a standard Basler sprint camera and vice versa Therefore note Note When uploading a user shading value file to a Basler sprint ESC camera make sure the file was generated using a Basler sprint ESC camera to a standard Basler sprint camera make sure the file was generated using a standard Basler sprint camera 6 4 3 Types of Shading Correction There are two types of shading correction available on the camera DSNU shading correction and PRNU shading correction You can set the camera to do only DSNU correction to do only PRNU correction or to do both types of correction DSNU Shading Correction When a line scan camera with a digital sensor captures a line in complete darkness all of the pixel values in the line should be near zero and they should be equal In practice slight variations in the performance of the pixels in the sensor will cause some variation in the pixel values output from the camera when the camera is capturing lines in darkness This type of variation is know as Dark Signal Non uniformity DSNU DSNU shading correction corrects for the variations caused by DSNU PRNU Shading Correction When a line scan camera with a digital sensor captur
43. Control Mode parameter and camera over triggering in Section 4 1 2 on page 101 Updated formula 4 in Section 4 1 2 on page 101 and Section 4 3 on page 106 new value for camera link readout gap parameter Removed restriction 2k and 4k Cameras Only in the title of the following sections because the feature is now available in the new spL8192 39kc camera depending on the firmware version Color Adjustment Section 6 6 1 on page 179 Adapting the Color Adjustment Settings to Different Light Sources Section 6 6 2 on page 183 Integrated enhanced shading correction ESC in Section 6 4 2 on page 165 Added note on availability of line stamp and color adjustment features for the spL8192 39kc in Section 6 6 1 on page 179 and Section 6 8 on page 206 Updated the procedure description for setting the color enhancement feature in Section 6 6 2 1 on page 184 312 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Index Numerics 2 tap video data output modes 119 3 tap video data output modes 126 4 tap video data output modes 132 6 tap video data output mode 140 8 tap video data output mode 146 A absolute values sssssssse 243 acquisition modes see line acquisition modes additive mixing eenen 180 AO see area of interest area of interest 109 163 Segment erre renes 108 area of interest length cont
44. Controlled Exposure 2 99 us 3 11 us Table 13 Line Valid Frame Valid Delays with the 2k Camera Set for 2 Tap Video Data Output Modes 4k Cameras Line Valid Frame Valid Delays for 2 Tap Modes 4k Cameras Line Valid Delay for the RGB Line Acquisition Mode 40 MHz Min Max Programmable 3 10 us 3 23 us Edge Controlled Exposure 3 15 us 3 28 us Level Controlled Exposure 3 10 us 3 23 us Frame Valid De lay for the Raw Line Acquisition Mode 40 MHz Min Max Programmable 3 15 us 3 30 us Edge Controlled Exposure 3 15 us 3 30 us Level Controlled Exposure 3 15 us 3 30 us Table 14 Line Valid Frame Valid Delays with the 4k Camera Set for 2 Tap Video Data Output Modes Basler sprint Color Cameras 123 Video Data Output Modes Line Valid Frame Valid Delays for 2 Tap Modes 4k Cameras Frame Valid Delay for the Enhanced Raw Line Acquisition Mode 40 MHz Min Max Programmable 3 17 us 3 33 us Edge Controlled Exposure 3 17 us 3 33 us Level Controlled Exposure 3 18 us 3 33 us Line Valid Delay for the RGB Line Acquisition Mode 80 MHz Min Max Programmable 2 93 us 3 03 us Edge Controlled Exposure 2 98 us 3 08 us Level Controlled Exposure 2 93 us 3 03 us Frame Valid Delay for the Raw Line Acquisition Mode 80 MHz Min Max Programmable 3 02 us 3 13 us Edge Controlled Exposur 3 02 us 3 13 us Level Controlled
45. ER ud Los Timing diagrams are not to scale N At full resolution virtual pixels N 4096 on the 8k model 2048 on 4k models and 1024 on 2k models If the AOI feature is used N will be determined by the AOI settings Fig 19 Four Tap Mode with Edge Level Controlled or Programmed Exposure RGB Dummy data are transmitted on the D3 tap Basler sprint Color Cameras 47 Line Acquisition Modes AW00069909000 3 2 1 4 6 Tap Output Mode ExSync Co a NN NN NNN tt Signal 3 Xl 5 ls i e LLL i gt Line Valid Delay see Table 29 and Table 30 Or End of D Programmed Time 4 I Line Valid Delay see Table 29 and Table 30 Lng oo oO l EN paa o o EN ee FUR UTE DO Pixel Data 8 bits D1 Pixel Data 8 bits D2 Pixel Data 8 bits D3 Pixel Data 8 bits D4 Pixel Data 8 bits D5 Pixel Data 8 bits Timing diagrams are not to scale N At full resolution virtual pixels N 4096 on the 8k model 2048 on 4k models and 1024 on 2k models If the AOI feature is used N will be determined by the AOI settings Fig 20 Six Tap Mode with Edge Level Controlled or Programmed Exposure RGB 48 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Line Acquisition Modes 3 2 1 5 8 Tap Output Mode a ee ee TC ee a eee TOTEM er a a a ar ExSync SAS 2a a ee A eg a aS PRAY ALA VAY AAS YS LAT oS EE NN E UE RUM NN RN ENTE ON US Signal F Line Valid Delay
46. ExSync cycle and the pixel data from line A transmitted on the fourth ExSync cycle image the same area of the object And the pixel data from line B transmitted on the fifth ExSync cycle and the pixel data from line A transmitted on the sixth ExSync cycle image the same area of the object and so on For further clarification see Figure 44 through Figure 49 For more information about triggering line acquisition and controlling exposure see Chapter 4 on page 99 mode the pixel data from the first transmitted line B and the pixel data from the After having enabled the Enhanced Raw Line B First A Delayed line acquisition first transmitted line A are not useful To better understand how Enhanced Raw Line B First A Delayed line acquisition mode and object movement relate consider the example that is illustrated in Figure 44 through Figure 49 This example describes Enhanced Raw Line B First A Delayed line acquisition mode when an ExSync signal and the programmable exposure control mode are used The example looks at two contiguous points on an object moving past the camera Each point represents the area on the object that will be captured by each line in the sensor when a line acquisition is performed As you look at the figures notice that on the ExSync cycles where an acquisition is performed line B will capture one point on the object and line A will capture a different point on the object Also notice that on
47. First Line Acquisition Mode llle 78 3 4 2 Enhanced Raw Line B First A Delayed Line Acquisition Mode 2k and 4k Cameras Only 0 0005 82 3 4 2 1 Pixel Value Transmission for the Enhanced Raw Line B First Line Acquisition Mode llle 90 3 5 Operating Recommendations 2 0 0 0 cc eee 94 3 5 1 Camera Operating Recommendations 000 cee eee eee 94 3 5 2 System Design Recommendations 02000 cee eee eee 94 3 5 8 System Design Calculations liess 95 4 Exposure Start and Exposure Time Control 99 4 1 ExSync Controlled Operation 0 0 eee ene 99 4 1 1 Basics of ExSync Controlled Operation 0 0 00 eee eee 99 4 1 2 Selecting an ExSync Exposure Mode and Setting the Exposure Time 101 4 1 3 Low Line Rate Compensation a a sanaaa eere 102 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 4 1 4 Guidelines When Using an ExSync Signal 000 0055 4 2 s PreGRuUN eu eee iere s Baers gb Geto arae cee nose eei pq 4 2 1 Basics of Free Run Controlled Operation 0 00 ee eee eee 4 2 2 Selecting a Free Run Exposure Mode Setting the Line Period and Setting the Exposure Time llli 4 2 3 Guidelines When Using Free Run 0 00 eee 4 3 Maximum Allowed Line Rate Minimum Line Period 00 4 31 Max Segment AOI Pixels llli 4 3 2 Example of Calculating the M
48. Inquiry Registers and Section 7 3 1 on page 289 for an explanation of using read write commands Note The Overtemperature parameter in the CCT and bit 20 in the Camera Status field of the Camera Status Inquiry Register will be set to 1 when the camera detects an overtemperature condition They will remain set to 1 until the condition is corrected and a reset or a power off on is performed Basler sprint Color Cameras 223 Features AW00069909000 6 12 2 Camera Power Undervoltage or Overvoltage Condition Detected The required camera power voltage for the camera is 12 VDC 10 If a camera power voltage below but close to 9 8 VDC is applied to the camera a camera power undervoltage condition may be detected Similarly if a camera power voltage between 14 and 18 VDC is applied to the camera a camera power overvoltage condition will be detected The LED on the back of the camera will begin to flash red When the camera power voltage is returned to its normal range the error condition will clear and the LED will stop flashing Note that if the camera power voltage rises above 18 VDC the camera s internal power will switch off as described in Section 6 11 on page 222 You can check to see if the camera has detected a camera power undervoltage or overvoltage condition with the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary read commands from within your own application to read the camera s inquiry registers With the CCT
49. Line B in Gs Object Passing Camera 4 amp Movement Point 3 Point 2 Point 1 Fig 39 Enhanced Raw Line A First B Delayed Line Acquisition ExSync Cycle 4 Basler sprint Color Cameras 75 Line Acquisition Modes AW00069909000 ExSync Cycle 5 A2 Image of point 2 acquired by line A A IIT ii UPPER BUFFER Drawing not to scale B2 Image of point 2 acquired by line B LOWER BUFFER B3 Image of point 3 acquired by line B A FEW eI fo o Line A Line B Object Passing Camera N 44 Movement Point 3 Point 2 Point 1 Fig 40 Enhanced Raw Line A First B Delayed Line Acquisition ExSync Cycle 5 76 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Line Acquisition Modes ExSync Cycle 6 B2 Image of point 2 acquired by line B A IL ii r UPPER BUFFER Drawing not to scale LOWER BUFFER L B3 Image of point 3
50. Line Valid Delay for the RGB Line Acquisition Mode 40 MHz Min Max Programmable 3 08 us 3 20 us Edge Controlled Exposure 3 12 us 3 25 us Level Controlled Exposure 3 08 us 3 20 us Frame Valid Delay for the Raw Line Acquisition Mode 40 MHz Min Max Programmable 3 10 us 3 25 us Edge Controlled Exposure 3 10 us 3 25 us Level Controlled Exposure 3 10 us 3 25 us Frame Valid Delay for the Enhanced Raw Line Acquisition Mode 40 MHz Min Max Programmable 3 13 us 3 28 us Edge Controlled Exposure 3 13 us 3 28 us Level Controlled Exposure 3 13 us 3 28 us Line Valid Delay for the RGB Line Acquisition Mode 80 MHz Min Max Programmable 2 91 us 3 01 us Edge Controlled Exposure 2 96 us 3 06 us Level Controlled Exposure 2 91 us 3 01 us Table 13 Line Valid Frame Valid Delays with the 2k Camera Set for 2 Tap Video Data Output Modes 122 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Video Data Output Modes Line Valid Frame Valid Delays for 2 Tap Modes 2k Cameras Frame Valid Delay for the Raw Line Acquisition Mode 80 MHz Min Max Programmable 2 97 us 3 09 us Edge Controlled Exposur 2 97 us 3 09 us Level Controlled Exposure 2 97 us 3 09 us Frame Valid Delay for the Enhanced Raw Line Acquisition Mode 80 MHz Min Max Programmable 2 99 us 3 11 us Edge Controlled Exposure 2 99 us 3 11 us Level
51. Link Transmitters X Y and Z is as shown in Table 31 on page 148 Table 32 on page 149 and Table 33 on page 150 respectively The Camera Link clock is used to time the transmission of acquired pixel data As shown in Figure 21 on page 49 Figure 28 on page 59 and Figure on page 81 the camera samples and transmits data on each rising edge of the Camera Link clock The Camera Link pixel clock frequency is as stated in Section 2 8 5 on page 38 The frame valid bit indicates that line A is being transmitted in the Raw Line A First and in the Enhanced Raw Line A First B Delayed line acquisition modes only The line valid bit indicates that a valid line is being transmitted The data valid bit indicates that valid pixel data is being transmitted Pixel data is only valid when the frame valid in the Raw and Enhanced Raw line acquisition modes only line valid and data valid bits are all high Note The video data output mode that you select may affect the camera s maximum allowed line rate See Section 4 3 on page 106 The data sequence outlined below along with Figure 21 on page 49 Figure 28 on page 59 and Figure on page 81 describes what is happening at the inputs to the Camera Link transmitters in the camera 146 Basler sprint Color Cameras AWO00069909000 Video Data Output Modes Video Data Sequence for 8 Tap 8 Bit Mode The following assumes that the Raw or Enhanced Raw line acquisition mode is selected where a frame valid sign
52. MHz Camera Link clock cycle 0 025 us for 80 MHz clock cycle 1L 1L Line Valid m MI m L Data Vaid 4 14 p es LIEU LRL UU UU Clock DO i RA V RA RA Y RA Pixel Daia C0 XK 949949006499 00 000 909 99 X000 D1 Poel Data OCC 99 O00 0949 X00 D2 xel Data OXX OQ D3 PielData XX 9 DOO OOE aM X00 D4 PwiDas 00000449 044900000099 090000 D5 Pixel Data XX 49 00000 4 OO0O00 D6 PixelData XOX 04 49 000009090000 Sa BB Y BB i BB Pixel Data XXX EX ODOOX OOE OO OO Timing diagrams are not to scale N At full resolution N 8192 on the 8k model 4096 on 4k models and 2048 on 2k models If the AOI feature is used N will be determined by the AOI settings Eight Tap Mode with Edge Level Controlled or Programmed Exposure Enhanced Raw Line A First Basler sprint Color Cameras 81 Line Acquisition Modes AW00069909000 3 4 2 Enhanced Raw Line B First A Delayed Line Acquisition Mode 2k and 4k Cameras Only The Enhanced Raw Line B First A Delayed line acquisition mode is analogous to the Enhanced Raw Line A First B Delayed line acquisition mode see Section 3 4 1 on page 70 with the roles of lines A and B interchanged In the Enhanced Raw Line B First line acquisition mode the two lines which include pixel data from the same area of the object are transmitted immediately one after the other The pixel data for line B will be transmitted first followed by the related pixel data for lin
53. Modes 143 Video Data Output Modes AW00069909000 The tables below show the line valid delays for the RGB line acquisition mode see Figure 20 on page 48 when the camera is set for full resolution and 6 tap video data output mode Note that the delays depend on the line acquisition mode setting and the camera link clock speed setting The delays also depend on whether the camera is a 4k or an 8k camera Each delay can vary slightly within the stated minimum and maximum values 2k Cameras Line Valid Frame Valid Delays for 6 Tap Mode 2k Cameras Line Valid Delay for the RGB Line Acquisition Mode 40 MHz Min Max Programmable 3 07 us 3 19 us Edge Controlled Exposure 3 12 us 3 24 us Level Controlled Exposure 3 07 us 3 19 us Table 28 Line Valid Frame Valid Delays with the 2k Camera Set for 6 Tap Video Data Output Mode 4k Cameras Line Valid Delays for 6 Tap Mode 4k Cameras Line Valid Delay for the RGB Line Acquisition Mode 40 MHz Min Max Programmable 3 10 us 3 23 us Edge Controlled Exposure 3 15 us 3 28 us Level Controlled Exposure 3 10 us 3 23 us Line Valid Delay for the RGB Line Acquisition Mode 80 MHz Min Max Programmable 9 33 us 9 43 us Edge Controlled Exposure 9 68 us 9 78 us Level Controlled Exposure 9 33 us 9 43 us Table 29 Line Valid Delays with the 4k Camera Set for 6 Tap Video Data Output Mode 144 Basler
54. No settings Correct the setting Go to the interfacing troubleshooting chart Did you set up free run using the No gt AW00069909000 Go to the RS 644 serial communications troubleshooting chart CCT or with binary commands CCT Binary Commands Check to make sure that The exposure time is set no lower than 2 0 us page 249 Are the settings OK Switch on the test image one Can the test image be seen Yes Replace the camera The line period is set no lower than the minimum stated inthe No gt line period CSR see Correct the settings Go to the interfacing ubleshooting chart No gt tro Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Troubleshooting and Support 8 4 2 Poor Quality Image Use this chart if the image is poor quality is completely white or is completely black If you get no image at all when you attempt to capture an image with the frame grabber use the chart that appears in Section 8 4 1 on page 301 Use the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT to set the camera for test image one Capture several images and carefully check the pixel values in each image Most frame grabbers include software tools that allow you to see the individual values of each pixel in the image and histograms that display distributions of the pixel values in the image The pixel values in your captured test image should be exactly as des
55. Not Used Port C2 TxIN19 RxOut19 D1 Bit 2 D1 Bit 2 Not Used Port C3 TxIN20 RxOut20 D1 Bit3 D1 Bit 3 Not Used Port C4 TxIN21 RxOut2 1 D1 Bit 4 D1 Bit 4 Not Used Port C5 TxIN22 RxOut22 D1 Bit5 D1 Bit5 Not Used Port C6 TxIN16 RxOut16 D1 Bit 6 D1 Bit6 Not Used Port C7 TxIN17 RxOut17 D1 Bit 7 D1 Bit 7 Not Used LVAL TxIN24 RxOut24 Line Valid Line Valid Line Valid FVAL TxIN25 RxOut25 Frame Valid Frame Valid Frame Valid DVAL TxIN26 RxOut26 Data Valid Data Valid Data Valid Spare TxIN23 RxOut23 Not Used Not Used Not Used Strobe TxINCLK RxOutClk Pixel Clock Pixel Clock Pixel Clock Table 12 Bit Assignments for 2 Tap Output Modes MDR Conn 1 Transmitter X Present for the Raw and Enhanced Raw line acquisition modes only Basler sprint Color Cameras 121 Video Data Output Modes AW00069909000 The tables below show the following delays when the camera is set for full resolution and 2 tap video data output mode Line valid delays for the RGB line acquisition mode see Figure 17 on page 45 Frame valid delays for the Raw and Enhanced Raw line acquisition modes Figure 26 on page 57 and Figure 42 on page 79 Note that the delays depend on the line acquisition mode setting and the camera link clock speed setting The delays also depend on whether the camera is a 2k 4k or 8k camera Each delay can vary slightly within the stated minimum and maximum values 2k Cameras Line Valid Frame Valid Delays for 2 Tap Modes 2k Cameras
56. Only 6 4 8 Types of Shading Correction llle eren 6 4 4 Enabling Shading Correction llle eee 6 4 5 Generating and Saving User Shading Correction Values 6 4 6 Activating a Shading Values File 00 0 eee eee 6 4 7 Copying the Factory Shading Values into the User Shading Values File 6 4 8 Downloading a Shading Values File to YourPC 6 4 9 Uploading a Shading Values File to Your Camera 6 5 Gamma Correction crs piden enel We dee ees PEOR E ee a a eee 6 6 Color Enhancement 2 0000 6 6 1 Color Adjustment 0 0 cece eens 6 6 1 1 The RGB Color Space 0 2 cee ee Basler sprint Color Cameras Table of Contents Table of Contents AW00069909000 6 6 1 2 Hue and Saturation Adjustment 20 0000 181 6 6 2 Adapting the Color Adjustment Settings to Different Light Sources 183 6 6 2 1 A Procedure for Setting the Color Enhancements 184 6 6 2 2 List of Color Settings for Different Light Sources 187 6 7 Testlmages sic bee eis bet m EE URP RE ARE TI wane 189 6 7 4 Test Image Two Moving Gray Gradient llle 191 6 7 1 1 Test Image Two Generated with the RGB Line Acquisition Mode 191 6 7 1 2 Test Image Two Generated with the Raw and Enhanced Raw Line Acquisition Modes 193 6 7 2 Test Image Seven Fixed Red Gradient 2 0000 eee 1
57. Read only Description String containing the camera s firmware version The string is zero terminated if less than 128 bytes are needed and unterminated if all 128 bytes are needed Camera Status Inquiry The camera has been programmed to detect several error conditions When an error condition is detected a flag is set The camera status inquiry register allows you to read the error flags Register Base Address 0x0C00 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this inquiry register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available 238 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Configuring the Camera Register Base Address 0x0C00 Bit 0 1 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 31 Field Name Camera Status Offset 0x0001 Size 4 Bytes Type Read only Description Each bit in this field specifies an error condition see table below Bit O is the least significant bit If a bit is set to 1 the error condition assigned to that bit is present If the bit is set to 0 the error is not present Description Reserved The camera is busy performing an internal operation such as generating shading values A reset has occurred Parameter error For example a parameter has been set to a value that is out of range or not allowed A black image is produced all p
58. The AOI Starting Pixel AOI Length lt 8193 When the area of interest feature is used the maximum allowed line rate may increase For more information about the impact of the AOI settings on the maximum allowed line rate see Section 4 3 on page 106 6 3 1 Setting the AOI You can set the AOI with the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary write commands from within your own application to set the camera s control and status registers CSRs With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 234 you use the AOI Starting Pixel parameter and the AOI Length parameter in the AOI parameters group to set the AOI By Setting CSRs You set the AOI starting pixel by writing a value to the Starting Pixel field of the AOI Starting Pixel CSR see page 260 You set the AOI length by writing a value to the Length field of the AOI Length CSR see page 261 See Section 7 2 2 on page 242 for an explanation of CSRs and Section 7 3 1 on page 289 for an explanation of using read write commands 164 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Features 6 4 Shading Correction 6 4 4 Standard Shading Correction In theory when a digital camera captures an image of a uniform object the pixel values output from the camera should be uniform In practice however variations in optics and lighting and small variations in the sensor s performance can cause the camera output to be non uniform even when it is capturing images
59. TxIN27 RxOut27 D6 Bit 6 Port G7 TxIN5 RxOut5 D6 Bit 7 MSB Port HO TxIN7 RxOut7 D7 Bit 0 Port H1 TxIN8 RxOut8 D7 Bit 1 Port H2 TxIN9 RxOut9 D7 Bit 2 Port H3 TxIN12 RxOut12 D7 Bit 3 Port H4 TxIN13 RxOut13 D7 Bit4 Port H5 TxIN14 RxOut14 D7 Bit 5 Port H6 TxIN10 RxOut10 D7 Bit 6 Port H7 TxIN11 RxOut11 D7 Bit 7 Spare TXIN15 RxOut15 Not Used Spare TXIN18 RxOut18 Not Used Spare TxIN19 RxOut19 Not Used Spare TxIN20 RxOut20 Not Used Spare TxIN21 RxOut21 Not Used Spare TxIN22 RxOut22 Not Used Spare TxIN16 RxOut16 Not Used Spare TXIN17 RxOut17 Not Used LVAL TxIN24 RxOut24 Line Valid FVAL TXIN25 RxOut25 Frame Valid DVAL TxIN26 RxOut26 Data Valid Spare TxIN23 RxOut23 Not Used Strobe TxINCLK RxOutClk Pixel Clock Table 33 Bit Assignments for 8 Tap Output Mode MDR Conn 2 Transmitter Z Present for the Raw and Enhanced Raw line acquisition modes only 150 AW00069909000 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Video Data Output Modes The tables below show the following delays when the camera is set for full resolution and 8 tap video data output mode Line valid delays for the RGB line acquisition mode see Figure 17 on page 45 through Figure 21 on page 49 Frame valid delays for the Raw and Enhanced Raw line acquisition modes Figure 26 on page 57 through Figure 28 on page 59 and Figure 42 on page 79 through Figure on page 81 Note that the delays depend on the line acquisition mode setting and the Camera Link
60. Type Read only Maximum allowed integer value for the saturation cyan value setting Field Name Saturation Cyan Increment Offset 0x0027 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description An integer value indicating the increment for the saturation cyan value setting Field Name Hue Cyan Status Offset 0x0028 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of the hue adjustment for cyan 0x00 The adjustment is not available 0x01 The adjustment is available and all related settings are OK Field Name Hue Cyan Value Offset 0x0029 Size 1 Byte Type Read Write Description Writing an integer to this field sets the hue value of cyan for predominantly cyan colors in the image The hue cyan value can be set to a minimum of 128 and can be increased to a maximum of 127 If the hue cyan value is set to a negative number cyan will be mixed with blue If the hue cyan value is set to a positive number cyan will be mixed with green If the hue cyan value is set to 128 corresponding to a rotation in negative direction by 60 in the color hexagon cyan will be completely transformed into blue If the value is set to 127 corresponding to a rotation in positive direction by 60 in the color hexagon cyan will be completely transformed into green If the value is set to 0 cyan will not be changed See Section 6 6 1 on page 179 for more information about the color adjustment feature Field Name H
61. With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 234 you use the Offset parameter in the Gain amp Offset parameters group to set the offset By Setting CSRs You set the offset by writing a value in digital numbers to the Absolute Offset field or by writing an integer value to the Raw Offset field of the Offset CSR see page 252 Section 7 2 2 on page 242 explains CSRs and the difference between using the absolute field and the raw field in a CSR Section 7 3 1 on page 289 explains using read write commands 158 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Features 6 2 White Balance White balancing can be achieved by individually adjusting gain settings for the red green and blue pixels The total gain for each color will be the sum of the global Gain see Section 6 1 on page 155 and the additional color specific gain Gain Red sets an additional amount of gain for the red pixels The total gain for the red pixels will be the sum of Gain and Gain Red Gain Green sets an additional amount of gain for all green pixels in line A and line B If Gain Green 2 is disabled the total gain for the green pixels will be the sum of Gain and Gain Green If Gain Green 2 is enabled Gain Green sets an additional amount of gain only for the green pixels in line A Gain Green 2 sets an additional amount of gain only for the green pixels in line B For more information about gain green 2 see Gain Green 2 on page 162 Gain
62. a basic knowledge of the Bayer filter to understand the pixel formats With the Bayer filter each individual pixel of the sensor is covered by a filter that allows light of only one color to strike the pixel The pattern of the Bayer filter used on the camera is as shown in the figure below Pixel Pixel Pixel Pixel 1 2 3 Sensor N Pixel Pixel Pixel Pixel 1 2 3 cave N Fig 12 Bayer Filter Pattern RG Alignment As the figure illustrates within each square of four pixels one pixel sees only red light one sees only blue light and two pixels see only green light This combination mimics the human eye s s sensitivity to color The alignment of the Bayer filter to the pixels is RG Bayer RG alignment means that pixel one and two in each image transmitted from line A will be red and green respectively And pixel one and two in each image transmitted from line B will be green and blue respectively Since the pattern of the Bayer filter is fixed you can use this information to determine the color of all of the other pixels in each line Because the size and the position of the area of interest must be adjusted in increments of 32 the color filter alignment will remain the same regardless of the camera s area of interest AOI settings For more information about the camera s AOI feature see Section 6 3 on page 163 20 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 7 Environmenta
63. a different area of the object Sensor Perpendicularity The sensor lines in the camera must be perpendicular to the conveyor s line of travel If the sensor lines are not perpendicular to the line of travel a slightly different area of the object will fall on each line 94 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Line Acquisition Modes Sensor Conveyor Parallelism The face of the sensor in the camera and the surface of the conveyor should be in parallel planes This condition should be met to ensure that all of the pixels in the sensor lines view the object at the same magnification 3 5 3 System Design Calculations Our recommended approach for calculating system design criteria is tuned to matching the line of view of the sensor to the width of your conveyor The example below illustrates this approach Example Assume the following conditions A 4k camera is used The Enhanced Raw line acquisition is used requiring the image to move by 10 um between two successive exposures Conveyor width 2 850 mm Conveyor movement per encoder step 0 09 mm Center to center distance between sensor lines 10 um Each line in the sprint s sensor is 10 um wide and they are adjacent to one another Therefore the center to center distance is 10 um Pixel size 10 um Length of sensor line 40 96 mm 4096 pixels line x 10 um pixel With an objective lens in place the direction of travel of the object will cause the image to cross th
64. and Table 36 EM Za 0 050 us for 40 MHz Camera Link clock cycle 0 025 us for 80 MHz clock cycle j L L ud JUV UU UU UUUUUUU UU OCX00990 900000 C OX DONANO OOA TaD X00 OO000 09000008 pee eed 4 0X 0000 90 0 X00 OO000 09000008 DOO eet 4 00000 6906 0000 QOX009 9049 X00X0O0U9 C99 X500 XN 9 OX XK OOO O A UU BOX E Wa Wak Wiz UR NUES Timing diagrams are not to scale N At full resolution N 4096 on 4k models and 2048 on 2k models If the AOI feature is used N will be determined by the AOI settings Fig 35 Eight Tap Mode with Edge Level Controlled or Programmed Exposure Raw Line B First 68 Basler sprint Color Cameras AWO00069909000 AW00069909000 Line Acquisition Modes 3 4 Enhanced Raw Line Acquisition Mode The Enhanced Raw line acquisition mode provides a raw green pixel value for each point of an imaged object and in addition either a raw red or a raw blue pixel value Accordingly each point of the object is imaged twice once by a pixel in line B and once by a pixel in line A For imaging a sensor is used where each individual pixel is covered by a filter that allows light of only one color red green or blue to strike the pixel The pixel values transmitted from line A will be red and green values and the pixel values transmitted from line B will be green and blue values For more information about color creation and about the as
65. e g an 8 bit output mode is selected the gray scale gradient ranges from 0 to 255 and repeats every 256 pixels as shown in Figure 71 The starting pixel values for red green and blue are not defined In the following description however they are assumed to be 0 for the first line The pixel values refer to virtual pixels Section 3 2 on page 42 Therefore each line of the test image includes 1024 pixels for 2k cameras 2048 pixels for 4k cameras and 4096 pixels for 8k cameras The lines of the test image for e g 8 bit output modes are generated in the following way see also Figure 70 On the first cycle of the ExSync signal or the camera s internal control signal the first pixel has a red value R of 0 a green value G of 0 and a blue B value of 0 the second pixel has a red value of 1 a green value of 1 and a blue value of 1 the third pixel has a red value of 2 a green value of 2 and a blue value of 2 and so on On the second cycle the first pixel has a red value of 1 a green value of 1 and a blue value of 1 the second pixel has a red value of 2 a green value of 2 and a blue value of 2 the third pixel has a red value of 3 a green value of 3 and a blue value of 3 and so on The following lines are generated in an analogous way On the 256th cycle the first pixel has a red value of 255 a green value of 255 and a blue value of 255 the second pixel has a red value of 0 a green value of 0 and a blue value of 0
66. enhancement sssssse 179 color hexagon neeese 181 COIOl SPACE sieni eere 180 configuration set control and status register eeen 286 configuration sets defined niin 226 SAVING iiit eee aeiiae 228 configuration tool ssesssse 234 connectors lOCALIONS 2 tir De Lire hes 26 pin assignments sssssse 27 pin numbering eeeeeesss 29 TYPOS nee eto etn 30 contrast value eec 210 control and status registers 235 242 D data valid bit zorii oiie ai 37 delay low line rate compensation 103 design calculations 95 design recommendations system 94 dimensions 2k and 4k cameras 13 BK cameras ssssssseeeee 17 document applicability 1 DSNU shading correction 166 GUST c e E fedens 23 313 Index E edge controlled exposure time control mode sssseseesee 99 104 eight tap video data output mode 146 Enhanced Raw line acquisition mode 69 enhanced shading correction zl cR 165 environmental requirements 21 ESC enhanced shading correction 165 exposure start delay 103 exposure time control and status register sssssssssss 247 exposure time control mode control and status registe
67. entered new lookup table values for only one or two colors make sure you know the kind of values residing in the unchanged lookup table s If you are using the factory configuration set the values output from the sensor for the color with the unchanged lookup table will be transmitted unchanged If you are using a user configuration set the lookup table values previously stored for the user configuration set will be applied to the values output from the sensor for the color with the unchanged lookup table For more information about the factory configuration set and the user configuration sets see Section 6 15 on page 226 Basler sprint Color Cameras 219 Features AW00069909000 Entering Values Into the Lookup Table You can enter 8 bit values into the lookup table with the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary write commands from within your own application to set the camera s control and status registers CSRs With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 234 entering an 8 bit value at an index in the lookup table for a color is a three step process 1 Use the Lookup Table Selector parameter in the Lookup Table parameters group to select the lookup table that relates to the color 2 Use the Lookup Table Index parameter in the Lookup Table parameters group to select an index in the lookup table 3 Enter a value into the Lookup Table Value parameter in the Lookup Table parameters group The
68. example we assume that a BCC is used 0x03 is the BFE field The value in the BFE field is always 0x03 294 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Configuring the Camera 7 3 2 8 Calculating the Block Check Character The use of a block check character BCC in camera commands is optional see Section 7 3 1 on page 289 If you choose to use a BCC the BCC will be the exclusive or sum XOR sum of the bytes in the FTF field the DataLen field the Address field and the Data field of the command frame For the write command example shown in Section 7 3 2 2 on page 294 the block check character is 0x18 Let s consider how this block check character was calculated Calculating XOR sums is most easily understood when numbers are shown in their binary form so in the example calculations shown below the hexadecimal digits in our command have been converted to binary To find the XOR sum of two binary numbers you add the two digits in each column using the following rules If both digits are 0 the result is 0 If both digits are 1 the result is O If one of the digits is a 1 and the other is a 0 the result is 1 With all of this in mind here is how the check digit for the write command shown in Section 7 3 2 2 on page 294 would be calculated 0000 0100 the binary representation of 0x04 FTF 0000 0001 the binary representation of 0x01 DataLen 0000 0101 XOR sum 0000 0101 Previous XOR Sum 0000 0001 the binary represen
69. example you can use a write command to change the value of the Mode field of the Test Image control register When you issue a write command to the camera the value in the register field will be replaced and the camera will send a write response back to the host computer Each field within a control register or an inquiry register has a specific memory address When you issue a binary read or a binary write command the address for the field you want to work with is included as part of the command Section 7 3 1 on page 289 describes the binary read write command format in detail Sample code that illustrates how to use binary read and write commands is available from Basler see Section 7 4 on page 296 Binary read write commands are issued to the camera via the RS 644 serial connection in the Camera Link interface between the frame grabber and the camera A standard application programmer s interface API for asynchronous serial reading and writing via the RS 644 port on the frame grabber has been defined in the Camera Link standard Appendix B API Functions All Camera Link compatible frame grabbers provide a software library dll file named clser dll where is specific to the frame grabber vendor There are four functions exported by that DLL clSeriallnit Initialize the serial communication for a specific board clSerialRead Read bytes from the camera clSerialWrite Write bytes to the camera clSerialClose Close the seria
70. file in the camera is protected and can t be overwritten Basler sprint Color Cameras 231 Features AW00069909000 232 Basler sprint Color Cameras 7 Configuring the Camera The camera comes with a factory set of parameters that will work properly for most applications with only minor changes For normal operation the following parameters are usually configured by the user Video data output mode Line acquisition mode Exposure time control mode Exposure time for ExSync programmable or free run programmable exposure modes Line period for free run exposure modes To customize operation for your particular application the following parameters may e g also need to be configured Gain Offset White Balance Area of Interest Stamp Shading correction The camera is programmable via the RS 644 serial connection that is integrated into the Camera Link interface between the frame grabber and the camera Two methods can be used to change the camera s parameters The first and easier approach is to change the parameters using the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT The CCT is especially useful during initial camera testing and the camera design in process See Section 7 1 on page 234 for more information about the configuration tool You can also change the parameters directly from within your application software by using binary read write commands to set values in the camera s registers see Section 7 2 on page 235 Ba
71. fixed value of 0x56 If the camera is set for a Raw or Enhanced Raw line acquisition mode and if the pixel values are from the green pixels from line B stamp pixel S2 will have a fixed value of 0x57 If the camera is set for a Raw or Enhanced Raw line acquisition mode and if the pixel values are from the blue pixels line B stamp pixel S2 will have a fixed value of 0x58 1 and S2 can be used as a data integrity check They can also be used to find the start of the stamp pixels For more information about line acquisition modes see Section 3 on page 41 Stamp Pixels S3 and S4 Stamp pixels S3 and S4 represent the least significant and most significant bytes respectively of the line counter The line counter increments by one for each line captured by the camera The counter starts at 0 and wraps at 65535 decimal The line counter is reset to 0 whenever the camera is switched off or reset Stamp Pixels S5 S6 S7 and S8 Stamp pixels S5 S6 S7 and S8 represent the least significant lower middle upper middle and most significant bytes respectively of the line sum The line sum is simply the total of all of the pixel values of the related color in the line The line sum does not include the 16 added stamp pixels If the AOI feature is being used the line sum is based only on the pixels within the AOI Stamp Pixels S9 and S10 Stamp pixels S9 and S10 represent the least significant and most significant bytes respectively
72. for 1985 and the length is set for 256 With these settings the AOI falls across the two sensor segments as shown in Figure 58 Segment 1 includes 64 of the pixels in the AOI and segment 2 includes 192 of the pixels in the AOI The Max Seg AOI Pixels in this situation would be 192 because segment 2 contains the largest part of the AOI and the number of AOI pixels in segment 2 is 192 Segment 1 Segment 2 lt Pi L Pixel 1 Pixel 1985 E Pixel 2048 iL Pixel 2049 Pixel 2240 di Pixel 4096 l gt q 64 Pixels 192 Pixels El pixel within the AOI Fig 58 AOI Falling Across Segments Basler sprint Color Cameras 109 Exposure Start and Exposure Time Control AW00069909000 Note If you have set an AOI to extend over two adjacent sensor segments and to use each sensor segment only partially the Max Seg AOI Pixels will be smallest when the AOI is evenly divided across the two segments i e each segment contains the same number of AOI pixels Positioning the AOI so that it is evenly divided across the two segments will yield the best results from formula two The same principle holds if you have set an AOI to extend over three adjacent sensor segments and use the outer sensor segments only partially The Max Seg AOI Pixels will be smallest when the AOI is evenly divided across the two outer segments i e each segment contains the same number of AOI pixels Positioning the AOI so that it is evenly divided across the two out
73. i c a et hk Re RR ped bare bea ed ee 37 2 8 5 Camera Link Pixel Clock 0 0 00 c cette 38 2 8 6 Serial to Frame Grabber 0 0 0 tee 39 2 9 RS 644 Serial Communication llle 39 2 9 1 Making the Serial Connection llillieleeeeeeeeee 39 3 Line Acquisition Modes 00 cece eee eee eee eee 41 Sil IMTOAMUCHON Ye ss vins Bind cia ond secs eb sale arta OMEN dis Gunde bnt ee eA aA 41 3 2 RGB Line Acquisition Mode 0 0 cee tees 42 3 2 1 Pixel Value Transmission for the RGB Line Acquisition Mode 44 3 2 1 1 2 Tap Output Mode 02 eee 45 3 2 1 2 3 Tap Output Mode 2 ee ee 46 3 2 1 8 4 Tap Output Mode 2 ee 47 3 2 1 4 6 Tap Output Mode 0 2 eee ee 48 3 2 1 5 8 Tap OutputMode 0 eee es 49 3 3 Raw Line Acquisition Mode 0 eee Ie 50 3 3 1 Raw Line A First Line Acquisition Mode 00 c eee eee eee 51 3 3 1 1 Pixel Value Transmission for the Raw Line A First Line Acquisition Mode 00 0c eae 56 3 3 2 Raw Line B First Line Acquisition Mode 2k and 4k Cameras Only 60 3 3 2 1 Pixel Value Transmission for the Raw Line B First Line Acquisition Mode 000 eae 65 3 4 Enhanced Raw Line Acquisition Mode 0 cee eee 69 3 4 44 Enhanced Raw Line A First B Delayed Line Acquisition Mode 70 3 4 1 1 Pixel Value Transmission for the Enhanced Raw Line A
74. integer value to this field sets the saturation value of green for predominantly green colors in the image If the saturation green value is set to 64 the saturation of green will not be changed Setting the value to less than 64 will decrease the saturation If for example the value is set to 32 the saturation of green will be halved If the value is set to 0 the saturation of green is zero and green will not be present in the image Setting the value to greater than 64 will increase the saturation If for example the value is set to 128 the saturation of green will be doubled See Section 6 6 1 on page 179 for more information about the color adjustment feature Field Name Saturation Green Min Description Offset 0x001B Size 1 Byte Type Read only Minimum allowed integer value for the saturation green value setting Basler sprint Color Cameras 267 Configuring the Camera AW00069909000 Register Base Address 0x4400 Field Name Saturation Green Max Offset 0x001C Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description Maximum allowed integer value for the saturation green value setting Field Name Saturation Green Increment Offset 0x001D Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description An integer value indicating the increment for the saturation green value setting Field Name Hue Green Status Offset 0x001E Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the st
75. le R glement sur le brouillage radio lectrique Life Support Applications These products are not designed for use in life support appliances devices or systems where malfunction of these products can reasonably be expected to result in personal injury Basler customers using or selling these products for use in such applications do so at their own risk and agree to fully indemnify Basler for any damages resulting from such improper use or sale Warranty Note Do not open the housing of the camera The warranty becomes void if the housing is opened All material in this publication is subject to change without notice and is copyright Basler AG Contacting Basler Support Worldwide Europe Basler AG An der Strusbek 60 62 22926 Ahrensburg Germany Tel 49 4102 463 515 Fax 49 4102 463 599 support europe baslerweb com Americas Basler Inc 855 Springdale Drive Suite 203 Exton PA 19341 U S A Tel 1 610 280 0171 Fax 1 610 280 7608 support usa baslerweb com Asia Basler Asia Pte Ltd 8 Boon Lay Way 03 03 Tradehub 21 Singapore 609964 Tel 65 6425 0472 Fax 65 6425 0473 support asia baslerweb com www baslerweb com AW00069909000 Table of Contents Table of Contents 1 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 1 1 Document Applicability llle RII 1 1 2 General Specifications 00 ee ees 2 1 21 Camera Models with 2k Pix
76. loaded into the work set If there is no activated file the factory set file will be loaded into the work set 6 15 4 Downloading Configuration Set Files to Your PC Once you have saved user sets to the user set files in your camera you can download the user set files to your PC You can also download the factory set file to your PC Using the download function together with the upload function that is described on the next page is useful if you want to transfer a user set file from one camera to another camera of the same type You can download a user set file or the factory set file by using the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary read write commands from within your own application to set the camera s control and status registers CSRs With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 234 you use the File Name Select parameter in the Configuration Set Files parameters group to select a user set file or the factory set file and use the Download button to download the selected file By Setting CSRs You can download a user set file or the factory set file by writing values to the configuration set bulk data CSR Section 7 2 3 on page 280 explains the bulk data CSRs and Section 7 2 3 3 on page 283 explains how to use the CSRs to download a file Section 7 3 1 on page 289 explains using read write commands 230 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Features 6 15 5 Uploading Configuration Set Files
77. lt a Movement Point 3 Point 2 Point 1 Fig 37 Enhanced Raw Line A First B Delayed Line Acquisition ExSync Cycle 2 Basler sprint Color Cameras 73 Line Acquisition Modes AW00069909000 ExSync Cycle 3 A1 Image of point 1 acquired by line A A UPPER BUFFER Drawing not to scale B2 Image of point 2 acquired by line B A LOWER BUFFER B1 Image of point 1 acquired by line B UUU Line B Line A Object Passing Camera N 48 Movement Point 3 Point 2 Point 1 Fig 38 Enhanced Raw Line A First B Delayed Line Acquisition ExSync Cycle 3 74 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Line Acquisition Modes ExSync Cycle 4 B1 Image of point 1 acquired by line B A I Li I r UPPER BUFFER B2 Image of point 2 acquired by line B Drawing not to scale LOWER BUFFER
78. make at least 128 acquisitions to generate a set of PRNU values If your camera is set to control exposure with an ExSync signal you must generate at least 128 ExSync signal cycles after you signal the camera to begin generating the values If you are running the camera in a free run exposure time control mode you must wait long enough for the camera to complete at least 128 acquisitions a When the camera is capturing the lines it needs to create the PRNU shading values the line valid and data valid signals will go high and low as you would normally expect However the data in these lines is not useful to you and should be ignored Basler sprint Color Cameras 171 Features D AW00069909000 Note If you started the generation of the shading values using the CCT you are using an ExSync signal to trigger acquisitions and you are operating the camera at a line period greater than approximately 300 ms you should be aware of a potential problem Under these conditions the CCT may time out while it is waiting for the camera to complete 128 acquisitions and you may see a Camera is not responding error message This error is not fatal to the shading value creation process If you close the error message window wait several seconds and then click the Refresh button on the CCT the shading values will be properly created If you started the generation of the shading values using binary commands you are using an ExSync signal
79. object as you perceive them you require a high end calibrated monitor Use a high end calibrated monitor for displaying your acquired images Use a standard color chart within your camera s field of view when you adjust the color enhancements Note You can only obtain good color enhancements with a well adjusted monitor e g brightness etc You can find information about how to adjust the color performance of the camera to a specific light source in Section 6 6 2 1 on page 184 The procedure describes the B scenario mentioned above specific parameter settings for different light sources in Section 6 6 2 2 on page 187 Basler sprint Color Cameras 183 Features AW00069909000 6 6 2 1 A Procedure for Setting the Color Enhancements In the following procedure we assume that you select the CCT for adjusting the color enhancement parameters Required Tools Materials 1 184 We recommend including a standard color chart within your camera s field of view when you are adjusting the color enhancements This will make it much easier to know when the colors are properly adjusted One widely used chart is the ColorChecker chart also known as the Macbeth chart If you order a color checker chart the target values for red green and blue will be indicated on the chart for each color field Fig 65 ColorChecker Image SRGB Make sure that a tool is installed on your computer that helps you to identify the color
80. of a uniform object The camera is equipped with a shading correction feature that allows it to correct the captured image for variations caused by optics lighting and sensor variations The standard shading correction feature can correct variations down to 66 of the maximum intensity i e light variations that go down to 66 of the maximum intensity can be corrected maximum correction factor 1 5 6 4 2 Enhanced Shading Correction ESC For Certain Models Only The enhanced shading correction has the same working principle as the standard shading correction The enhanced shading correction can correct variations down to 25 of the maximum intensity light variations that go down to 25 of the maximum intensity can be corrected maximum correction factor 4 0 As a consequence of the increased range of correction the resolution of the shading correction parameter is decreased Camera models with enhanced shading correction include the letters ESC in their name e g spL4096 39kcESC The effect of ESC is schematically shown in the following figure xo 0 AAN TEE E ce a ee ee Pixel Values ee After ESC D am m B 75 D Max 75 96 mas B gn Lem T Pixel Values 25 95 Before ESC 25 2 IP t Hol ue ues E DUM HEN MN C D pars E baud E M e E 0 HE NEN EE END NN NO NND NN ND ee NND ND ND ND RD DNO ND DS END ESO ES EE E Sensor Fig 62 Pixel Value Adjustment Example Due to Enhanced Shading Correction ESC Basler sprint
81. of bytes in the data field is equal to the number specified in the DataLen field If all checks are correct an ACK is sent to the host If any check is incorrect a NAK is sent Byte Timeouts The camera checks the time between the receipt of each byte in the frame If the time between any two bytes exceeds 0 5 seconds the camera enters a garbage state and discards any more incoming bytes The camera remains in this state until it sees a new BFS Read Commands In the normal case when a read command is sent to the camera the camera responds with an ACK and a returned frame The returned frame will contain the data requested If the camera receives a read command with an unknown or invalid address in the Address field of the frame it will respond with an ACK but will send no frame If the host sends a read command and gets no ACK NAK the host can assume that no camera is present or the camera is in a garbage state for some reason If the host sends a read command and gets an ACK NAK but does not receive a frame within 500 ms the host can assume that there was a problem with the read command Write Command In the normal case when a write command is sent to the camera the camera responds with an ACK If the camera receives a write command with an unknown or invalid address in the Address field of the frame it will respond with an ACK but will not perform the write After a write command has been issued by the host the hos
82. of the internal control signal as shown in Figure 55 The line period is determined by the setting for the line period parameter Line Period Exposure a Internal Control Signal Line Readout Fig 55 Free Run Edge Controlled Mode In free run programmable mode line acquisition begins on the rising edge of the ExSyc signal The pixels are exposed and charge is accumulated when the internal control signal is low The pixel values are read out of the sensor on the rising edge of the internal control signal as shown in Figure 56 on page 104 In this mode the line period is determined by the setting for the line period parameter The ex posure time parameter setting determines how long the control signal will be low and thus de termines the exposure time Line Period Internal Control Signal Exposure Time Line Readout Fig 56 Free Run Programmable Mode 104 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Exposure Start and Exposure Time Control 4 2 2 Selecting a Free Run Exposure Mode Setting the Line Period and Setting the Exposure Time You can select a free run exposure time control mode set the line period and set the exposure time for the free run programmable mode with the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary write commands from within your own application to set the camera s control and status registers CSRs With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7
83. off Every time you turn off the camera and on again the Gain Green 2 parameter will return to the default setting If the Gain Green 2 feature is disabled the total gain for the green pixels in Lines A and B will be the sum in dB of the global Gain and Gain Green The maximum value for the total gain being fixed the maximum Gain setting will be limited by the settings of any of the color specific gains Gain Red Gain Green Gain Blue and Gain Green 2 162 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Features 6 3 Area of Interest The area of interest feature lets you specify a portion of the sensor lines During operation only the pixel information from the specified portion of the lines is read out of the sensor and transmitted from the camera to the frame grabber The size of the area of interest is defined by declaring a starting pixel and a length in pixels For example if you specify the starting pixel as 33 and the length in pixels as 256 the camera will readout and transmit pixel values for pixels 33 through 288 as shown in Figure 61 Starting Line B Pixel PEELE eo ze 5 ae 5 a7 opa app eprpespepespespeapespeperpespesporpe perpe Fre pr epe rs Er spero as o s s ss sess oops oo so ao nez al arrazaz it gt 1 Line A Length in Pixels _ pixels within the AO Fig 61 Area of Interest The AOI applies to both line A and line B When setting the AOI the following guidelines apply T
84. only Description Minimum allowed integer value for the raw gamma setting The bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the min value Byte 2 Mid byte of the min value Byte 3 High byte of the min value Byte 4 Always 0 not used Basler sprint Color Cameras 263 Configuring the Camera AW00069909000 Register Base Address 0x4300 Field Name Raw Max Offset 0x0015 Size 4 Bytes Type Read only Description Maximum allowed integer value for the raw gamma setting The bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the max value Byte 2 Mid byte of the max value Byte 3 High byte of the max value Byte 4 Always 0x00 not used 264 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Configuring the Camera Color Adjustment CSR Register Base Address 0x4400 Field Name Enable Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of the color adjustment CSR 0x00 Color adjustment is not available 0x01 Color adjustment is available Field Name Enable Value Offset 0x0001 Size 1 Byte Type Read Write Description Writing an integer to this enable enumeration field sets the Enable Value 0x00 Color adjustment disabled 0x01 Color adjustment enabled See Section 6 6 1 on page 179 for more information about the color adjustment feature Field Name Enable Bitmap Size Offset 0x000
85. p ee FULL UU UU Clock DO Pixel Dat oe OOCGCOCSOCOqO9 0050099099 0X0 or 8 bits D1 Pixel Data BBY BB BB W BB XA TEAT 06x99 O X X509 9 0 99 XX or 8 bits Timing diagrams are not to scale N At full resolution N 2 8192 on the 8k model 4096 on 4k models and 2048 on 2k models If the AOI feature is used N will be determined by the AOI settings Fig 26 Two Tap Mode with Edge Level Controlled or Programmed Exposure Raw Line A First Basler sprint Color Cameras 57 Line Acquisition Modes 4 Tap Output Mode ExSync Signal Or End of Programmed Time Frame Valid FVAL Length 2 Line Valid Data Valid Pixel Clock DO Pixel Data 12 10 or 8 bits D1 Pixel Data 12 10 or 8 bits D2 Pixel Data 12 10 or 8 bits D3 Pixel Data 12 10 or 8 bits AW00069909000 a Frame Valid Delay see Table 24 and Table 25 Q _ I Frame Valid Delay see Table 24 and Table 25 ud Ex d 1H 0 050 us for 40 MHz Camera Link clock cycle 0 025 us for 80 MHz clock cycle FLL L Lco cu JUL UU UU UU DOQ0OO OBOOOO0OBOOBOOOO COQD0OO OBOOOOOOO BOOOOO OOQ0OD BBDOO O0OB OOBOOQOO OOXDO 9G XO00X0O0 w9 0S v X00 Timing diagrams are not to scale N At full resolution N 2 8192 on the 8k model 4096 on 4k models and 2048 on 2k models If the AOI feature is used N will be determined by the AOI settings Fig 27 Four Tap Mode with Edge
86. pixels A fixed value of 0x56 Raw Enhanced Raw line acquisition mode stamps relate to the green pixels from line A A fixed value of 0x57 Raw Enhanced Raw line acquisition mode stamps relate to the green pixels from line B A fixed value of 0x58 Raw Enhanced Raw line acquisition mode stamps relate to the blue pixels S3 Line Counter LSByte S4 Line Counter MSByte S5 Line Sum LSByte S6 Line Sum lower MidByte S7 Line Sum higher MidByte S8 Line Sum MSByte S9 Total High Pixels LSByte S10 Total High Pixels MSByte S11 Total Low Pixels LSByte S12 Total Low Pixels MSByte S13 Contrast Value LSByte S14 Contrast Value lower MidByte S15 Contrast Value higher MidByte S16 Contrast Value MSByte Table 43 Stamp Pixel Functions Stamp Pixels S1 and S2 Stamp pixel S1 always has a fixed value of OxAA If the camera is set for the RGB line acquisition mode stamp pixel S2 will have a fixed value of 0x55 The reference of the stamp data to either red averaged green or blue is obvious from the stamp pixel sequence see above If the camera is set for a Raw or Enhanced Raw line acquisition mode and if the pixel values are from the red pixels line A stamp pixel S2 will have a fixed value of 0x55 Basler sprint Color Cameras 207 Features AW00069909000 If the camera is set for a Raw or Enhanced Raw line acquisition mode and if the pixel values are from the green pixels from line A stamp pixel S2 will have a
87. port integrated into the frame grabber as specified in the Camera Link standard The RS 644 serial connection in the Camera Link interface is used to issue commands to the camera for changing modes and parameters The serial link can also be used to query the camera about its current setup The Basler Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT is a convenient graphical interface that can be used to change camera modes and parameters via the serial connection The configuration tool is installed on your host PC as described in the Installation and Setup Guide for Camera Link Cameras The guide is available in the downloads section of the Basler website www baslerweb com Basler has also developed a binary read write command protocol that can be used to change camera modes and parameters via the serial connection from within your own application software using the API delivered with the frame grabber See Section 7 3 on page 288 for details on the binary read write command protocol 2 9 4 Making the Serial Connection Frame grabbers compliant with the Camera Link specification are equipped with a serial port integrated into the Camera Link interface that can be used for RS 644 serial communication The characteristics of the serial port can vary from manufacturer to manufacturer Basler sprint Color Cameras 39 Physical Interface AW00069909000 If you are using the Basler Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT to configure the camera the tool will d
88. receive one random character on the serial interface We recommend clearing the serial input buffers in your PC after a camera power on or reset Basler sprint Color Cameras 225 Features AW00069909000 6 15 Configuration Sets A configuration set is a group of values that contains all Non volatile of the parameter settings needed to control the camera ibd There are three basic types of configuration sets the Qm Volatile work configuration set the factory configuration set Memory and user configuration sets Lee rel RAM UserSet02 l usse pe Lom Work Configuration Set ME s uai m UserSet04 The work configuration set contains the camera s current parameter settings and thus determines the OMM camera s performance If you use the CCT to change Factory Set the camera settings or if you change settings by writing to the camera s registers you are making changes to Fig 91 Configuration Sets the work configuration set The work configuration set resides in the camera s volatile memory and the settings are lost if the camera is reset or if power is switched off The work configuration set is usually just called the work set for short Factory Configuration Set When a camera is manufactured a test setup is performed on the camera and an optimized configuration is determined The factory configuration set contains the camera s factory optimized parameter settings The factory set is saved in a permanent file in the
89. s volatile memory Assume that you want to save the parameter values in the current work set to the UserSet01 file in the camera s non volatile memory To do so you would follow this procedure 1 Use a binary write command to write the file name UserSet01 to the Name field of the configu ration set bulk data CSR see page 286 2 Use a binary write command to set the value of the Control field of the configuration set bulk data CSR to 0x06 Setting the value to 0x06 initiates a copy function This procedure will copy the current work set settings from the camera s volatile memory into a file called UserSet01 in the non volatile memory Note that any existing data in the file will be overwritten Sample code that illustrates how to save a bulk data file is available from Basler seeSection 7 4 on page 296 Note There are four files available in the non volatile memory to hold saved user configuration sets UserSet01 UserSet02 UserSet03 or UserSet04 You must use one of these file names when you save a user configuration set Activating a User Set File or the Factory Set File The process of activating a user set file or the factory set file accomplishes two things The values from the activated file are immediately copied into the work set in the camera s volatile memory The camera will now actively use the configuration values that were copied into the work set A link is created between the activated file and the
90. save live images that show the problem Also generate and save test images Please save the images in BMP format zip them and send them to Basler technical support 308 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Revision History Revision History Doc ID Number Date Changes AW00069901000 7 Aug 2008 Initial Release Preliminary version of the document AW00069902000 13 Sep 2008 First release for 4k series cameras Contents relating to 2k and 8k cameras and section 3 5 are preliminary and subject to change Added sections Section 4 3 4 on page 114 Camera Settings for the Maximum Specified Line Rate Section 6 8 on page 206 Line Stamp and Section 6 9 on page 217 Lookup Table Modified and added material as necessary AW00069903000 9 Apr 2009 Added references to the table with parameter settings for achieving the maximum line rates in Section 1 2 on page 2 Updated the quantum efficiency curves in Figure 4 on page 11 Added information about the set screws for attaching lens mounts in Figure 5 on page 13 and Figure 9 on page 17 Corrected the tolerances for the distance between the CMOS sensor and the front surface of the lens adapter mount for 2k and 4k cameras in Figure 5 on page 13 and Figure 6 on page 14 Improved the indications of the reference planes for the camera housings in Figure 5 on page 13 through Figure 7 on page 15 and Figure 9 on page 17 through Figure 11 on pa
91. sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 8k Camera Video Data Output Modes Line Valid Delays for 6 Tap Mode 8k Camera Line Valid Delay for the RGB Line Acquisition Mode 40 MHz Min Max Programmable 6 63 us 6 76 us Edge Controlled Exposure 6 98 us 7 11 us Level Controlled Exposure 6 63 us 6 76 us Line Valid Delay for the RGB Line Acquisition Mode 80 MHz Min Max Programmable 11 10 us 11 20 us Edge Controlled Exposure 11 45 us 11 55 us Level Controlled Exposure 11 10 us 11 20 us Table 30 Line Valid Delays with the 8k Camera Set for 6 Tap Video Data Output Mode Basler sprint Color Cameras 145 Video Data Output Modes AW00069909000 5 2 5 8 Tap Output Mode 8 Tap 8 Bit Output Mode In 8 tap 8 bit output mode on each pixel clock cycle the camera transmits data for eight pixels at 8 bit depth a line valid bit and a data valid bit In the Raw and Enhanced Raw line acquisition modes the camera also transmits a frame valid bit unless the FVAL Length parameter is set to zero For more information about the frame valid bit see Section 2 8 1 on page 36 In the 8 tap output mode the camera uses the output ports on Camera Link Transmitters X Y and Z to transmit pixel data a frame valid bit in the Raw and Enhanced Raw line acquisition modes only a line valid bit a data valid bit and the Camera Link pixel clock The assignment of the bits to the output ports on Camera
92. sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Features 6 4 6 Activating a Shading Values File As explained in Section 6 4 on page 165 the camera contains a set of factory determined shading correction values in a file in its non volatile memory As explained in Section 6 4 5 on page 168 you can also generate a set of user shading values and save them to a separate file in the non volatile memory Assuming that you have generated user shading values you can choose to activate either the user shading values file or the factory shading values file When you activate a shading values file two things happen The values from the activated file are immediately copied into the camera s volatile memory When you have shading correction enabled the camera uses the shading values in the volatile memory to perform shading correction A link is created between the activated file and the volatile memory The shading values from the activated file will automatically be copied into the volatile memory whenever the camera is powered up or reset Assume for example that the user shading values file is the activated file In this case when the camera is powered on or reset the values from the user shading values file will be copied into the volatile memory of the camera and will be used to perform shading correction Activating a Shading Values File You can activate a shading values file with the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using b
93. the configuration set bulk data CSR to 0x03 Setting the value to 0x03 places the camera in write mode 3 Use a binary command to do a bulk data write to the camera The binary write command must have the following characteristics OpCode 0x04 This OpCode makes the command a bulk data write DataLen the number of bytes to be written Max is 255 characters Address 0x281B Base address for the configuration set bulk data CSR plus the offset for the Data field Data Bytes to be written Repeat step 3 as many times as needed to write all of the data from the PC to the camera 5 Close the bulk data file in the camera To close the file use a binary write command to set the value of the Control field in the configuration set bulk data CSR to 0x02 Setting the value to 0x02 places the camera in read mode and closes the file Upto 255 characters can be written with a single binary bulk data write command If the file is larger than 255 characters repeated binary bulk data write commands are required When repeated bulk data write commands are required the file is written sequentially with each write command starting where the previous write stopped This procedure will upload the data in the file to the camera If you want to upload a user shading value bulk data file from a PC to a camera you would use a similar procedure but you would use the shading value bulk data CSR instead Sample code that illustrates how to upload a bu
94. these cycles the pixel data for line B will be transmitted while the pixel data for line A will be buffered The transmission of the pixel data for line A will be delayed until the third ExSync cycle after the data were acquired On the ExSync cycles where acquisition is not performed the buffered pixel data for line A will be transmitted Basler sprint Color Cameras 83 Line Acquisition Modes AW00069909000 ExSync Cycle 1 Garbage A ii Drawing not to scale UPPER BUFFER Garbage LOWER BUFFER j P A1 Image of point 1 acquired by line A i e Line B ene A Object Passing Camera Movement gt Point 1 Point 2 Point 3 Fig 44 Enhanced Raw Line B First A Delayed Line Acquisition ExSync Cycle 1 84 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Line Acquisition Modes ExSync Cycle 2 Garbage A H IT Drawing not to scale UPPER BUFFER LOWER BUFFER A1 Image of point 1 acquired by line A
95. to a Makro Symmar HM 5 6 120 0058 lens by Schneider Kreuznach The UNIFOC 100 95 V Basler helical mount includes a sliding insert that allows adjusting the extension over a range of ca 100 mm The assembly shown in Figure 1 as an example is adjusted for a magnification of 1 1 The overall length of the adjusted assembly including the camera with connectors is ca 306 7 mm Taking account of the working distance of the Makro Symmar HM 5 6 120 0058 lens of ca 212 mm the overall distance between the imaged object and the camera s back with connectors is ca 518 7 mm Makro Symmar HM 5 6 120 0058 lens UNIFOC 100 95 V Basler helical mount Camera Photosensitive surface of the CMOS sensor Locking Locking V mount Screw 2 Insert Screw 1 V Basler mount gt S Ieee MUU S D ie E Glen erae Euler ies MN C T TO Tu ates l5 O P p lt 32 6 220 6 min ca 130 max ca 230 15 Ha 235 6 Drawing not to scale Fig 1 Using the UNIFOC 100 95 V Basler Helical Mount Distances in mm Basler sprint Color Cameras 7 Specifications Requirements and Precautions AW00069909000 Attaching the UNIFOC 100 95 V Basler Helical Mount to the Camera
96. to the sensor lines transmitted first by the selected line acquisition mode and the even lines refer to the sensor lines transmitted second see Section 1 6 on page 20 In Raw Line A First and Enhanced Raw Line A First line acquisition mode line A is transmitted first and line B second Accordingly the odd lines in the test image refer to lines A and the even lines refer to lines B In Raw Line B First and Enhanced Raw Line B First line acquisition mode line B is transmitted first and line A second Accordingly the odd lines in the test image refer to lines B and the even lines refer to lines A In Raw Line A First and Enhanced Raw Line A First line acquisition mode the gray scale gradient is restricted to the even lines while the odd lines stay black In Raw Line B First and Enhanced Raw Line B First line acquisition mode the gray scale gradient is restricted to the odd lines while the even lines stay black The lines of the test image for e g 8 bit output modes and Raw Line A First or Enhanced Raw Line A First line acquisition mode are generated in the following way see also Figure 85 left On the first cycle of the ExSync signal or the camera s internal control signal the pixel values refer to line A The first pixel has a red value RA of 0 the second pixel has a green value GA of 0 the third pixel has a red value of O the fourth pixel has a green value of 0 the fifth pixel has a red value of 0 the sixt
97. to trigger acquisitions and you are operating the camera at very low line rates you should be aware of a restriction The camera will not acknowledge or respond to binary commands while it is performing the 128 acquisitions needed to create a set of shading values Once you have issued the binary command to start generating shading values you should wait until the generation process is complete before you issue any further binary commands The time needed to complete the generation process will be equal to 128 times the line period 9 Once 128 acquisitions have been completed the camera calculates the PRNU values a The camera uses the data from the 128 acquisitions to calculate an average gray value for the pixels in each line b The camera finds the pixel with the highest average gray value in the line c For each of the other pixels in the line the camera determines the additional gain that would be needed to make the pixel s average value equal to the average value for the highest pixel d The camera generates a set of PRNU values that contains the calculated gain adjustments 10 The generated set of PRNU values is automatically stored in the user shading values file in the camera s non volatile memory Existing values in the file will be overwritten 11 The user shading value file is automatically activated See Section 6 4 6 on page 173 for more information about what it means to activate a shading file 172 Basler
98. transmit data for pixel 1 in the line Data stream D1 will transmit data for pixel 2 And data stream D2 will transmit data for pixel 3 Depending on the video data output mode selected the pixel data will be at 10 bit or 8 bit depth On the next cycle of the pixel clock the line valid and data valid bits will both be high On this clock cycle data stream DO will transmit data for pixel 4 in the line Data stream D1 will transmit data for pixel 5 And data stream D2 will transmit data for pixel 6 On the next cycle of the pixel clock the line valid and data valid bits will be high On this clock cycle data stream DO will transmit data for pixel 7 in the line Data stream D1 will transmit data for pixel 8 And data stream D2 will transmit data for pixel 9 This pattern will continue until all of the pixel data for the line has been transmitted After all of the pixel data for the line has been transmitted the line valid and data valid bits both become low indicating that valid pixel data is no longer being transmitted Figure 18 on page 46 shows the data sequence when the camera is operating in edge controlled or level controlled exposure mode or in programmable exposure mode Basler sprint Color Cameras 127 Video Data Output Modes MDR Conn 1 Transmitter X Port Camera Frame Bit Assignment Grabber 3 Tap 10 Bit 3 Tap 8 Bi
99. transmitted If the sensor reports that a pixel has a 12 bit value of 4092 the 8 bit value stored at index 4092 will be transmitted The value stored at index 4096 is used for interpolation As you can see the table does not include a user defined 8 bit value for every 12 bit value that the sensor can report If the sensor reports a 12 bit pixel value that does not have a corresponding defined 8 bit value it does a straight line interpolation between the two nearest defined values For example assume that the sensor reported that a certain pixel had a 12 bit value of 9 In this case the camera would perform an interpolation between the values stored at index 8 and index 12 in the table The result of the interpolation would then be transmitted out of the camera as an 8 bit value The value stored at index 4096 is only used for interpolation purposes when the sensor reports a 12 bit pixel value of 4093 4094 or 4095 Note When the lookup table feature is enabled the lookup tables for red green and blue will all be active Note In the Raw and Enhanced Raw output modes the same green lookup table will apply to the green pixel values from lines A and B 218 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Features Note If you want to use the lookup table feature make sure to know the status of the lookup tables If you entered new lookup table values for all three colors the new values will be applied to the colors If you
100. updated to reflect limitations caused by the way any related features are set The 2 bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the max value Byte 2 High byte of the max value Field Name Increment Offset 0x0007 Size 2 Bytes Type Read only Description An integer value indicating the increment for the high pixel threshold setting The 2 bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the increment Byte 2 High byte of the increment Basler sprint Color Cameras 275 Configuring the Camera AW00069909000 Lookup Table Mode CSR Register Base Address 0x4100 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Mode Offset 0x0001 Size 1 Byte Type Read Write Description Writing an integer to this field sets the lookup table mode 0x00 Lookup tables disabled 0x01 Lookup tables enabled See Section 6 9 on page 217 for more information about the lookup table feature Lookup Table Selector CSR Register Base Address 0x4104 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the sta
101. you have installed all software related to the port and that the port has the following settings 8 data bits no parity 1 stop bit and baud rate 9600 bps Is the port software installed and are the port settings correct Make corrections and then restart your computer Start the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT and click on the port selector drop down menu that appears below the menu bar A list will show any RS 644 port s The RS 644 available on the frame grabber RS 644 ports are identified in the list by a name port is working starting with clser followed by a port number Click on an RS 644 port in the list Yes correctly Exit Does a list of camera settings appear this chart No Does a Can t connect to the port Daraus The port is present but the CCT can not access the port the port is in use message appear Yes Make sure that no other program has access to the port No You may need to update the CCT To download the latest version of the tool go to the Basler web site at www baslerweb com Once you have downloaded the latest version of the tool uninstall the old version from your computer and install the new version No Start the CCT click on the port selection drop down menu and select an RS 644 port from the list Does a list of camera parameters appear Does a This type of camera is not Yes supported message appear The port is present and can be accessed but the c
102. 009 0 000 OO00 609 00000e 9 v 099000 OCXo0O Ie 09 q oO0DO0096 0990000 Timing diagrams are not to scale N At full resolution N 2 4096 on 4k models and 2048 on 2k models If the AOI feature is used N will be determined by the AOI settings Fig 51 Four Tap Mode with Edge Level Controlled or Programmed Exposure Enhanced Raw Line B First 92 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Line Acquisition Modes 8 Tap Output Mode ExSync TARER 01311113 Signal tv LLL er z F Frame Valid Delay see Table 35 and Table 36 Or End of de Programmed 7 Time 4 Frame Valid Delay see Table 35 and Table 36 1H Frame Valid ength 2 0 050 us for 40 MHz Camera Link clock cycle 0 025 us for 80 MHz clock cycle 1 1L Line Valid jp Data Valid y ga JUVUUUUU UU UU Piel Data XOX XOX BOO DODO 0 990000 Pinel daa XXX OK OBO 49049 X000 Piel bata XXX 04 00000 094 X000 Phin 00049 00000 0 0000 eb OO0O8 0 000000 90000 ewe XXX OK OCOOO 9 0 0000 eim OOQO8 0 4 00000 4099 0000 Piel Data Qe gt r H OOO 00099 099 X500 Timing diagrams are not to scale N At full resolution N 2 4096 on 4k models and 2048 on 2k models If the AOI feature is used N will be determined by the AOI settings Eight Tap Mode with Edge Level Controlled or Pro
103. 03 Write 0x04 Erase 0x05 Activate 0x06 Copy Field Name Info Offset 0x0002 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description If you are performing a bulk read or write operation this field will indicate when no more data exists 0x00 More data exists 0x01 No more data exists 0x02 File operation error 0x04 This is an activated file Field Name File Name Offset 0x0003 Size 20 Bytes Type Read Write Description Character string indicating the name of the bulk data file The field contains 20 characters left aligned and zero padded Only the following names are allowed FactorySet UserSet01 UserSet02 UserSet03 and UserSet04 UserSet03 and UserSet04 are not allowed for the 8k camera Field Name Description Size Offset 0x0017 Size 4 Bytes Type Read only If the file name refers to an already existing bulk data file this field will contain the file size in bytes Otherwise the field contains zeros Field Name Description Data Offset 0x001B Size Variable Type Read Write Byte sized register that is used to sequentially write to or read from a bulk data file 286 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Configuring the Camera Shading Values CSR See Section 7 2 3 2 on page 282 for information about using the shading values bulk data control registers Register Base Address 0x2A00 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description
104. 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Mode Offset 0x0001 Size 1 Byte Type Read Write Description Writing an integer to this field sets the low line rate compensation mode 0x00 Low line rate compensation disabled 0x01 Low line rate compensation enabled See Section 4 1 3 on page 102 for more information about the low line rate compensation mode FVAL Length CSR Register Base Address 0x4200 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Length Offset 0x0001 Size 2 Bytes Type Read Write Description Writing an integer to this field sets a number of consecutive lines and during the transmission of those lines the frame valid FVAL signal will remain high The value can be set to 0 or to an even integer e g 2 4 6 and so on For example if the value is set to 2 the FVAL signal will stay high during the transmission of two consecutive lines If the value
105. 114 1 2 1 Camera Models with 2k Pixels Specification spL2048 39kc spL2048 70kc Sensor Size 2 lines 2048 pixels per line Sensor Type Linear CMOS with Bayer color filter Pixel Size 10 um x 10 um Camera Link 40 MHz or 80 MHz switchable Clock Speed Maximum Line Rate in Raw Line Acquisition Mode in Enhanced Raw Line Acquisition Mode 38 6 kHz 70 kHz 77 2 kHz 140 kHz In ExSync operation max 137 kHz see note on page 99 Data Output Type Camera Link base configuration Camera Link base and medium full configuration Data Output Modes 2 tap 8 10 or 12 bit 3 tap 8 bit 2 tap 8 10 or 12 bit 3 tap 8 or 10 bit 4 tap 8 10 or 12 bit 6 tap 8 bit 8 tap 8 bit Synchronization Via external trigger signal or free run Exposure Control Edge controlled level controlled or programmable Gain and Offset Programmable via a serial link Requirements Connectors One 6 pin Hirose micro miniature receptacle One 6 pin Hirose micro miniature One 26 pin female MDR connector receptacle Two 26 pin female MDR connectors Power 12 VDC 10 Max 6 0 W 12 VDC Lens Adapter F mount M42 C Mount see Section 1 3 on page 6 Table 1 General Specifications for 2k Cameras Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions Specification spL2048 39kc
106. 115 The bit assignments comply with the Camera Link standard The tables also show the assignments for the frame valid bit the line valid bit the data valid bit and the pixel clock These assignments are constant for all output modes The following diagrams illustrate the sequences of pixel values for each tap and the related timing patterns for the pixel clock the frame valid the line valid and the data valid signals Edge or level controlled exposure and programmed exposure are considered 78 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Line Acquisition Modes 2 Tap Output Mode ExSync Signal Or End of Programmed Time Frame Valid FVAL Length 2 Line Valid Data Valid Pixel Clock DO Pixel Data 12 10 or 8 bits D1 Pixel Data 12 10 or 8 bits _ Frame Valid Delay see Table 13 Table 14 and Table 15 Q SS I Frame Valid Delay see Table 13 Table 14 and Table 15 l L EN E 0 050 us for 40 MHz Camera Link clock cycle 0 025 us for 80 MHz clock cycle d L d L d L 1 L UU UU UU UU OOOO0 49 0000099099 X000 OCOX0O009 X94 XX 9C 9 X00 Timing diagrams are not to scale N At full resolution N 8192 on the 8k model 4096 on 4k models and 2048 on 2k models If the AOI feature is used N will be determined by the AOI settings Fig 42 Two Tap Mode with Edge Level Controlled or Programmed Exposure Enhanced Raw Line A First Basler sprint
107. 2 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description An integer value indicating the size of the Enable Bitmap field in bytes Field Name Enable Bitmap Offset 0x0003 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The bit positions in this field indicate the available values for the enable enumeration field Field Name Saturation Red Status Offset 0x0005 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of the saturation adjustment for red 0x00 The adjustment is not available 0x01 The adjustment is available and all related settings are OK Field Name Saturation Red Value Offset 0x0006 Size 1 Byte Type Read Write Description Writing an integer value to this field sets the saturation value of red for predominantly red colors in the image If the saturation red value is set to 64 the saturation of red will not be changed Setting the value to less than 64 will decrease the saturation If for example the value is set to 32 the saturation of red will be halved If the value is set to 0 the saturation of red is zero and red will not be present in the image Setting the value to greater than 64 will increase the saturation If for example the value is set to 128 the saturation of red will be doubled See Section 6 6 1 on page 179 for more information about the color adjustment feature Field Name Saturation Red Min Offset 0x0007 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description Minimum allowed
108. 2 on page 159 The bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the raw value Byte 2 High byte of the raw value Field Name Raw Min Offset 0x000F Size 2 Bytes Type Read only Description Minimum allowed integer value for the raw gain green 2 setting The bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the min value Byte 2 High byte of the min value Field Name Raw Max Offset 0x0011 Size 2 Bytes Type Read only Description Maximum allowed integer value for the raw gain green 2 setting The bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the max value Byte 2 High byte of the max value 258 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Configuring the Camera Gain Green 2 Enable CSR Register Base Address 0x4613 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Mode Offset 0x0001 Size 1Byte Type Read Write Description Writing an integer to this field sets the gain green 2 0x00 Gain Green 2 is disabled default 0x01 Gain Green 2 is enabled Basler sprint Color Cameras 259 Configuring the Camera AW00069909000 Area of Inter
109. 3 1 1 on page 292 2 A binary command with an invalid OpCode was received see Section 7 3 1 on page 289 3 A binary command with no BFE was received see Section 7 3 1 on page 289 4 A binary command with an incorrect BCC was received see Section 7 3 1 on page 289 5 A binary command with an address error was received see Section 7 3 1 on page 289 6 Reserved 7 An unknown error has occurred Imaging Sensor Temperature Inquiry Register Base Address 0x2710 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this inquiry register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available Field Name Temperature Offset 0x0001 Size 4 Bytes Type Read only Description The value in this field indicates the temperature of the imaging sensor in C The value in this field is a standard IEEE 754 single precision 32 bit floating point number Basler sprint Color Cameras 241 Configuring the Camera AW00069909000 7 2 2 Feature Control and Status Registers The feature control and status registers CSRs let you setthe parameters for camera features such as exposure mode gain offset and the AOI These registers also let you check the current parameter settings and the status for each feature Each feature has one or more CSRs associated with it The fields within a feature s CSR s are used to cont
110. 46 42 Saturation Blue 64 105 89 91 Hue Blue 0 24 26 27 Saturation Magenta 64 115 125 117 Hue Magenta 0 127 127 127 Gain amp Offset Gain Red dB 0 1 1 1 0344 Gain Green dB 3 5 2 1669 1 1499 1 Gain Blue dB 6 6 2717 1 8924 1 513 Table 42 Specific Settings for Different Light Sources Basler sprint Color Cameras 187 Features AW00069909000 Parameter Name in CCT Values Without Tungsten Daylight Daylight Correction 2800 K 5000 K 6500 K Offset DN 0 0 0 0 Gamma 1 0 416667 0 416667 0 416667 Lookup Table Lookup Table Enable i e Gamma Enable By default Gain Green 2 is disabled If enabled the gain value would be as the Gain Green value LED light source ranges etc no values for an LED light source are indicated in this table If you want to use an LED we recommend to check the color and temperature values for the selected LED type and take the values of a light source that is close to the LED color temperature This can be a starting point for your color enhancement O As the variety of light emitting diodes is very large e g varying temperature and color Table 42 Specific Settings for Different Light Sources 188 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Features 6 7 Test Images The test image mode is used to check the camera s basic functionality and its ability to transmit an image via the video data cables Test images are
111. 6 13 Camera Status Checks 0 0 ene 225 6 14 Camera Reset sc s wt ee ee ho kee ae RE ee be a i eA 225 6 15 Configuration Sets suede ce hs oeheeeesawneeeeddeduan whe Ode ee edad 226 6 15 1 Saving the Work Set to a User Set File 0 0000 00 ee 228 6 15 2 Activating a User Set File or the Factory Set File 229 6 15 3 Which Configuration Set File Will Load at Startup or at Reset 230 6 15 4 Downloading Configuration Set Files to Your PC 230 6 15 5 Uploading Configuration Set Files to Your Camera 231 7 Configuring the Camera 0 0c 233 7 1 Configuring the Camera with the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT 234 7 2 Configuring the Camera By Setting Registers llle eese 235 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Table of Contents 7 2 1 Inquiry Registers 0 0 0 ec tenes 236 7 2 4 1 Inquiry Register Details 1 0 0 0 0 20 eee ee 236 Vendor Information Inquiry sese 236 Model Information Inquiry eeenn 236 maole BVEA IDA ae IUIN AAA EEE D INS 237 Serial Number Inquiry iiie 237 Camera Version Inquiry seen 237 Firmware Version Inquiry seseeem 238 Camera Status Inquiry sseeeneeeenn 238 FPGA Status Inquiry ni dete Pierres 240 Binary Command Protocol Status Inquiry
112. 81 Test Image Seven for 8 bit Output Modes Generated with a Raw or Enhanced Raw Line Acquisition Mode Raw Line A First and Enhanced Raw Line A First as an Example on a Camera with 4096 Pixels Per Line Basler sprint Color Cameras 199 Features AW00069909000 Test image one is useful for checking the integrity of the data transmitted by the camera If you capture lines and examine the pixel values in the captured lines the values should be exactly as described above Note When the camera is set for an 8 bit output mode the pixel values in test image seven range from 0 to 255 as described above If the camera is set for a 10 bit output the pixel values will range from 0 to 1023 If the camera is set for a 12 bit output the pixel values will range from 0 to 4095 200 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Features 6 7 3 Test Image Eight Fixed Green Gradient 6 7 3 1 Test Image Eight Generated with the RGB Line Acquisition Mode Test image eight generated with the RGB line acquisition mode displays a fixed horizontal green gradient The test image is identical to test image seven generated with the RGB line acquisition mode apart from the fact that green is shown instead of red 6 7 3 2 Test Image Eight Generated with the Raw and Enhanced Raw Line Acquisition Modes When the camera is set to a Raw or Enhanced Raw line acquisition mode see Section 3 3 on page 50 and Section 3 4 on page 69 and test image eight a t
113. 96 6 7 2 1 Test Image Seven Generated with the RGB Line Acquisition Mode sslselessss 196 6 7 2 2 Test Image Seven Generated with the Raw and Enhanced Raw Line Acquisition Modes 198 6 7 3 Test Image Eight Fixed Green Gradient 0 20000 eee 201 6 7 3 1 Test Image Eight Generated with the RGB Line Acquisition Mode 000 201 6 7 3 2 Test Image Eight Generated with the Raw and Enhanced Raw Line Acquisition Modes 201 6 7 4 Test Image Nine Fixed Blue Gradient 00200 2 eee 204 6 7 4 4 Test Image Nine Generated with the RGB Line Acquisition Mode 204 6 7 4 2 Test Image Nine Generated with the Raw and Enhanced Raw Line Acquisition Modes 204 06 8 Line Stamp csse RR RR Rede RI Rx ERREUR PIG Bed Wy ewes 206 6 8 4 Line Stamp with RGB Line Acquisition Mode lees 210 6 8 2 Line Stamp with Raw Enhanced Raw Line ACQUISITION Modes scs eee ae ee eee s EORR ee 214 6 8 8 Enabling and Setting the Line Stamp 0 00 00 e eee eee 216 6 9 Lookup Table ni 2221 yeas ba Deas Pee ell bebe Bete DEI 217 6 10 Imaging Sensor Temperature 2 000 cc ee 221 6 11 Camera Power Undervoltage and Overvoltage Protection 222 6 12 Error Condition Detection llieeeeeeseee re 223 6 12 1 Imaging Sensor Overtemperature Condition Detected 223 6 12 2 Camera Power Undervoltage or Overvoltage Condition Detected 224
114. 98 and Section 8 4 1 on page 301 Modified the camera power voltage entry in the Camera Status Inqiury register on page 238 Added the internal overvoltage condition in Section 8 3 on page 298 in the Camera Status Inquiry register on page 238 and in Section 8 4 1 on page 301 Modified description for the error indicated by continuous slow orange flashing in Section 8 3 on page 298 Adjusted priority levels in Section 8 3 on page 298 Removed the feedback page AW00069908000 8 Nov 2012 New front cover image Renamed Basler Vision Technologies as Basler AG Chapter 1 Added note box on camera versions on page 1 Adapted minimum line rates for raw line acquisition mode and enhanced raw line acquisition mode in Sections 1 2 1 1 2 2 and 1 2 3 Modified wavelength ranges for transmission and cut off for a IR cut filter in Section 1 4 on page 11 Corrected mm to nm in the note box in Section 1 4 on page 11 Updated the spectral response figures of the sprint color cameras Chapter 2 Deleted paragraph A power supply is available from Basler Contact your Basler sales representative in Section 2 4 2 on page 31 Corrected the differential line receiver names in Section 2 6 on page 33 Chapter 4 Adapted Section 4 1 3 on page 102 Low Line Rate Compensation to the fact that the low line rate compensation mode can now be enabled disabled Added camera link clock speeds and line acquisition modes for the spL2048 70kc in Table
115. B First line acquisition mode line B is transmitted first and line A second Accordingly the odd lines in the test image refer to lines B and the even lines refer to lines A The starting pixel value is not defined In the following description however it is assumed to be 0 for the first line The lines of the test image for e g 8 bit output modes and Raw Line A First or Enhanced Raw Line A First line acquisition mode are generated in the following way see also Figure 73 left On the first cycle of the ExSync signal or the camera s internal control signal the pixel values refer to line A The first pixel has a red value RA of 0 the second pixel has a green value GA of 0 the third pixel has a red value of 1 the fourth pixel has a green value of 1 the fifth pixel has a red value of 2 the sixth pixel has a green value of 2 and so on On the second cycle the pixel values refer to line B The first pixel has a green value GB of 0 the second pixel has a blue value BB of 0 the third pixel has a green value of 1 the fourth pixel has a blue value of 1 the fifth pixel has a green value of 2 the sixth pixel has a blue value of 2 and so on On the third cycle the pixel values refer to line A The first pixel has a red value of 1 the second pixel has a green value of 1 the third pixel has a red value of 2 the fourth pixel has a green value of 2 the fifth pixel has a red value of 3 the sixth pixel has a green value of 3 a
116. Basler sprint USER S MANUAL FOR COLOR CAMERAS Document Number AW000699 Version 09 Language 000 English Release Date 31 May 2013 BASLER the power of sight For customers in the U S A This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not expressly approved in this manual could void your authority to operate this equipment The shielded interface cable recommended in this manual must be used with this equipment in order to comply with the limits for a computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules For customers in Canada This apparatus complies with the Class A limits for radio noise emissions set out in Radio Interference Regulations Pour utilisateurs au Canada Cet appareil est conforme aux normes Classe A pour bruits radio lectriques sp cifi es dans
117. Blue parameters in the Gain amp Offset parameters group to set the additional color specific gain for the red green blue pixels and to enable Gain Green 2 By Setting CSRs Red You set the additional color specific gain for the red pixels by writing a value in dB to the Absolute Gain Red field or by writing an integer value to the Raw Gain Red field of the Gain Red CSR see page 254 Green If Gain Green 2 is disabled You set the additional color specific gain for all green pixels in line A and line B by writing a value in dB to the Absolute Gain Green field or by writing an integer value to the Raw Gain Green field of the Gain Green CSR see page 255 If Gain Green 2 is enabled You set the additional color specific gain for the green pixels in line A by writing a value in dB to the Absolute Gain Green field or by writing an integer value to the Raw Gain Green field of the Gain Green CSR see page 255 You set the additional color specific gain for the green pixels in line B by writing a value in dB to the Absolute Gain Green 2 field or by writing an integer value to the Raw Gain Green 2 field of the Gain Green 2 CSR see page 258 Blue You set the additional color specific gain for the blue pixels by writing a value in dB to the Absolute Gain Blue field or by writing an integer value to the Raw Gain Blue field of the Gain Blue CSR see page 257 Section 7 2 2 on page 242 explains CSRs and the difference between using the
118. Color Cameras 79 Line Acquisition Modes AW00069909000 4 Tap Output Mode ExSync Signal Or End of Programmed Time Frame Valid FVAL Length 2 Line Valid Data Valid Pixel Clock DO Pixel Data 12 10 or 8 bits D1 Pixel Data 12 10 or 8 bits D2 Pixel Data 12 10 or 8 bits D3 Pixel Data 12 10 or 8 bits Frame Valid Delay see Table 24 and Table 25 I Frame Valid Delay see Table 24 and Table 25 E 0 050 us for 40 MHz Camera Link clock cycle 0 025 us for 80 MHz clock cycle et oo d o L c I SUL UU CCOOPOOPBOOOCOPBOBBOOOO OOQOGGOS 000009 o9eo000 COOCPOOBBOOOCOOBOBBOOOO OOQOOGGOBSOOOOOS O 0000 Timing diagrams are not to scale N At full resolution N 8192 on the 8k model 4096 on 4k models and 2048 on 2k models If the AOI feature is used N will be determined by the AOI settings Fig 43 Four Tap Mode with Edge Level Controlled or Programmed Exposure Enhanced Raw Line A First 80 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Line Acquisition Modes 8 Tap Output Mode ExSync Signal 7 EN i Frame Valid Delay see Table 35 and Table 36 Or End of D Programmed 1 Time 4 Frame Valid Delay see Table 35 and Table 36 dt Frame Valid ae mm ength 2 _ 0 050 ps for 40
119. Description Maximum allowed floating point value for the absolute gain green setting The value in this field is a standard IEEE 754 single precision 32 bit floating point number Field Name Raw Gain Green Offset 0x000D Size 2 Bytes Type Read Write Description Writing an integer value to this field sets the gain for the green pixels The dB of gain green that the camera will achieve at a given setting is determined by the formula shown in Section 6 2 on page 159 The bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the raw value Byte 2 High byte of the raw value Field Name Raw Min Offset 0x000F Size 2 Bytes Type Read only Basler sprint Color Cameras 255 Configuring the Camera AW00069909000 Register Base Address OxOEAO Description Minimum allowed integer value for the raw gain green setting The bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the min value Byte 2 High byte of the min value Field Name Raw Max Offset 0x0011 Size 2 Bytes Type Read only Description Maximum allowed integer value for the raw gain green setting The bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the max value Byte 2 High byte of the max value 256 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Configuring the Camera Gain Blue CSR Note The gain specifically for the blue pixels can be set by writing a floating point value to the Absolut
120. Edge Controlled Exposure 9 55 us 9 70 us Level Controlled Exposure 9 55 us 9 70 us Frame Valid Delay for the Enhanced Raw Line Acquisition Mode 40 MHz Min Max Programmable 9 57 us 9 73 us Edge Controlled Exposure 9 57 us 9 73 us Level Controlled Exposure 9 57 us 9 73 us Table 35 Line Valid Frame Valid Delays with the 4k Camera Set for 8 Tap Video Data Output Mode 152 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Video Data Output Modes Line Valid Frame Valid Delays for 8 Tap Mode 4k Cameras Line Valid Delay for the RGB Line Acquisition Mode 80 MHz Min Max Programmable 9 33 us 9 43 us Edge Controlled Exposure 9 68 us 9 78 us Level Controlled Exposure 9 33 us 9 43 us Frame Valid Delay for the Raw Line Acquisition Mode 80 MHz Min Max Programmable 12 62 us 12 73 us Edge Controlled Exposur 12 62 us 12 73 us Level Controlled Exposure 12 62 us 12 73 us Frame Valid Delay for the Enhanced Raw Line Acquisition Mode 80 MHz Min Max Programmable 12 64 us 12 76 us Edge Controlled Exposure 12 64 us 12 76 us Level Controlled Exposure 12 64 us 12 76 us Table 35 Line Valid Frame Valid Delays with the 4k Camera Set for 8 Tap Video Data Output Mode 8k Camera Line Valid Frame Valid Delays for 8 Tap Mode 8k Camera Line Valid Delay for the RGB Line Acquisition Mode 40 MHz Min Max Programmabl
121. Exposure 3 02 us 3 13 us Frame Valid Delay for the Enhanced Raw Line Acquisition Mode 80 MHz Min Max Programmable 3 04 us 3 16 us Edge Controlled Exposure 3 04 us 3 16 us Level Controlled Exposure 3 04 us 3 16 us AW00069909000 Table 14 Line Valid Frame Valid Delays with the 4k Camera Set for 2 Tap Video Data Output Modes 8k Camera Line Valid Frame Valid Delays for 2 Tap Modes 8k Camera Line Valid Delay for the RGB Line Acquisition Mode 40 MHz Min Max Programmable 3 08 us 3 22 us Edge Controlled Exposure 3 13 us 3 27 us Table 15 Line Valid Frame Valid Delays with the 8k Camera Set for 2 Tap Video Data Output Modes 124 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Video Data Output Modes Line Valid Frame Valid Delays for 2 Tap Modes 8k Camera Level Controlled Exposure 3 08 us 3 22 us Frame Valid De lay for the Raw Line Acquisition Mode 40 MHz Min Max Programmable 3 21 us 3 36 us Edge Controlled Exposure 3 21 us 3 36 us Level Controlled Exposure 3 21 us 3 36 us Frame Valid Delay for the Enhanced Raw Line Acquisition Mode 40 MHz Min Max Programmable 3 23 us 3 39 us Edge Controlled Exposure 3 23 us 3 39 us Level Controlled Exposure 3 23 us 3 39 us Line Valid Delay for the RGB Line Acquisition Mode 80 MHz Min Max Programmable 2 91 us 3 01 us Edge Contro
122. For more information about the white balance feature see Section 6 2 on page 159 c Set the gain value of the color with the highest gain value as low as possible Thus you obtain the lowest noise If the white balance is correct proceed with step 8 If the white balance is not correct go to the following step 7 Ifthe white balance is not correct adjust the corresponding color gain parameter in the Gain amp Offset section Basler sprint Color Cameras 185 Features AW00069909000 8 11 12 13 186 Adjust the gamma correction parameters for detailed information see Section 6 5 on page 177 gt a Make sure that gamma correction is enabled Lookup Table section gt Lookup Table Enable parameter b Set the gamma parameter The standard value for gamma is 0 42 An incorrect gamma value means that the saturation of the colors will change with the brightness Fig 67 Setting the Gamma Value Gamma 1 means no adaptation Only set gamma to 1 if image evaluations later on include this step or if you want to obtain a higher contrast The higher contrast can only be obtained by simultaneously loosing details in the dark areas of the image If you use another color space set the gamma value to the corresponding value When gamma is set correctly the intensity difference between adjacent gray values i e white bright gray etc should be equal see example in Figure 67 Save the curren
123. Len indicates that the Address field in this frame contains a 16 bit address If you check the table on page 273 you will find that the address for the Mode field of the Test Image Mode CSR is 0x1801 a 16 bit address You are free to use any supported AddrLen as long as the CSR address will fit into it 0x01 Is the DataLen field This field indicates the data size in bytes that will be transferred by using this write command As shown in the table on page 273 the data size for the Mode field of the Test Image Mode CSR is 1 byte 0x01 0x18 is the Address field in little endian This field indicates the CSR address to which the data bytes will be written The little endian values of 0x01 0x18 in the address field translate to an address of 0x1801 If you check the table on page 273 you will find that 0x1801 is the address for the Mode field the Test Image Mode CSR The address for any field within a CSR is equal to the base address for the CSR plus the offset for the CSR field In this case the base address of the Test Image Mode CSR is 1800 and the offset for the Mode field is 0001 This results in an address of 1801 for the Mode field 0x01 is the Data field This field contains the data that must be written to the register in order to activate Test Image One see the table on page 273 Ox1D is the BCC field See Section 7 3 2 3 on page 295 for instructions on calculating a BCC Note that the use of a BCC is optional In this
124. Level Controlled or Programmed Exposure Raw Line A First 58 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Line Acquisition Modes 8 Tap Output Mode ExSync Signal d INE i F Frame Valid Delay see Table 35 and Table 36 Or End of de Programmed Ting y Frame Valid Delay see Table 35 and Table 36 Frame Valid FVAL i Length 2 I 0 050 us for 40 MHz Camera Link clock cycle 0 025 us for 80 MHz clock cycle i m Line Valid m m yp 1L Data Valid m H e SUV UU UU UU UU UU e Clock _ DO Pixel Data OCXDOS4 09 0000090990000 D1 Pixel Data TEA A 099 X 00008 O49 XO Its D2 abaa OOC MOOO YOO D3 8 bits eed X gt 4 UE NE P e D4 i RA Y RA Pel bata XOX 4 00000909099 0000 D5 meinaa XXX OX ED 000009 0 9 0000 D6 sibus OOS B4 OO Poo D7 sDw OOK OO DOOYOO Timing diagrams are not to scale N At full resolution N 8192 on the 8k model 4096 on 4k models and 2048 on 2k models If the AOI feature is used N will be determined by the AOI settings Fig 28 Eight Tap Mode with Edge Level Controlled or Programmed Exposure Raw Line A First Basler sprint Color Cameras 59 Line Acquisition Modes AW00069909000 3 3 2 Raw Line B First Line Acquisition Mode 2k and 4k Cameras Only The Raw Line B First line acquisition mode is analogous to the Raw Line A First line acquisition mode see Section 3 3 1 on page 51 with the roles of lines A and B interchanged In th
125. Level Function 1 13 14 261 Gnd Input Ground Ground for the inner shield of the cable 2 YO Output Camera Data from the Camera Link transmitter 15 YO Link LVDS 3 Y1 Output Camera Data from the Camera Link transmitter 16 V14 Link LVDS 4 Y2 Output Camera Data from the Camera Link transmitter 17 V24 Link LVDS 6 Y3 Output Camera Data from the Camera Link transmitter 19 Y34 Link LVDS 5 YCIk Output Camera Transmit clock from the Camera Link transmitter 18 YClk4 Link LVDS 8 Z0 Output Camera Data from the Camera Link transmitter 21 70 Link LVDS 9 Z1 Output Camera Data from the Camera Link transmitter 22 Z4 Link LVDS 10 Z2 Output Camera Data from the Camera Link transmitter 23 72 Link LVDS 12 Z3 Output Camera Data from the Camera Link transmitter 25 734 Link LVDS 11 ZCIk Output Camera Transmit clock from the Camera Link transmitter 24 ZClka Link LVDS Table 6 Pin Assignments for MDR Connector 2 Pins 1 13 14 and 26 are all tied to Ground inside of the camera 28 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Physical Interface 2 2 2 Pin Assignments for the 6 pin Micro miniature Receptacle The pin assignments for the 6 pin micro miniature receptacle are as shown in Table 7 Pin Number Signal Name Direction Level Function 1 21 12 VDC Input 12 VDC 10 Camera power 3 4 Not used 5 6 DC Gnd Input Ground DC ground Table 7 Pin Assignments for the 6 Pi
126. NU Shading Correction parameters group to enable shading correction You can enable DSNU correction only PRNU correction only or both DSNU and PRNU correction By Setting CSRs You enable shading correction by writing the appropriate value to the Mode field of the Shading Mode CSR see page 262 Section 7 2 2 on page 242 explains CSRs and Section 7 3 1 on page 289 explains using read write commands Basler sprint Color Cameras 167 Features AW00069909000 6 4 5 Generating and Saving User Shading Correction Values This section includes procedures for generating the user DSNU and PRNU shading correction values that will be stored in the user shading correction values file If you will be setting the camera to do DSNU correction only then you only need to perform the DSNU procedure If you will be setting the camera to do PRNU correction only then you only need to perform the PRNU procedure And if you will be setting the camera to do both DSNU and PRNU correction you must follow both procedures Generating and Saving User DSNU Shading Correction Values The procedure below describes how to generate user DSNU shading correction values When you generate the values they will automatically be stored in the camera s user shading value file You should be aware that the camera uses one set of DSNU values when it is operating in single line acquisition mode and a different set of values when it is operating in any one of the other line a
127. OI fall into an adjacent segment The Max Seg AOI Pixels is defined as the number of AOI pixels included in the segment that contains the largest number of AOI pixels Or the AOI could be positioned so that the pixels in the AOI fall into three segments so that some of the pixels in the AOI fall into a complete segment and the other pixels into the segments that are adjacent to the completely covered segment As above the Max Seg AOI Pixels is defined as the number of AOI pixels included in the segment that contains the largest number of AOI pixels which in this case is the completely covered segment Therefore the Max Seg AOI Pixels will be 2048 Consider some examples Suppose that the AOI is set to use the entire line of a 4k camera i e the AOI starting pixel is 1 and the AOI length is 4096 With these settings the number of AOI pixels in segment 1 is 2048 and the number of AOI pixels in segment 2 is 2048 The Max Seg AOI would be 2048 In any case where the number of AOI pixels that falls into each segment is the same the Max Seg AOI Pixels is simply the number of AOI pixels included in one of the segments Suppose that the AOI starting pixel is set to 1 and the AOI length is set to 256 With these settings all 256 pixels in the AOI would fall into segment 1 The number of AOI pixels in segment 1 is 256 and the number in segment 2 is 0 So the Max Seg AOI Pixels would be 256 Suppose that for a 4k camera the AOI starting pixel is set
128. Output Mode r 003 0 09 0303 0303 303 030 4 30 09 0 0 0 0303 09 9 019 1 34 3 130 1 Ce 000303 030 030 0 009 09 0 09 3 3 9 9 39 343 340 3 1 13 1 1 1 e 003 0 0d 0303 00 003 0309 0 030 340 0 0 0 1 0 9 3 9 4 13343 1 3 1 r 0090 0 00 0303 00 00 0 009 001 09 349 09 3 3 3 343 340 3 10 1 Va 00 0 03 030 00 030 0 0 001 0 o0 007 03 313 3 1 4 343 343 10 1 1 _ Line Valid Delay see Table 13 Table 14 and Table 15 Timing diagrams are not to scale N At full resolution virtual pixels N 4096 on the 8k model 2048 on 4k models and 1024 on 2k models If the AOI feature is used N will be determined by the AOI settings Fig 17 Two Tap Mode with Edge Level Controlled or Programmed Exposure RGB Pixel data and dummy data are transmitted in an alternating fashion on the D1 tap Basler sprint Color Cameras 45 Line Acquisition Modes AW00069909000 3 2 1 2 3 Tap Output Mode TATTecTacTcT6caccpcacTcpcaccpcaccecaccpcacce6c cc6038076003076003 VO Qa 30 03 00 003 0 0 00 0 09 0 0 01 343 3 03 3 3 3 3 1 1 V0 00 0 03 030 30 00 00 C o 00 0 20 0 03 9 9 340 1401 3 2 0 1 1 10 1 ExSync Va 0 003 0303 0 003 303 30 03 340 30 09 0 09 0 0 9092 0 43 9 3 9 13 1 S 00 0 0 00 00 00 0 00 009 0 09 09 9 909 93 9 9 4 340 3403 1 0 1 WOO 0o 3 003 008 00 08 00 00 0000 0 3 3 3 3 3 3 30 0 1 1 1 Be a PAP OE ee ee ee 3 7 Signal i Line Valid Delay see Table 18 Table 19 and Table 20 Or End of t Progr
129. R Connector 1 see Figure 13 on page 26 are shown in Table 5 The pin assignments for MDR connector 2 are shown in Table 6 Pin Number Signal Name Direction Level Function 1 13 14 261 Gnd Input Ground Ground for the inner shield of the cable 2 X0 Output Camera Link Data from the Camera Link transmitter 15 X0 Eves 3 X1 Output Camera Link Data from the Camera Link transmitter 16 X1 EDS 4 X2 Output Camera Link Data from the Camera Link transmitter 17 X2 LVDS 6 X3 Output Camera Link Data from the Camera Link transmitter 19 X3 LVDS 5 XCIk Output Camera Link Transmit clock from the Camera Link transmitter 18 XCIk a 7 SerTC Input RS 644 Serial communication data receive 20 SerTC LVDS SerTC serial to camera 8 SerTFG Output RS 644 Serial communication data transmit 21 SerTFG LVDS SerTFG serial to frame grabber 9 CC1 Input RS 644 ExSync external trigger 22 CC1 LVDS 10 CC2 Input RS 644 Not used 23 CC2 SENS 11 CC3 Input RS 644 Not used 24 CC3 n 12 CC4 Input RS 644 Not used 25 CCA E Table 5 Pin Assignments for MDR Connector 1 Pins 1 13 14 and 26 are all tied to ground inside of the camera Basler sprint Color Cameras 27 Physical Interface AW00069909000 Pin Number Signal Name Direction
130. RxOut16 D3 Bit 10 Not used Not used Port F7 TXIN17 RxOut17 D3 Bit 11 MSB Not used Not used LVAL TxIN24 RxOut24 Line Valid Line Valid Line Valid FVAL TxIN25 RxOut25 Frame Valid Frame Valid Frame Valid DVAL TxIN26 RxOut26 Data Valid Data Valid Data Valid Spare TxIN23 RxOut23 Not Used Not Used Not Used Strobe TxINCLK RxOutClk Pixel Clock Pixel Clock Pixel Clock Table 22 Bit Assignments for 4 Tap Output Modes MDR Conn 2 Transmitter Y Present for the Raw and Enhanced Raw line acquisition modes only Basler sprint Color Cameras 135 Video Data Output Modes AW00069909000 The tables below show the following delays when the camera is set for full resolution and 4 tap video data output mode Line valid delays for the RGB line acquisition mode see Figure 19 on page 47 Frame valid delays for the Raw and Enhanced Raw line acquisition modes see Figure 27 on page 58 and Figure 43 on page 80 Note that the delays depend on the line acquisition mode setting and the camera link clock speed setting The delays also depend on whether the camera is a 4k or an 8k camera Each delay can vary slightly within the stated minimum and maximum values 2k Cameras Line Valid Frame Valid Delays for 4 Tap Modes 2k Cameras Line Valid Delay for the RGB Line Acquisition Mode 40 MHz Min Max Programmable 3 07 us 3 20 us Edge Controlled Exposure 3 12 us 3 24 us Level Controlled Exposure 3 07 us 3 20 us
131. RxOut23 Not Used Strobe TxINCLK RxOutClk Pixel Clock Table 26 Bit Assignments for 6 Tap Output Mode MDR Conn 1 Transmitter X 142 AW00069909000 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 MDR Conn 2 Transmitter Y Port Camera Frame Bit Assignment Grabber 6 Tap 8 Bit Port DO TxINO RxOutO D3 Bit 0 Port D1 TxIN1 RxOut1 D3 Bit 1 Port D2 TxIN2 RxOut2 D3 Bit 2 Port D3 TXIN3 RxOut3 D3 Bit 3 Port D4 TxIN4 RxOut4 D3 Bit 4 Port D5 TxIN6 RxOut6 D3 Bit 5 Port D6 TxIN27 RxOut27 D3 Bit 6 Port D7 TxIN5 RxOut5 D3 Bit 7 MSB Port EO TxIN7 RxOut7 D4 Bit 0 Port E1 TxIN8 RxOut8 D4 Bit 1 Port E2 TxIN9 RxOut9 D4 Bit 2 Port E3 TxIN12 RxOut12 D4 Bit 3 Port E4 TxIN13 RxOut13 D4 Bit 4 Port E5 TxIN14 RxOut14 D4 Bit 5 Port E6 TxIN10 RxOut10 D4 Bit 6 Port E7 TxIN11 RxOut11 D4 Bit 7 MSB Port FO TXIN15 RxOut15 D5 Bit 0 Port F1 TxIN18 RxOut18 D5 Bit 1 Port F2 TxIN19 RxOut19 D5 Bit 2 Port F3 TxIN20 RxOut20 D5 Bit 3 Port F4 TxIN21 RxOut21 D5 Bit 4 Port F5 TxIN22 RxOut22 D5 Bit 5 Port F6 TxIN16 RxOut16 D5 Bit 6 Port F7 TxIN17 RxOut17 D5 Bit 7 MSB LVAL TxIN24 RxOut24 Line Valid FVAL TxIN25 RxOut25 Not Used DVAL TxIN26 RxOut26 Data Valid Spare TxIN23 RxOut23 Not Used Strobe TxINCLK RxOutClk Pixel Clock Table 27 Bit Assignments for 6 Tap Output Mode MDR Conn 2 Transmitter Y Basler sprint Color Cameras Video Data Output
132. SRs You enable the stamp feature by writing the appropriate value to the Mode field of the Line Stamp Mode CSR see Section on page 273 You set the low pixel threshold by writing a value to the Low Pixel Threshold field in the Line Stamp Low Pixel Threshold CSR see page 274 The set value will apply to all colors You set the high pixel threshold by writing a value to the High Pixel Threshold field in the Line Stamp High Pixel Threshold CSR see page 275 The set value will apply to all colors See Section 7 2 2 on page 242 for an explanation of CSRs and Section 7 3 1 on page 289 for an explanation of using read write commands 216 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 6 9 Lookup Table Features The sensor circuitry in the camera acquires pixel data at 12 bit depth However when the camera is set for an 8 bit video data output format pixel data is only output at 8 bit depth With the camera set for an 8 bit format it normally converts the 12 bit data output from the sensor to 8 bit data by simply truncating the least significant 4 bits The lookup table feature lets you create three customized tables one each for red green and blue The lookup tables can be used to map the 12 bit values output from the sensor to 8 bit values that will be transmitted from the camera Once you have entered values into the lookup table you can use the table to control 12 bit to 8 bit conversion rather than relying on simple truncation
133. Test image one is useful for checking the integrity of the data transmitted by the camera If you capture lines and examine the pixel values in the captured lines the values should be exactly as described above Note When the camera is set for an 8 bit output mode the pixel values in test image eight range from 0 to 255 as described above If the camera is set for a 10 bit output the pixel values will range from 0 to 1023 If the camera is set for a 12 bit output the pixel values will range from 0 to 4095 Basler sprint Color Cameras 203 Features AW00069909000 6 7 4 Test Image Nine Fixed Blue Gradient 6 7 4 1 Test Image Nine Generated with the RGB Line Acquisition Mode Test image nine generated with the RGB line acquisition mode displays a fixed horizontal blue gradient The test image is identical to test image seven generated with the RGB line acquisition mode apart from the fact that blue is shown instead of red 6 7 4 2 Test Image Nine Generated with the Raw and Enhanced Raw Line Acquisition Modes When the camera is set to a Raw or Enhanced Raw line acquisition mode see Section 3 3 on page 50 and Section 3 4 on page 69 and test image nine a test image is formed with a fixed horizontal gray scale gradient derived from the blue pixels When e g an 8 bit output mode is selected the gray scale gradient ranges from 0 to 255 and repeats every 512 pixels as shown in Figure 86 The odd lines in the test image refer
134. Use a binary read command to read the Name field of the configuration set bulk data CSR This is the name of a configuration set file that contains saved data 3 Usea binary read command to read the value in the Info field of the configuration set bulk data CSR a If the value is 0x00 it means that the file contains saved parameters and it is not an activated file Continue to step 4 b If the value is 0x04 it means that the file contains saved parameters and it is an activated file Continue to step 4 c If the value is 0x01 no more configuration set files with saved parameters exist Exit the procedure 4 Use a binary write command to set the value of the Control field in the configuration set bulk data CSR to 0x01 Setting the value to 0x01 initiates an enumerate next function 5 Return to step 2 This procedure would list all of the configuration set bulk data files that contain a saved parameter set If you wanted to enumerate the existing saved shading value file you would use a similar procedure but you would write to and read from the shading value bulk data CSR instead Sample code that illustrates how to enumerate bulk data files is available from Basler see Section 7 4 on page 296 Basler sprint Color Cameras 283 Configuring the Camera AW00069909000 Downloading a Bulk Data File from the Camera to a PC You can download a bulk data file from the camera s non volatile memory to your host PC As an example
135. Use the four M3 setscrews supplied with the camera to lock the helical mount to the camera See Figure 9 for information where to place the M3 screws Note When screwing in the M3 screws make sure to never exceed a torque of 0 1 Nm If the torque is exceeded the helical mount can be damaged and may no longer be light proof Adjusting the Assembly of Optical Components For a reproduction ratio of 1 1 the Makro Symmar HM 5 6 120 0058 lens requires a distance of 235 6 mm between its flange and the CMOS sensor The distance to the CMOS sensor is accounted for by adding the following partial distances 15 mm distance between the CMOS sensor and the flange of the camera s V Basler mount ca 130 mm minimum extension of the helical mount 90 6 mm added extension of the helical mount by partly sliding out the insert 1 Coarsely focus on an object placed in front of the lens at working distance 212 mm by sliding the insert of the helical mount in its correct position Lock the insert by screwing in locking screw 1 2 Fine focus the lens on the object by turning the lens to employ the helical threads After having attained the optimum focus screw in locking screw 2 8 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 3 2 2 Adapting with the M58 x 0 75 V Basler Lens Mount The following example illustrates the use of the M58 x 0 75 V Basler lens mount connected to an assembly of further o
136. Using an AC light source can make images appear noisy Make sure that the camera has proper ventilation If the camera becomes extremely hot it may produce noisy images Check the exposure time If you use an extremely long exposure time the images can become noisy Check your gain setting Using a very high gain setting can cause noisy images Examine the objects that you are imaging Objects with characteristics such as changing surface texture or reflectance will produce images that appear noisy Is the shading correction using correct parameters Has the problem been corrected Yes No Exit this chart Contact Basler technical support The contact numbers appear on the front pages of this manual Before you call for support be sure to make note of the camera settings and the frame grabber settings you are using You should also have a captured live image and a captured test image available Basler technical support will frequently request that you e mail copies of these captured images Basler sprint Color Cameras 303 Troubleshooting and Support AW00069909000 8 4 3 Interfacing Use the interfacing troubleshooting chart if you think that there is a problem with the cables between your devices or if you have been directed here from another chart Before making or breaking any camera connections always switch off power to the system camera and host PC If you have not already do so use a voltmeter to ch
137. Valid Delays with the 8k Camera Set for 8 Tap Video Data Output Mode 154 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 6 Features 6 1 Gain and Offset 6 1 1 Gain Gain is adjustable As shown in Figure 59 increasing the gain setting increases the slope of the camera s response curve and results in higher camera output for a given amount of light input Decreasing the gain setting decreases the slope of the response curve and results in lower output for a given amount of light Gain is a global adjustment and affects the red green and blue pixels equally Additional color specific gain can be used for white balancing see Section 6 2 on page 159 The total gain for each color will be the sum of the global Gain this section and the additional color specific gain Gain is adjustable on an integer scale The minimum gain setting for all video data Features 255 6 dB 0 dB 192 Camera Output 428 in an 8 bit mode 6 dB 64 0 Low Medium High Light Level Fig 59 Various Levels of Gain output modes is 2731 The maximum setting is 16383 for all bit depths of the video data output modes The default setting is 4096 which results in 0 dB of gain Table 37 shows the dB of gain that will be achieved at various integer settings Gain Setting dB of Gain 2731 minimum allowed for all output modes 3 5 4096 default 0 16383 maximum allowed 12 0 Table 37 dB of Gain
138. a field of the Gamma CSR see page 263 Section 7 2 2 on page 242 explains CSRs and Section 7 3 1 on page 289 explains using read write commands 178 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Features 6 6 Color Enhancement 6 6 1 Color Adjustment The color adjustment feature lets you modifiy the colors output by the camera to best suit your needs The color adjustment feature can be used in combination with all line acquisition modes i e with the RGB Raw and Enhanced Raw line acquisition modes For more information about the line acquisition modes see Section 3 on page 41 D Note on availability of color adjustment and line stamp features spL8192 39kc only On the initial wake up after delivery the camera loads the factory configuration set into the work set In the spL8192 39kc it depends on the firmware version in the camera which feature is available and which is not One firmware version includes the line stamp feature The other firmware version includes the color adjustment feature If you want your camera to wake up with the feature that is not included in the currently installed firmware please contact Basler Technical Support Additional information All other features are available for the spL8192 39kc exceptions see single feature sections Basler sprint Color Cameras 179 Features 6 6 1 1 The RGB Color Space As explained in Section 1 6 on page 20 color creation involves the use
139. a for line A will be transmitted first followed by the related pixel data for line B which are transmitted on the next clock cycle In this way pairs of related lines are created with both lines imaging the same area of the object When using the Enhanced Raw Line A First B Delayed line acquisition mode the object being imaged should cross line A first and line B second the image of the object will cross line B first and line A second as is apparent from Figure 36 through Figure 41 After having enabled the Enhanced Raw Line A First B Delayed line acquisition mode the following will occur in a sequence of ExSync cycles The first cycle of the ExSync signal will trigger the start of image acquisition i e exposure on both lines in the sensor The exposure time you are using will apply to both lines time the start of pixel data readout for both lines time the start of transmission of line A pixel data This is data for which no related data from line B will become available The data is therefore not useful The values from line B are held in a buffer in the camera Their output will be delayed until the fourth cycle of the ExSync signal The second cycle of the ExSync signal will time the start of transmission of line B pixel data This is data that was stored before the Enhanced Raw Line A First B Delayed line acquisition mode was enabled The data is therefore not useful No exposure will occur The third cyc
140. a rotation in negative direction by 60 in the color hexagon blue will be completely transformed into magenta If the value is set to 127 corresponding to a rotation in positive direction by 60 in the color hexagon blue will be completely transformed into cyan If the value is set to 0 blue will not be changed See Section 6 6 1 on page 179 for more information about the color adjustment feature Field Name Hue Blue Min Offset 0x0034 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description Minimum allowed integer value for the hue blue value setting Field Name Hue Blue Max Offset 0x0035 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description Maximum allowed integer value for the hue blue value setting 270 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Configuring the Camera Register Base Address 0x4400 Field Name Hue Blue Increment Offset 0x0036 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description An integer value indicating the increment for the hue blue value setting Field Name Saturation Magenta Status Offset 0x0037 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of the saturation adjustment for magenta 0x00 The adjustment is not available 0x01 The adjustment is available and all related settings are OK Field Name Saturation Magenta Value Offset 0x0038 Size 1 Byte Type Read Write Description Writing an integer value to this field sets the saturation value of magenta for pre
141. a stream D5 will transmit data for pixel 14 Data stream D6 will transmit data for pixel 15 And data stream D7 will transmit data for pixel 16 The pixel data will be at 8 bit depth On the next cycle of the pixel clock the frame valid line valid and data valid bits will all be high On this clock cycle data stream DO will transmit data for pixel 17 in the line Data stream D1 will transmit data for pixel 18 Data stream D2 will transmit data for pixel 19 Data stream D3 will transmit data for pixel 20 Data stream D4 will transmit data for pixel 21 Data stream D5 will transmit data for pixel 22 Data stream D6 will transmit data for pixel 23 And data stream D7 will transmit data for pixel 24 The pixel data will be at 8 bit depth This pattern will continue until all of the pixel data for line one has been transmitted After all of the pixel data for the line has been transmitted the frame valid line valid and data valid bits all become low indicating that valid pixel data is no longer being transmitted Figure 21 on page 49 Figure 28 on page 59 and Figure on page 81 shows the data sequence when the camera is operating in edge controlled or level controlled exposure mode or in programmable exposure mode Basler sprint Color Cameras 147 Video Data Output Modes MDR Conn 1 Transmitter X Port Camera Frame Bit Assignment Grabbe
142. a user shading values file When you click the button the CCT will open a window that lets you navigate to your PC and select a file By Setting CSRs You can upload a user shading values files by writing values to the shading values bulk data CSR Section 7 2 3 on page 280 explains the bulk data CSRs and Section 7 2 3 3 on page 283 explains how to use the CSRs to upload a file Section 7 3 1 on page 289 explains using read write commands Note The factory shading values file can be downloaded from the camera to the PC The factory shading values file can t be uploaded from the PC to the camera because the factory shading values file in the camera is protected and can t be overwritten 176 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Features 6 5 Gamma Correction The gamma correction feature lets you modify the brightness of the pixel values output by the camera s sensor to account for a non linearity in the human perception of brightness To accomplish the correction a gamma correction factor y is applied to the brightness value Y of each pixel according to the following formula Y Y uncorrected Y corrected Y aes max max The formula uses uncorrected and corrected pixel brightnesses that are normalized by the maximum pixel brightness The maximum pixel brightness equals 255 for 8 bit output and is constrained for technical reasons to 1020 for 10 bit output and 4080 for 12 bit output When the gamma correction fac
143. acquired by line B ILe L e ll zo com A Line B Object Passing Camera N 4 amp Movement Point 3 Point 2 Point 1 Fig 41 Enhanced Raw Line A First B Delayed Line Acquisition ExSync Cycle 6 Basler sprint Color Cameras 77 Line Acquisition Modes AW00069909000 Before transmission the pixel values are arranged inside the camera in this sequence Line A pixel value red of pixel 1 RA1 pixel value green of pixel 2 GA2 pixel value red of pixel 3 RA3 pixel value green of pixel 4 GA4 and so on Line B pixel value green of pixel 1 GB1 pixel value blue of pixel 2 BB2 pixel value green of pixel 3 GB3 pixel value blue of pixel 4 BB4 and so on The pixel values are transmitted from the camera according to the selected video data output mode using a specific bit depth and number of taps For information about the available video data output modes the assignment of the pixel values to the individual taps and timing details of the data transmission see Section 3 4 1 1 on page 78 For information about bit assignments see Section 5 2 on page 118 3 4 1 1 Pixel Value Transmission for the Enhanced Raw Line A First Line Acquisition Mode For the Enhanced Raw Line A F
144. age 163 It is possible to generate shading values when the AOI is set to a smaller value than the full length of the sensor In this case only the shading values inside the AOI will be calculated but the full shading file will be written Values that are outside of the current AOI will be copied from the previously activated shading file 4 Perform several acquisitions and examine the pixel values returned from the camera The pixel values for the brightest pixels should be about 80 to 85 of maximum a If the pixel values for the brightest pixels are at 80 to 85 of maximum go on to step 3 b If the pixel values for the brightest pixels are not at 80 to 85 of maximum adjust your lighting and or lens aperture setting to achieve 80 to 85 5 Perform several acquisitions and examine the pixel values in each line In each line the values for the darkest pixels must be at least 67 of the values for the lightest pixels in the line If the values for the darkest pixels are less than 67 of the value for the lightest pixels the camera will not be able to fully correct for shading variations a If the values for the darkest pixels are at least 67 of the value for the lightest pixels go on to step 6 170 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Features b If the values for the darkest pixels are less than 67 of the value for the lightest pixels it usually indicates extreme variations in lighting or poor quality optics Return to st
145. ain Green CSR Note The gain specifically for the green pixels can be set by writing a floating point value to the Absolute Gain Green field or by writing an integer value to the Raw Gain Green field See Section 7 2 2 1 on page 242 for an explanation of the difference between these two fields If Gain Green 2 is not enabled the register settings relate to sensor lines A and B enabled register settings relate only to sensor line A Register Base Address OxOEAO Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Absolute Gain Green Offset 0x0001 Size 4 Bytes Type Read Write Description Writing a floating point value to this field sets the gain in dB The value in this field is a standard IEEE 754 single precision 32 bit floating point number See Section 6 2 on page 159 for more information about gain green Field Name Absolute Min Offset 0x0005 Size 4 Bytes Type Read only Description Minimum allowed floating point value for the absolute gain green setting The value in this field is a standard IEEE 754 single precision 32 bit floating point number Field Name Absolute Max Offset 0x0009 Size 4 Bytes Type Read only
146. al is transmitted If the RGB line acquisition mode is selected the frame valid signal will not be transmitted When the camera is not transmitting valid data the frame valid line valid and data valid bits sent on each cycle of the pixel clock will be low After the camera has completed an exposure there will be a delay while data is read out of the sensor When readout is complete the camera will begin to transmit pixel data On the clock cycle where valid pixel data transmission begins the frame valid line valid and data valid bits all become high Eight data streams DO through D7 are transmitted in parallel on this clock cycle On this clock cycle data stream DO will transmit data for pixel 1 in the line Data stream D1 will transmit data for pixel 2 Data stream D2 will transmit data for pixel 3 Data stream D3 will transmit data for pixel 4 Data stream D4 will transmit data for pixel 5 Data stream D5 will transmit data for pixel 6 Data stream D6 will transmit data for pixel 7 And data stream D7 will transmit data for pixel 8 The pixel data will be at 8 bit depth On the next cycle of the pixel clock the frame valid line valid and data valid bits will all be high On this clock cycle data stream DO will transmit data for pixel 9 in the line Data stream D1 will transmit data for pixel 10 Data stream D2 will transmit data for pixel 11 Data stream D3 will transmit data for pixel 12 Data stream D4 will transmit data for pixel 13 Dat
147. alid pixel data is no longer being transmitted Figure 17 on page 45 Figure 26 on page 57 and Figure 42 on page 79 show the data sequence when the camera is operating in edge controlled or level controlled exposure mode or in programmable exposure mode 120 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Video Data Output Modes MDR Conn 1 Transmitter X Port Camera Frame Bit Assignment Grabber 2 Tap 12 Bit 2 Tap 10 Bit 2 Tap 8 Bit Port AO TxINO RxOut0 DO Bit 0 DO Bit 0 DO Bit 0 Port A1 TxIN1 RxOut1 DO Bit 1 DO Bit 1 DO Bit 1 Port A2 TxIN2 RxOut2 DO Bit 2 DO Bit 2 DO Bit 2 Port A3 TxIN3 RxOut3 DO Bit 3 DO Bit 3 DO Bit 3 Port A4 TxIN4 RxOut4 DO Bit 4 DO Bit 4 DO Bit 4 Port A5 TxIN6 RxOut6 DO Bit 5 DO Bit 5 DO Bit 5 Port A6 TxIN27 RxOut27 DO Bit 6 DO Bit 6 DO Bit 6 Port A7 TxIN5 RxOut5 DO Bit 7 DO Bit 7 DO Bit 7 MSB Port BO TxIN7 RxOut7 DO Bit 8 DO Bit 8 D1 Bit O Port B1 TxIN8 RxOut8 DO Bit 9 DO Bit 9 MSB D1 Bit 1 Port B2 TxIN9 RxOut9 DO Bit 10 Not Used D1 Bit 2 Port B3 TxIN12 RxOut12 DO Bit 11 MSB Not Used D1 Bit 3 Port B4 TxIN13 RxOut13 D1 Bit 8 D1 Bit 8 D1 Bit 4 Port B5 TxIN14 RxOut14 D1 Bit 9 D1 Bit 9 MSB D1 Bit 5 Port B6 TxIN10 RxOut10 D1 Bit 10 Not Used D1 Bit 6 Port B7 TxIN11 RxOut11 D1 Bit 11 MSB Not Used D1 Bit 7 MSB Port CO TxIN15 RxOut15 D1 Bit 0 D1 Bit 0 Not Used Port C1 TxIN18 RxOut18 D1 Bit 1 D1 Bit 1
148. ame Select parameter in the Shading Files parameters group to select the user shading values file or the factory shading values file and use the Download button to download the selected file By Setting CSRs You can download the user or the factory shading values file by writing values to the shading values bulk data CSR Section 7 2 3 on page 280 explains the bulk data CSRs and Section 7 2 3 3 on page 283 explains how to use the CSRs to download a file Section 7 3 1 on page 289 explains using read write commands Basler sprint Color Cameras 175 Features AW00069909000 6 4 9 Uploading a Shading Values File to Your Camera Once you have downloaded a user shading value file to your PC as described on the previous page you can upload the file from your PC to a camera Using the download function together with the upload function is useful if you want to transfer a user shading values file from one camera to another camera of the same type You can upload a user shading values file by using the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary read write commands from within your own application to set the camera s control and status registers CSRs Note that when you upload a user shading values file to your camera you will overwrite any existing values in the camera s user shading values file With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 234 you use the Upload button in the Shading Files parameters group to upload
149. amera is not Yes No responding Make sure that The camera has power and that the power source meets the requirements in Section 2 5 on page 32 You are using the correct data cables between you camera The RS 644 and the frame grabber see Section 2 4 on page 31 No port is working The wires in the data cable are continuous Mana The cable connections are firmly seated After you made these checks is the problem still present Yes Contact Basler technical support The contact numbers appear on the front pages of this manual Basler sprint Color Cameras 305 Troubleshooting and Support AW00069909000 8 4 5 Before Calling Basler Technical Support To help you as quickly and efficiently as possible when you have a problem with a Basler camera it is important that you collect several pieces of information before you contact Basler technical support Copy the form that appears on this and the next page or download it from the support section of www baslerweb com fill it out and fax the pages to your local dealer or to your nearest Basler support center Or you can write an e mail listing the requested pieces of information and with the requested files attached Our technical support contact numbers are shown in the title pages of this manual 306 Basler sprint Color Cameras AWO00069909000 Troubleshooting and Support 1 The camera s product ID The camera s serial number The operating system A WO N
150. ammed Time J Line Valid Delay see Table 18 Table 19 and Table 20 p Line Valid rm H Data Valid Pixel Clock DO Pixel Data 10 or 8 bits D1 Pixel Data 10 or 8 bits D2 Pixel Data 10 or 8 bits Timing diagrams are not to scale N At full resolution virtual pixels N 4096 on the 8k model 2048 on 4k models and 1024 on 2k models If the AOI feature is used N will be determined by the AOI settings Fig 18 Three Tap Mode with Edge Level Controlled or Programmed Exposure RGB 46 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Line Acquisition Modes 3 2 1 3 ExSync Signal Or End of Programmed Time Line Valid Data Valid Pixel Clock DO Pixel Data 12 10 or 8 bits D1 Pixel Data 12 10 or 8 bits D2 Pixel Data 12 10 or 8 bits D3 Pixel Data 12 10 or 8 bits C Tase uiai aia riai Caia siai aig Eais ao iai a aaki aia na asa Aois Saca Viie Sae Vais AEEA U 030 d 43 0 0 3 o 0 o0 00 00 00 00 0 09 39 13 03 0 03 13 3 31 1 Va 00 0 0 030 030 0030 0 0 00 C 610 qd 0230 3 9 3 39 3 3 340 3409 3 10 1 9 e 03 3 303 030 3 203 13 0 0 09 001 09 13 39 9 343 343 340 4 1 10 Y Ee 0 03 00 e 030 304 340 30 0 01 0 9 4 9 9 9 9 1 19 39 1403 1 e 09 E 03 03 08 038 008 0 00 00 003 03 3 13 13 3 3 3 34 10 Me ee ee ee 22 2 C 4 e _ E Line Valid Delay see Table 24 and Table 25 N H Line Valid Delay see Table 24 and Table 25 E
151. and this is not an activated file Return to step 4 c If the value is 0x04 more data exists and this is an activated file Return to step 4 Up to 255 characters can be read with a single binary bulk data read command If the file is larger than 255 characters repeated binary bulk data read commands are required When repeated bulk data read commands are required the file is read sequentially with each read command starting where the previous read stopped This procedure will download the data in the file to the host computer If you want to download a shading values bulk data file to the host PC you would use a similar procedure but you would use the shading values bulk data CSR instead Sample code that illustrates how to download a bulk data file is available from Basler see Section 7 4 on page 296 284 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Configuring the Camera Uploading a Bulk Data File from a PC to the Camera You can upload a bulk data file from your host PC to the camera s non volatile memory As an example assume that you previously downloaded a saved configuration set file named UserSet02 to your PC Also assume that you now want to upload this file from your host PC to a camera To do so you would follow this procedure 1 Use a binary write command to write the file name UserSet02to the Name field of the configu ration set bulk data CSR 2 Use a binary write command to set the value of the Control field in
152. ap x Taps AOI Length p Max Lines s 24x 8 2400 0 Max Lines s 246913 Formula 3 returns the lowest value So with the current camera settings the maximum allowed line rate would be 120833 lines per second The minimum allowed line period in this case would be v f 1 Min Line Period 120833 Min Line Period 0 00000827 8 3 us 112 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Exposure Start and Exposure Time Control 4 3 3 Increasing the Maximum Allowed Line Rate You may find that you would like to acquire lines at a rate higher than the maximum allowed with your current camera settings If this is the case you must first use the four formulas described on page 111 to determine which factor is restricting the maximum line rate the most Next you must try to make that factor less restrictive If you find that formula one exposure time is the most restrictive factor you should decrease the exposure time Decreasing the exposure time will increase the maximum line rate yielded by formula one If you decrease the exposure time you may need to compensate for a lower exposure time by using a brighter light source or by increasing the opening of your lens aperture If you find that formula two sensor readout is the most restrictive factor you may be able to adjust your AOI settings to decrease the Max Seg AOI Pixels Using a smaller AOI can decrease the Max Seg AOI Pixels Decreasing the Max Seg AOI Pixels will incr
153. arting pixel value See Section 6 3 on page 163 for more information about the AOI feature Field Name Min Offset 0x0003 Size 2 Bytes Type Read only Description Minimum allowed integer value for the starting pixel setting This field is updated to reflect limitations caused by the way any related features are set The 2 bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the min value Byte 2 High byte of the min value Field Name Max Offset 0x0005 Size 2 Bytes Type Read only Description Maximum allowed integer value for the starting pixel setting This field is updated to reflect limitations caused by the way any related features are set The 2 bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the max value Byte 2 High byte of the max value Field Name Increment Offset 0x0007 Size 2 Bytes Type Read only Description An integer value indicating the increment for the starting pixel setting The 2 bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the increment Byte 2 High byte of the increment 260 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Configuring the Camera Area of Interest Length CSR Register Base Address 0x100A Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The re
154. assume that you have saved a configuration set to the UserSet02 file and that you want to download this file from the camera to your host PC To do so you would follow this procedure Use a binary write command to write the file name UserSet02 to the Name field of the configuration set bulk data CSR 1 Use a binary read command to read the Size field of the configuration set bulk data CSR 2 If the file contains saved data this field will tell you the file size If the file does not contain saved data this field will be O 3 Use a binary write command to set the value of the Control field in the configuration set bulk data CSR to 0x02 Setting the value to 0x02 places the camera in read mode 4 Use a binary command to do a bulk data read from the camera The binary command must have the following characteristics OpCode 0x05 This OpCode makes the binary command a bulk data read DataLen the number of bytes to be read Max is 255 characters Address 0x281B Base address for the configuration set bulk data CSR plus the offset for the Data field Data none 5 You will receive a bulk data response frame from the camera The amount of data in the response will be as specified by the DataLen in step 4 6 Usea binary read command to read the value in the Info field of the configuration set bulk data CSR a If the value is 0x01 no more data exists in the file Exit the procedure b If the value is 0x00 more data exists
155. at Various Settings Basler sprint Color Cameras 155 Features AW00069909000 If you know the integer setting for the gain you can calculate the resulting dB of gain that the camera will achieve by using the following formula Gain in dB 20 x logy eo The maximum allowed of 12 0 dB not only applies to Gain but also to the total gain for each color i e global Gain plus the additional color specific gain must not exceed 12 0 dB Note High gain settings will degrade the image quality and high settings of the global Gain will limit your ability for white balancing We therefore strongly recommend using settings that will keep the sum of the gobal gain and the color specific gain distinctly below 12 0 dB This recommendation applies particularly to 10 bit and 12 bit video data output modes For details and information how to avoid high gain settings see Section 6 2 on page 159 Setting the Gain You can set the gain with the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary write commands from within your own application to set the camera s control and status registers CSRs With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 234 you use the Gain parameter in the Gain amp Offset parameters group to set the gain By Setting CSRs You set the gain by writing a value in dB to the Absolute Gain field or by writing an integer value to the Raw Gain field of the Gain CSR see page 251 Section 7 2 2 on pag
156. ate may be lower than suggested by the formulas We therefore recommend to generally determine the maximum allowed line acquisition rate via the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 234 or the line period CSR see page 249 Bear these restrictions in mind when considering the following example Assume that you are working with an spL4096 70kc Also assume that the camera is set for the Raw line acquisition mode 80 MHz Camera Link clock speed and 8 tap 8 bit video data output mode The AOI starting pixel is set to 1249 AOI length is set to 2400 and the exposure time is set to 4 us The stamp feature is disabled First you must determine the max segment AOI pixels With the current settings 800 AOI pixels would be included in segment 1 and 1600 AOI pixels would be included in segment 2 In this case the max segment AO pixels is 1600 Next use the four formulas to calculate the maximum allowed line rate Formula 1 4 Exposure time in s 0000013 Max Lines s 1 Max Lines S500044 0000013 Max Lines s 188679 Formula 2 i 160000000xn Max Lines S May Seg AOI Pixels 224 Max Lines s 160000000 x 2 1600 224 Max Lines s 175438 Basler sprint Color Cameras 111 Exposure Start and Exposure Time Control AW00069909000 Formula 3 PPR Max Lines s AOI Length p 290000000 Max Lines s 240040 Max Lines s 120833 Formula 4 Max Lines s CL Clk x Taps CL Readout g
157. atus of the hue adjustment for green 0x00 The adjustment is not available 0x01 The adjustment is available and all related settings are OK Field Name Hue Green Value Offset 0x001F Size 1 Byte Type Read Write Description Writing an integer to this field sets the hue value of green for predominantly green colors in the image The hue green value can be set to a minimum of 128 and can be increased to a maximum of 127 If the hue green value is set to a negative number green will be mixed with cyan If the hue green value is set to a positive number green will be mixed with yellow If the hue green value is set to 128 corresponding to a rotation in negative direction by 60 in the color hexagon green will be completely transformed into cyan If the value is set to 127 corresponding to a rotation in positive direction by 60 in the color hexagon green will be completely transformed into yellow If the value is set to 0 green will not be changed See Section 6 6 1 on page 179 for more information about the color adjustment feature Field Name Hue Green Min Offset 0x0020 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description Minimum allowed integer value for the hue green value setting Field Name Hue Green Max Offset 0x0021 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description Maximum allowed integer value for the hue green value setting Field Name Hue Green Increment Offset 0x0022 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description An integer value indicating the i
158. aximum Allowed Line Rate Minimum Line Period 000000 ere 4 3 3 Increasing the Maximum Allowed Line Rate 0 055 4 3 4 Camera Settings for the Maximum Specified Line Rate 5 Video Data Output Modes 00 cece eee eee eee OF OVGOtVIGW cs E eaea a aede CE ECCE E eR a alaaa mrt et San Tea dad RU eee 5 1 1 Setting the Video Data Output Mode llslleeeseesereens 5 2 Video Data Output Mode Details liliis 524 32 Tap Output Modes voee RARE HESPSE RR a tae Wwe RI ES 5 2 2 3 Tap Output Modes 0 ee n 5 2 8 4Tap Output Modes ssueseelseeeeeeeeee nes 5 2 4 6 Tap Output Mode ssssssssleeeee eer 5 2 5 8 Tap Output Mode sssssseeeeeeeee rn 6 Feadlures iueli eec A uk Rau RU rr RR RE eee edhe Eee eee 64 Gain and Offset oclo te eee dee pee baa a Rc ce Oe rete eg Gill Gallix pee E se bx e ees eK X M edu Eos seta 6 1 2 OffSeL c exse 8 Le ne de x ee ete Oodle dias eR S 6 2 White Balances taenia perad o ea e a VANGGGAStLibiinetcbltli e aes 6 2 1 Setting the Additional Color specific Gain llli 0 2 2 Gdn Green2 i seorsum ER VE HEHP bWatPIiaud s ERREUR YES 6 3 Area ot Interest 2 oe ez a e be ee RRA RE eee eee x RR 6 3 1 Settingthe AOI 2 26 6 0c lh hn 6 4 Shading Correction sss b dev e RE Rea seb ce eee 6 4 4 Standard Shading Correction llle 6 4 2 Enhanced Shading Correction ESC For Certain Models
159. ble video data output modes and the bit assignments are explained in detail in Chapter 5 on page 115 The bit assignments comply with the Camera Link standard The tables also show the assignments for the frame valid bit the line valid bit the data valid bit and the pixel clock These assignments are constant for all output modes Basler sprint Color Cameras 37 Physical Interface AW00069909000 2 8 5 Camera Link Pixel Clock As shown in Figure 15 on page 34 the Camera Link clock signal is assigned to the strobe port TxClkIn pin on the X Y and Z Camera Link transmitters as defined in the Camera Link standard The Camera Link clock is used to time the transmission of acquired pixel data The Camera Link clock speed can be set to either 80 MHz or to 40 MHz The default is 40 MHz Lowering the clock speed from 80 MHz to 40 MHz may lower the camera s maximum allowed line rate For more information about calculating the maximum allowed line rate see Section 4 3 on page 106 Note that a change to the Camera Link clock speed is a parameter change and that parameter changes are normally lost when the camera is reset or switched off and back on To avoid this you can make changes to the camera s parameters save the changed parameters to a user set and then activate the user set This will ensure that the changed parameters are saved and are loaded into the camera at reset or power off on Notes Some frame grabbers are not compatibl
160. bon MDR female connectors used to transfer pixel data control data and configuration data The number of MDR connectors present on the camera varies by camera model as shown in Table 4 a 6 pin micro miniature push pull receptacle used to provide power to the camera An LED located on the back of the camera is used to indicate power present and to display the camera s status Figure 13 shows the connectors and the LED for 2k and 4k cameras The connectors and the LED for 8k cameras are analogous Model MDR Connectors Camera Link Configuration SpL2048 39kc MDR Conn 1 only Base SpL2048 70kc spL4096 39kc MDR Conn 1 and MDR Conn 2 Base Medium full spL4096 70kc spL8192 39kc Table 4 MDR Connectors by Camera Model 1 Camera Link medium full Q eit 9 MDR Conn 2 26 Pin Female MDR Connector only present on Camera Link medium full configuration cameras 6 Pin Micro miniature O LED Receptacle 12 VDC Kel NO MDR Conn 1 Q Link 26 Pin Female MDR Connector Camera Link base J present on all cameras J Fig 13 Connectors and LED 2k and 4k Cameras 8k Cameras are Analogous 26 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Physical Interface 2 2 Connector Pin Assignments and Numbering 2 2 1 Pin Assignments for the MDR Connectors The pin assignments for MD
161. bout the assignment of the colors to the individual pixels of the sensor see Section 1 6 on page 20 When the Raw line acquisition mode is active both lines of the sensor are exposed at the same time With each ExSync cycle however the pixel data of only one line are transmitted and therefore two ExSync cycles are required to transmit the pixel data of each exposure D Lines A and B of the sensor are exposed at the same time For complete imaging of the object without overlap make sure to move the image of the object by 20 um between two successive exposures For details of how to relate the extent of the image movement to the extent of the object movement see Section 3 5 3 on page 95 D You can use the Raw Line A First and Raw Line B First line acquisition modes in an alternating fashion when the imaged object moves in opposite directions 50 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Line Acquisition Modes 3 9 4 Raw Line A First Line Acquisition Mode The Raw Line A First line acquisition mode is analogous to the Raw Line B First line acquisition mode see Section 3 3 2 on page 60 with the roles of lines A and B interchanged In the Raw Line A First line acquisition mode the pixel data for line A will be transmitted first followed by the pixel data for line B When using the Raw Line A First line acquisition mode the object being imaged should cross line A first and line B second
162. byte of the lookup table index See Section 6 9 on page 217 for more information about the lookup table feature Field Name Min Offset 0x0003 Size 2 Bytes Type Read only Description Minimum allowed integer value for the index of the currently selected lookup table The 2 bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the min value Byte 2 High byte of the min value Field Name Max Offset 0x0005 Size 2 Bytes Type Read only Description Maximum allowed integer value for the index of the currently selected lookup table The 2 bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the max value Byte 2 High byte of the max value Field Name Increment Offset 0x0007 Size 2 Bytes Type Read only Description An integer value indicating the increment for the index of the currently selected lookup table The 2 bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the increment Byte 2 High byte of the increment Basler sprint Color Cameras 277 Configuring the Camera AW00069909000 Lookup Table Value CSR Register Base Address 0x4111 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Look
163. camera s volatile memory The values in the activated file will automatically be copied into the work set whenever the camera is powered up or reset As an example assume that you have saved a configuration set to the UserSet07 file and that you want to activate this file To do so you would follow this procedure 1 Use a binary write command to write the file name UserSet01 to the Name field of the configu ration set bulk data CSR see page 286 2 Use a binary write command to set the value of the Control field in the configuration set bulk data CSR to 0x05 Setting the value to 0x05 initiates an activate function Basler sprint Color Cameras 281 Configuring the Camera AW00069909000 This procedure would find the UserSet07 file in the non volatile memory and would copy the values in the file into the camera s volatile memory It would also create a link to the file so that the values in the file would be loaded into volatile memory after a reset or a power up If you want to activate the factory set you would following a similar procedure but use FactorySet as the file name Sample code that illustrates how to activate a saved bulk data file is available from Basler see Section 7 4 on page 296 7 2 3 2 Using the Shading Values Bulk Data CSR Activating the User Shading Values File or the Factory Shading Values File The process of activating the user shading value file or the factory shading value file accomplishes tw
164. camera is acquiring the lines it needs to create the DSNU shading values the line valid and data valid signals will go high and low as you would normally expect However the data in these lines is not useful to you and should be ignored Note If you started the generation of the shading values using the CCT you are using an ExSync signal to trigger acquisitions and you are operating the camera at a line period greater than approximately 300 ms you should be aware of a potential problem Under these conditions the CCT may time out while it is waiting for the camera to complete 64 acquisitions and you may see a Camera is not responding error message This error is not fatal to the shading value creation process If you close the error message window wait several seconds and then click the Refresh button on the CCT the shading values will be properly created If you started the generation of the shading values using binary commands you are using an ExSync signal to trigger acquisitions and you are operating the camera at very low line rates you should be aware of a restriction The camera will not acknowledge or respond to binary commands while it is performing the 64 acquisitions needed to create a set of shading values Once you have issued the binary command to start generating shading values you should wait until the generation process is complete before you issue any further binary commands The time needed to complete the g
165. camera s non volatile memory The factory set can not be altered by the user and since it is stored in non volatile memory it is not lost when the camera is reset or switched off The factory configuration set is usually just called the factory set for short and is named FactorySet User Configuration Sets As mentioned above the work configuration set resides in the camera s volatile memory and the parameters settings in the work set are lost if the camera is reset or is switched off The camera can save the parameter settings from the current work set to a file in the camera s non volatile memory Files in the non volatile memory are not lost when the camera is reset or switched off There are four files in the camera s non volatile memory available for holding a saved configuration set A configuration set saved in one of these files is commonly referred to as a user configuration set or user set for short The four files available for holding a saved user configuration set are called UserSet01 UserSet02 UserSet03 and UserSet04 226 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Features Note For the 8k camera only two user sets UserSet01 and UserSet02 are available Note The configuration sets described in this section only include parameter settings and the values stored in the lookup table see Section 6 9 on page 217 Configuration sets do not include the values used for shading correction Values for shading correct
166. cautions AW00069909000 Adjusting the Assembly of Optical Components For a magnification of 1 0 3 the Apo Componon 4 5 90 lens requires a distance of 114 mm between its flange and the CMOS sensor The distance to the CMOS sensor is accounted for by adding the following partial distances 15 mm distance between the CMOS sensor and the flange of the camera s V Basler mount 55 mm extension of the M58 x 0 75 V Basler lens mount 44 mm extension of the UNIFOC 76 helical mount Note When assembled the M39 x 26 tpi adapter is completely included within the UNIFOC 76 helical mount as is part of the Apo Componon lens See also the following figure UNIFOC 76 helical mount M39 x 26 tpi adapter Apo Componon 4 5 90 lens E Z o a d E ale Hs ur E c N z a I L 4 ed p 17 1 44 0 Drawing not to scale min 40 8 max 66 5 Fig 3 Apo Componon Lens M39 x 26 tpi Adapter and UNIFOC 76 Helical Mount Assembled Distances in mm See Also Figure 2 1 Focus the lens on an object placed in front of the lens at the working distance of ca 362 mm Use the helical mount for focussing 10 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 4 Spectral Response The following graphs show the sp
167. ccur An so on Note that the pixel data from line A transmitted on the third ExSync cycle and the pixel data from line B transmitted on the fourth ExSync cycle image the same area of the object And the pixel data from line A transmitted on the fifth ExSync cycle and the pixel data from line B transmitted on the sixth ExSync cycle image the same area of the object and so on For further clarification see Figure 36 through Figure 41 For more information about triggering line acquisition and controlling exposure see Chapter 4 on page 99 mode the pixel data from the first transmitted line A and the pixel data from the After having enabled the Enhanced Raw Line A First B Delayed line acquisition first transmitted line B are not useful To better understand how Enhanced Raw Line A First B Delayed line acquisition mode and object movement relate consider the example that is illustrated in Figure 36 through Figure 39 This example describes Enhanced Raw Line A First B Delayed line acquisition mode when an ExSync signal and the programmable exposure control mode are used The example looks at two contiguous points on an object moving past the camera Each point represents the area on the object that will be captured by each line in the sensor when a line acquisition is performed As you look at the figures notice that on the ExSync cycles where an acquisition is performed line A will capture one point on the ob
168. ce 2 7 Input Signals The camera s input signals include a SerTC signal and an ExSync signal as described below 2 7 1 Serial to Camera The Serial To Camera SerTC input signal is an RS 644 LVDS signal as specified in the Camera Link standard The signal is input to the camera on pins 7 and 20 of MDR connector one as specified in the standard and as shown in Table 5 on page 27 and in Figure 15 on page 34 Signals applied to the SerTC input are used to configure the camera For more detailed information about the serial connection see Section 2 9 on page 39 and Section 7 3 on page 288 2 7 2 External Sync ExSync An external sync ExSync signal can be input into the camera and can be used to control line acquisition and exposure time The ExSync signal is an RS 644 LVDS signal as specified in the Camera Link standard and is usually supplied to the camera by your frame grabber The signal is input to the camera on pins 9 and 22 of MDR connector one as shown in Table 5 on page 27 and in Figure 15 on page 34 When the camera is operating under the control of an ExSync signal three exposure time control modes are available edge controlled level controlled and programmable For more detailed information about exposure control modes see Section 4 1 on page 99 When the camera is operating under the control of an ExSync signal the period of the ExSync signal determines the camera s line rate 1 Line Rate ExSync Signal Period
169. clock speed setting The delays also depend on whether the camera is a 4k or an 8k camera Each delay can vary slightly within the stated minimum and maximum values 2k Cameras Line Valid Frame Valid Delays for 8 Tap Mode 2k Cameras Line Valid Delay for the RGB Line Acquisition Mode 40 MHz Min Max Programmable 3 07 us 3 20 us Edge Controlled Exposure 3 12 us 3 24 us Level Controlled Exposure 3 07 us 3 19 us Frame Valid De lay for the Raw Line Acquisition Mode 40 MHz Min Max Programmable 9 49 us 9 64 us Edge Controlled Exposure 9 49 us 9 64 us Level Controlled Exposure 9 49 us 9 64 us Frame Valid Delay for the Enhanced Raw Line Acquisition Mode 40 MHz Min Max Programmable 9 51 us 9 67 us Edge Controlled Exposure 9 52 us 9 67 us Level Controlled Exposure 9 52 us 9 67 us Table 34 Line Valid Frame Valid Delays with the 2k Camera Set for 8 Tap Video Data Output Mode Basler sprint Color Cameras 151 Video Data Output Modes 4k Cameras AW00069909000 Line Valid Frame Valid Delays for 8 Tap Mode 4k Cameras Line Valid Delay for the RGB Line Acquisition Mode 40 MHz Min Max Programmable 3 10 us 3 23 us Edge Controlled Exposure 3 15 us 3 28 us Level Controlled Exposure 3 10 us 3 23 us Frame Valid Delay for the Raw Line Acquisition Mode 40 MHz Min Max Programmable 9 55 us 9 70 us
170. cquisition modes see Chapter 3 on page 41 for more information about line acquisition modes This means that If you will always be operating the camera in single line acquisition mode you should set the camera for single line acquisition mode and then follow the steps below one time If you will never be operating the camera in single line acquisition mode you should set the camera for any one of the other acquisition modes and then follow the steps below one time If you will sometimes operate the camera in single line acquisition mode and other times operate the camera in one of the other modes you should first set the camera for single line acquisition mode and follow the steps below You should then set the camera for any one of the other acquisition modes and you should go through the steps a second time The camera s user shading values file has one area where it holds the DSNU values it uses for single line mode and another area where it stores the values for all of the other modes To generate a set of user DSNU values 1 Set the camera for the desired line acquisition mode 2 Make sure the area of interest parameters are set so that the camera will use the full length of the sensor see Section 6 3 on page 163 It is possible to generate shading values when the AOI is set to a smaller value than the full length of the sensor In this case only the shading values inside the AOI will be calculated but the full shading fi
171. cquisition modes are described in detail from Section 3 2 on page 42 through Section 3 5 on page 94 To understand the line acquisition modes you must be aware of the architecture of the sensor Refer to Figure 7 on page 15 for 2k and 4k cameras and to Figure 11 on page 19 for 8k cameras When you examine a figure notice that the sensor contains two lines that are adjacent to each other and are oriented along the center line of the camera Also notice that one of the lines is designated as line A and the other is designated as line B See also Section 1 6 on page 20 for an explanation of the color creation You will notice that each individual pixel of the sensor is covered by a filter that allows light of only one color to strike the pixel The pixels of line A are covered by a sequence of alternating red and green filters and the pixels of line B are covered by a sequence of alternating green and blue filters Setting the Camera for the Line Acquisition Mode You can set the camera for the line acquisition mode with the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary write commands from within your own application to set the camera s control and status registers CSRs With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 234 you use the Line Acquisition Mode parameter in the Output Mode parameters group to set the line acquisition mode By Setting CSRs You select the line acquisition mode by writing the appropriate value t
172. cribed in Section 6 7 on page 189 Also if you capture several test images the pixel values Go to the interfacing troubleshooting should be the same in all of the captured test images chart Are the test images OK Use the CCT to activate the factory configuration set and then capture a few normal images Is the problem still present One of the camera s settings was significantly misadjusted Review the camera manual to make sure that you are setting the camera correctly Yes Other image problems Images look noisy Images are too bright or too dark Make sure that the lens cap has been removed Check the lens aperture If the images are too dark try opening the aperture Try closing the aperture if they are too bright Check the exposure time If the images are too dark try increasing the exposure Try decreasing the exposure if they are too bright Check your light source If the images are too dark try increasing your light intensity Try decreasing the intensity if they are too bright Check your gain setting If the images are too dark try increasing the gain Try decreasing the gain if they are too bright Check whether a parameter error has occurred If the images are black make sure all parameters are set within the valid ranges and to valid values Has the problem been corrected l Yes No Exit this chart Make sure that you are using a DC light source
173. cted user set file in the non volatile memory By Setting CSRs You can save the current work set settings to a file in the non volatile memory by writing values to the bulk data CSR for configuration sets Section 7 2 3 on page 280 explains the bulk data CSRs and explains how to use the CSRs to save the work set to a user set file Section 7 3 1 on page 289 explains using read write commands 228 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Features 6 15 2 Activating a User Set File or the Factory Set File As explained on page 226 a factory configuration set containing an optimized set of parameters is created when the camera is manufactured The factory set is saved in a permanent file in the camera s non volatile memory As explained on page 228 you can also save up to four different user configuration sets to files in the camera s non volatile memory Assuming that you have saved one or more user set files you can choose to make one of the saved user set files or the factory set file the activated file When you activate a file two things happen The values from the activated file are immediately copied into the work set in the camera s volatile memory The camera will now actively use the configuration values that were copied into the work set A link is created between the activated file and the camera s volatile memory The values in the activated file will automatically be copied into the work set whenev
174. d settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name High Pixel Threshold Offset 0x0001 Size 2 Bytes Type Read Write Description Writing an integer to this field sets the high pixel threshold for the line stamp feature The set high pixel threshold will apply to all colors When the camera is set for 8 bit output you should set the high pixel threshold within a range from 0 0x0000 to 255 0x00FF When the camera is set for 10 bit output you should set the high pixel threshold within a range from 0 0x0000 to 1023 Ox03FF When the camera is set for 12 bit output you should set the high pixel threshold within a range from 0 0x0000 to 4095 OxOFFF The 2 bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the high pixel threshold Byte 2 High byte of the high pixel threshold See Section 6 8 on page 206 for more information about the line stamp feature and the high pixel threshold Field Name Min Offset 0x0003 Size 2 Bytes Type Read only Description Minimum allowed integer value for the high pixel threshold This field is updated to reflect limitations caused by the way any related features are set The 2 bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the min value Byte 2 High byte of the min value Field Name Max Offset 0x0005 Size 2 Bytes Type Read only Description Maximum allowed integer value for the high pixel threshold This field is
175. dary color ecce 180 sensor CIGANING iiie ettet 24 line location 2k and 4k cameras 15 line location 8k cameras 19 positioning accuracy 2k and 4k cameras 14 315 Index positioning accuracy 8k cameras 18 SIZG o LAM EDAM MS 2 4 5 serial communication 39 serial communication control and status register ssssssss 279 serial number inquiry register 237 serial to camera input signal 35 serial to frame grabber output signal 39 shading correction sssss 166 enhanced ssssssssssese 165 standard i ehe 165 shading mode control and status register 262 shading value generate control and status register ssssss 262 shading values control and status register sssssssssss 287 six tap video data output mode 140 specifications sesssseeeseeess 2 spectral response sseeess 11 stamp see line stamp standard shading correction 165 Status Checks ia mete 225 synchronication signal see ExSync signal 99 T technical support ssssssese 297 temperature n reete ere 21 test image mode control and status register sssssssssss 273 test images
176. dge Controlled Exposure 3 23 us 3 39 us Level Controlled Exposure 3 23 us 3 39 us Line Valid Delay for the RGB Line Acquisition Mode 80 MHz Min Max Programmable 6 45 us 6 55 us Edge Controlled Exposure 6 80 us 6 90 us Level Controlled Exposure 6 45 us 6 55 us Table 25 Line Valid Frame Valid Delays with the 8k Camera Set for 4 Tap Video Data Output Modes 138 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Video Data Output Modes Line Valid Frame Valid Delays for 4 Tap Modes 8k Camera Frame Valid Delay for the Raw Line Acquisition Mode 80 MHz Min Max Programmable 9 47 us 9 59 us Edge Controlled Exposure 9 47 us 9 59 us Level Controlled Exposure 9 47 us 9 59 us Frame Valid Delay for the Enhanced Raw Line Acquisition Mode 80 MHz Min Max Programmable 9 50 us 9 61 us Edge Controlled Exposure 9 50 us 9 61 us Level Controlled Exposure 9 50 us 9 61 us Table 25 Line Valid Frame Valid Delays with the 8k Camera Set for 4 Tap Video Data Output Modes Basler sprint Color Cameras 139 Video Data Output Modes AW00069909000 5 2 4 6 Tap Output Mode 6 Tap 8 Bit Output Mode In 6 tap 8 bit mode on each pixel clock cycle the camera transmits data for six pixels at 8 bit depth a line valid bit and a data valid bit In the 6 tap output mode the camera uses the output ports on Camera Link Transmitters X and Y to transmit pixel data a
177. dicates that a valid line is being transmitted The data valid bit indicates that valid pixel data is being transmitted Pixel data is only valid when the frame valid in the Raw and Enhanced Raw line acquisition modes only line valid and data valid bits are all high 2 Tap 10 Bit Output Mode Operation in 2 tap 10 bit mode is similar to 2 tap 12 bit mode In 10 bit mode however the two least significant bits output from the camera s ADCs are dropped and only the 10 most significant bits of data per pixel are transmitted 2 Tap 8 Bit Output Mode Operation in 2 tap 8 bit mode is similar to 2 tap 12 bit mode In 8 bit mode however the four least significant bits output from the camera s ADCs are dropped and only the 8 most significant bits of data per pixel are transmitted Note The video data output mode that you select may affect the camera s maximum allowed line rate See Section 4 3 on page 106 The data sequence outlined below along with Figure 17 on page 45 Figure 26 on page 57 and Figure 42 on page 79 describes what is happening at the inputs to the Camera Link transmitters in the camera Basler sprint Color Cameras 119 Video Data Output Modes AW00069909000 Video Data Sequence for 2 Tap Output Modes The following assumes that the Raw or Enhanced Raw line acquisition mode is selected where a frame valid signal is transmitted If the RGB line acquisition mode is selected the frame valid signal will not be transm
178. dominantly magenta colors in the image If the saturation magenta value is set to 64 the saturation of magenta will not be changed Setting the value to less than 64 will decrease the saturation If for example the value is set to 32 the saturation of magenta will be halved If the value is set to 0 the saturation of magenta is zero and magenta will not be present the image Setting the value to greater than 64 will increase the saturation If for example the value is set to 128 the saturation of magenta will be doubled See Section 6 6 1 on page 179 for more information about the color adjustment feature Field Name Saturation Magenta Min Offset 0x0039 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description Minimum allowed integer value for the saturation magenta value setting Field Name Saturation Magenta Max Offset 0x003A Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description Maximum allowed integer value for the saturation magenta value setting Field Name Saturation Magenta Increment Offset 0x003B Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description An integer value indicating the increment for the saturation magenta value setting Field Name Hue Magenta Status Offset 0x003C Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of the hue adjustment for magenta 0x00 The adjustment is not available 0x01 The adjustment is available and all related settings are OK Field Name Hue Magenta Value Offset 0
179. e field You will find this to be true for the Exposure Time Line Period Gain and Offset parameters The common characteristic among these parameters is that they are scalar i e they can be set to a value within a continuous scale rather than just a small set of individually defined values Any one of these scalar parameters can be set on a raw scale or on an absolute scale A raw scale is simply a range of integer values that has no defined units An absolute scale is a range of floating point values that has defined units Consider the Gain parameter as an example Setting the Raw Gain If you set the gain by writing a value to the Raw Gain field of the Gain CSR you can write any integer value from 2731 to 16383 decimal Writing an integer value to the raw register sets the gain but it doesn t directly tell you how many dB of gain you will be getting from the camera at that setting To determine the dB of gain you are getting at a particular raw gain setting you must use the formula ettin Gain in dB 20 x log4q Sm 242 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Configuring the Camera Setting the Absolute Gain If you set the gain by writing a value to the Absolute Gain field of the Gain CSR you can write a floating point value from 3 5 to 12 04 decimal in increments of 0 01 Writing a floating point value to the absolute register sets the gain directly in dB For example if the absolute gain field is set to 3 42
180. e 242 explains CSRs and the difference between using the absolute field and the raw field in a CSR Section 7 3 1 on page 289 explains using read write commands 156 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Features 6 1 2 Offset Offset is adjustable on an integer scale that ranges from 4095 to 4095 The default setting is 0 If the camera is set for an 8 bit video data output mode increasing the integer offset setting by 16 will increase the digital pixel values output from the camera by 1 decreasing the integer offset setting by 16 will decrease the digital pixel values output from the camera by 1 If the camera is set for a 10 bit video data output mode increasing the integer offset setting by 4 will increase the digital pixel values output from the camera by 1 decreasing the integer offset setting by 4 will decrease the digital pixel values output from the camera by 1 If the camera is set for a 12 bit video data output mode increasing the integer offset setting by 1 will increase the digital pixel values output from the camera by 1 decreasing the integer offset setting by 1 will decrease the digital pixel values output from the camera by 1 Basler sprint Color Cameras 157 Features AW00069909000 Setting the Offset You can set the offset with the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary write commands from within your own application to set the camera s control and status registers CSRs
181. e 296 Basler sprint Color Cameras 235 Configuring the Camera AW00069909000 7 2 1 Inquiry Registers Inquiry registers contain basic information about the camera and information about the camera s current status Each inquiry register contains one or more fields and each field has an assigned address within the camera s memory space By using a binary read command you can read the data in a field and get information about the camera The address for any field within a register is equal to the register base address plus the offset for the field For example the Vendor Information Inquiry Register see below has a Vendor Name field with an address of 0x0101 the base address of 0x0100 plus an offset of 0x0001 By reading the data at address 0x0101 you can get information about the camera vendor s name The section starting below lists the inquiry registers in the camera and shows detailed information about the use of each field within the registers 7 2 1 1 Inquiry Register Details Vendor Information Inquiry Register Base Address 0x0100 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this inquiry register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available Field Name Vendor Name Offset 0x0001 Size 20 Bytes Type Read only Description String containing the camera vendor s name The string is ze
182. e 6 63 us 6 76 us Edge Controlled Exposure 6 98 us 7 11 us Level Controlled Exposure 6 63 us 6 76 us Frame Valid Delay for the Raw Line Acquisition Mode 40 MHz Min Max Programmable 9 61 us 9 76 us Table 36 Line Valid Frame Valid Delays with the 8k Camera Set for 8 Tap Video Data Output Mode Basler sprint Color Cameras 153 Video Data Output Modes Line Valid Frame Valid Delays for 8 Tap Mode 8k Camera Edge Controlled Exposure 9 61 us 9 76 us Level Controlled Exposure 9 61 us 9 76 us Frame Valid Delay for the Enhanced Raw Line Acquisition Mode 40 MHz Min Max Programmable 9 63 us 9 79 us Edge Controlled Exposure 9 63 us 9 79 us Level Controlled Exposure 9 63 us 9 79 us Line Valid Delay for the RGB Line Acquisition Mode 80 MHz Min Max Programmable 11 11 us 11 21 us Edge Controlled Exposure 11 46 us 11 56 us Level Controlled Exposure 11 11 us 11 21 us Frame Valid Delay for the Raw Line Acquisition Mode 80 MHz Min Max Programmable 12 66 us 12 78 us Edge Controlled Exposur 12 66 us 12 78 us Level Controlled Exposure 12 66 us 12 78 us Frame Valid Delay for the Enhanced Raw Line Acquisition Mode 80 MHz Min Max Programmable 12 68 us 12 80 us Edge Controlled Exposure 12 68 us 12 80 us Level Controlled Exposure 12 68 us 12 80 us AW00069909000 Table 36 Line Valid Frame
183. e A which are transmitted on the next clock cycle In this way pairs of related lines are created with both lines imaging the same area of the object When using the Enhanced Raw Line B First A Delayed line acquisition mode the object being imaged should cross line B first and line A second the image of the object will cross line A first and line B second as is apparent from Figure 44 through Figure 50 After having enabled the Enhanced Raw Line B First A Delayed line acquisition mode the following will occur in a sequence of ExSync cycles The first cycle of the ExSync signal will trigger the start of image acquisition i e exposure on both lines in the sensor The exposure time you are using will apply to both lines time the start of pixel data readout for both lines time the start of transmission of line B pixel data This is data for which no related data from line A will become available The data is therefore not useful The values from line A are held in a buffer in the camera Their output will be delayed until the fourth cycle of the ExSync signal The second cycle of the ExSync signal will time the start of transmission of line A pixel data This is data that was stored before the Enhanced Raw Line B First A Delayed line acquisition mode was enabled The data is therefore not useful No exposure will occur The third cycle of the ExSync signal will trigger the start of image acquisition i e expo
184. e CSR see page 251 See Section 7 2 2 on page 242 for an explanation of CSRs and Section 7 3 1 on page 289 for an explanation of using read write commands Basler sprint Color Cameras 117 Video Data Output Modes AW00069909000 5 2 Video Data Output Mode Details Note The following values for line valid and frame valid delays apply to line acquisitions at full resolution If a shorter AOI is used the values for line valid and frame valid delays may be smaller or larger depending on the size and position of the AOI Note The bit depths of the video data output modes have no effect on the values for line valid and frame valid delays The following delays are given in this section Line valid delays for the RGB line acquisition mode see Figure 17 on page 45 through Figure 21 on page 49 Frame valid delays for the Raw and Enhanced Raw line acquisition modes Figure 26 on page 57 through Figure 28 on page 59 and Figure 42 on page 79 through Figure on page 81 After the frame valid signals the line valid signals will go high with some additional delay The additional delay will be 0 050 us for a Camera Link clock cycle of 40 MHz and 0 025 us for a Camera Link clock cycle of 80 MHz see also the figures referred to above Note When the FVAL Length parameter is set to 0 and the FVAL signal will always stay low the line valid delay will be the sum of the frame valid delay in spite of the frame valid signal staying low
185. e Gain Blue field or by writing an integer value to the Raw Gain Blue field See Section 7 2 2 1 on page 242 for an explanation of the difference between these two fields Register Base Address 0x0ECO Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Absolute Gain Blue Offset 0x0001 Size 4 Bytes Type Read Write Description Writing a floating point value to this field sets the gain in dB The value in this field is a standard IEEE 754 single precision 32 bit floating point number See Section 6 2 on page 159 for more information about gain blue Field Name Absolute Min Offset 0x0005 Size 4 Bytes Type Read only Description Minimum allowed floating point value for the absolute gain blue setting The value in this field is a standard IEEE 754 single precision 32 bit floating point number Field Name Absolute Max Offset 0x0009 Size 4 Bytes Type Read only Description Maximum allowed floating point value for the absolute gain blue setting The value in this field is a standard IEEE 754 single precision 32 bit floating point number Field Name Raw Gain Blue Offset 0x000D Size 2 Bytes Type Read Write Description Writ
186. e Protection The camera s nominal camera power voltage is 12 VDC 10 We do not recommend applying less than 10 8 VDC or greater than 13 2 VDC The camera has camera power undervoltage protection If the camera power voltage is less than but close to 9 8 VDC a camera voltage error may be detected and if the camera voltage decreases further the camera s internal power regulator will automatically disconnect and the camera will no longer operate When the camera power voltage is returned to the normal range the camera will return to normal operation The camera also has camera power overvoltage protection up to 25 VDC If the camera power voltage is between 14 and 18 VDC a camera power voltage error will be detected see Section 6 12 2 on page 224 The LED on the back of the camera will begin to flash red If a camera power voltage between 18 and 25 VDC is applied to the camera the camera s internal power regulator will automatically disconnect and the camera will no longer operate When the camera power voltage is returned to the normal range the camera will return to normal operation Applying a camera power voltage greater than 25 VDC can seriously damage the camera 222 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Features 6 12 Error Condition Detection 6 12 1 Imaging Sensor Overtemperature Condition Detected As described in Section 6 10 on page 221 the camera includes a temperature sensor that is used t
187. e Raw Line B First line acquisition mode the pixel data for line B will be transmitted first followed by the pixel data for line A When using the Raw Line B First line acquisition mode the object being imaged should cross line B first and line A second the image of the object will cross line A first and line B second as is apparent from Figure 29 through Figure 32 After having enabled the Raw Line B First line acquisition mode the following will occur in a sequence of ExSync cycles The first cycle of the ExSync signal will trigger the start of image acquisition i e exposure on both lines in the sensor The exposure time you are using will apply to both lines time the start of pixel data readout for both lines time the start of transmission of line B pixel data The values from line A are held in a buffer in the camera The second cycle of the ExSync signal will time the start of transmission of line A pixel data No exposure will occur The third cycle of the ExSync signal will trigger the start of image acquisition i e exposure on both lines in the sensor The exposure time you are using will apply to both lines time the start of pixel data readout for both lines time the start of transmission of line B pixel data The values from line A are held in a buffer in the camera The fourth cycle of the ExSync signal will time the start of transmission of line A pixel data No exposure will occur And so on Fo
188. e into the User Shading Values File Assume that you want to copy the shading values in the factory shading values file into the user shading values file To do so you would follow this procedure 1 Use a binary write command to write the file name UserShading to the Name field of the shad ing value bulk data CSR see page 287 2 Use a binary write command to set the value of the Control field of the configuration set bulk data CSR to 0x06 Setting the value to 0x06 initiates a copy function 282 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Configuring the Camera This procedure will copy the contents of the factory shading values file into the user shading values file Note that any existing data in the user shading values file will be overwritten Sample code that illustrates how to create a bulk data file is available from Basler seeSection 7 4 on page 296 7 2 3 3 General Procedures for Working with Bulk Data CSRs Enumerating Bulk Data Files Bulk data file enumeration allows you to look through a list of the bulk data files that currently contain saved parameters As an example assume that you want to see a list of all of the configuration set files that currently contains saved parameters To do so you would follow this procedure 1 Use a binary write command to set the value of the Control field in the configuration set bulk data CSR see page 286 to 0x00 Setting the value to 0x00 initiates an enumerate function 2
189. e line B in the sensor first Step 1 Calculate the magnification needed to capture the full conveyor width on a sensor line Sensor Line Length _ 40 96 mm 0 048 Conveyor Width 850 mm 1 B 1 20 83 p is the standard symbol for magnification and is usually expressed as a ratio Step 2 Calculate the conveyor movement necessary to move the image 10 um 10 um x 20 83 0 2083 mm Basler sprint Color Cameras 95 Line Acquisition Modes AW00069909000 Step 3 Calculate the number of encoder steps needed to move the conveyor 0 2083 mm 0 2083 mm 2 31 0 09 mm step ido Since the encoder only counts in whole steps we have two options We can move the conveyor enough to generate 2 encoder steps or we can move the conveyor enough to generate 3 encoder steps In either of these cases the movement of the conveyor will not result in the image moving exactly 10 um Therefore we will need to adjust the magnification so that exactly 10 um of image movement results And we must also consider that a change in magnification will result in a change in the amount of conveyor width that is viewed by each sensor line The calculations below look at the outcomes of our two options Option 1 Calculate the conveyor movement that will generate 2 encoder steps 2 steps x 0 09 mm step 0 18 mm Calculate the magnification needed to make 0 18 mm of conveyor movement result in 10 um movement of the image i0Oum _ 0 18 mm eee 1 0 056
190. e on your PC ee Fig 69 Color Adjustment Parameters in CCT Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Features e Adjust the primary and secondary colors as close as possible to the values of the reference image by adjusting the corresponding saturation and hue color parameter See parameters for the different light sources in Table 42 on page 187 and hue and saturation adjustment in Section 6 6 1 2 on page 181 Each of the six primary and secondary colors can be separately adjusted in the HSB color space Neighboring colors will influence each other e g changes for yellow may also slightly change red and green 14 Save the settings i e with the modified color enhancement parameters to a separate user set If not saved in a separate user set the settings made for color adjustment will be lost when the camera is reset or switched off and back on 6 6 2 2 List of Color Settings for Different Light Sources In Table 42 different possible color and gain settings for three different light sources are displayed Parameter Name in CCT Values Without Tungsten Daylight Daylight Correction 2800 K 5000 K 6500 K Color Adjustment Color Adjustment Enable 0 1 1 1 Saturation Red 64 91 69 70 Hue Red 0 8 15 13 Saturation Yellow 64 139 104 104 Hue Yellow 0 18 4 4 Saturation Green 64 203 152 147 Hue Green 0 127 69 54 Saturation Cyan 64 91 89 91 Hue Cyan 0 115
191. e period can vary depending on the camera model and how the camera is configured You should check the absolute min and absolute max fields of this register to determine the allowed range with the current configuration The increment is 0 1 The value in this field is a standard IEEE 754 single precision 32 bit floating point number See Section 4 2 on page 104 for more information about the line period Field Name Absolute Min Offset 0x0005 Size 4 Bytes Type Read only Description Minimum allowed floating point value for the absolute line period setting This field is updated to reflect limitations caused by the way that any related features are set The value in this field is a standard IEEE 754 single precision 32 bit floating point number Field Name Absolute Max Offset 0x0009 Size 4 Bytes Type Read only Description Maximum allowed floating point value for the absolute line period setting This field is updated to reflect limitations caused by the way that any related features are set The value in this field is a standard IEEE 754 single precision 32 bit floating point number Field Name Raw Line Period Offset 0x000D Size 4 Bytes Type Read Write Description Writing an integer value to this field sets the line period The allowed range for this value can vary depending on the camera model and how the camera is configured You should check the raw min and raw max fields of this register to determine the allo
192. e pixel values of For the RGB line acquisition mode the object being imaged may move in either direction with respect to the sensor The object may cross line A first or line B first When the RGB line acquisition mode is active each time an acquisition is triggered the following will occur The camera will expose line A and line B in the sensor at the same time The exposure time you are using will apply to both lines When exposure is complete the pixel values are read out and processed in the following way to serve as pixel values of virtual pixels see Figure 16 The red value for pixel 1 in line A RA1 will be left unchanged and will be used as the red pixel value of virtual pixel 1 R1 The green value for pixel 2 in line A GA2 and the green value for pixel 1 in line B GB1 will be added and the total will be divided by 2 and rounded up if necessary The averaged green values will be used as the green pixel value of virtual pixel 1 GAV1 The blue value for pixel 2 in line B BB2 will be left unchanged and will be used as the blue pixel value of virtual pixel 1 B1 42 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Line Acquisition Modes The red value for pixel 3 in line A RA3 will be left unchanged and will be used as the red pixel value of virtual pixel 2 R2 The green value for pixel 4 in line A GA4 and the green value for pixel 3 in line B GB3 will be added and the t
193. e power source OK Replace the Replace the camera power source No It is showing a A repeated flashing pattern indicates a problem with the repeated pattern of 9 camera Refer to Section 8 3 on page 298 for information slow orange flashes about using the pattern to determine the problem A camera power undervoltage or overvoltage condition has No It is been detected flashing bns 79 Switch off the power to the camera Make the necessary continuously corrections so that the camera power will meet the requirements outlined in Section 2 5 on page 32 and then No It is An internal overvoltage condition has been detected red Return the camera for repair following the RMA process constantly see also Section 8 3 on page 298 Yes It is flashing orange continuously Call Basler technical support for assistance The contact numbers appear on the front pages of this manual Use a voltmeter to check the power source for the camera The output must be 12 VDC 1 2 V Also make sure that the power No Replace the power source Source meets the other specs shown in Section 2 5 on page 32 Is the power source OK Yes Basler sprint Color Cameras 301 Troubleshooting and Support Check to make sure that the RS 644 serial connection see Section 2 9 on page 39 is working correctly You can do this by starting the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT When you start t
194. e with an 80 MHz pixel clock speed Refer to the documentation for your frame grabber to determine if it is compatible Setting the Camera Link Clock Speed You can set the clock speed with the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary write commands from within your own application to set the camera s control and status registers CSRs With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 234 you use the Camera Link Clock parameter in the Output Mode parameters group to set the clock speed By Setting CSRs You set the clock speed by writing a value to the Clock Speed field of the Camera Link Clock Speed CSR see page 243 See Section 7 2 2 on page 242 for an explanation of CSRs and Section 7 3 1 on page 289 for an explanation of using read write commands 38 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Physical Interface 2 8 6 Serial to Frame Grabber The Serial To Frame Grabber SerTFG output signal is an RS 644 LVDS signal as specified in the Camera Link standard The signal is output from the camera on pins 8 and 21 of MDR connector one as specified in the standard and as shown in Table 5 on page 27 and in Figure 15 on page 34 Signals from the SerTFG output are used during camera configuration For more detailed information about the serial connection see Section 2 9 on page 39 and Section 7 3 on page 288 2 9 RS 644 Serial Communication The camera is equipped for RS 644 serial communication via a serial
195. ease the maximum line rate yielded by formula two If you are using a camera that has two sensor segments and the AOI is positioned so that many pixels in the AOI fall into one sensor segment and few pixels fall into the other you can try re positioning your AOI The Max Seg AOI Pixels will be smallest when the AOI is evenly divided across the two segments i e each segment contains the same number of AOI pixels If you find that formula three pixel processing rate is the most restrictive factor you can decrease the AOI length Decreasing the AOI length will increase the maximum line rate yielded by formula three Formula four transmission time will not normally be a restricting factor But if you are using a 2 tap or a 4 tap video data output mode you may find that the transmission time is restricting the line rate In this situation you may be able to switch to an output mode that uses a larger number of taps Using a larger number of taps will reduce the time it takes to transmit the pixel data and will increase the maximum line rate yielded by formula four You may be able to decrease the transmission time by selecting a higher Camera Link clock speed if available Basler sprint Color Cameras 113 Exposure Start and Exposure Time Control AW00069909000 4 3 4 Camera Settings for the Maximum Specified Line Rate You can obtain the camera s maximum specified line rate by combining the appropriate settings for the following parame
196. eck the power source for the camera The output must be 12 VDC 1 2 V Also make sure that the power source meets the other specs shown N Replace the in Section 2 5 on page 32 De power source Is the power source OK Yes Make sure that the cable connected to MDR Connector 1 on the camera see Figure 13 on page 26 is also connected to the base Camera Link connector on your frame grabber And make sure that the cable connected to MDR Connector 2 on the camera T is connected to the medium full Camera Link connector on your frame grabber Reseat No Exit this the cable connections at the camera and the frame grabber chart After you checked and reseated the connections is the problem still present Yes Check all of the cables in the system Check Section 2 4 on page 31 and make sure that you are using a cable that has the right characteristics and is not too long It is extremely important to use the proper cables P when you are working with Camera Link based cameras No Exit this chart Use an ohm meter to check each wire to see of it is broken or shorted to any of the other wires in the cable After you checked the cables is the problem still present Yes only one piece of hardware at a time and retry the system after each substitution If extra hardware is available try to locate the problem by substitution Substitute N Exit this o chart After you finished making substitutions is the problem s
197. ected the gray scale gradient ranges from 0 to 255 and repeats every 512 pixels as shown in Figure 80 The odd lines in the test image refer to the sensor lines transmitted first by the selected line acquisition mode and the even lines refer to the sensor lines transmitted second see Section 1 6 on page 20 In Raw Line A First and Enhanced Raw Line A First line acquisition mode line A is transmitted first and line B second Accordingly the odd lines in the test image refer to lines A and the even lines refer to lines B In Raw Line B First and Enhanced Raw Line B First line acquisition mode line B is transmitted first and line A second Accordingly the odd lines in the test image refer to lines B and the even lines refer to lines A In Raw Line A First and Enhanced Raw Line A First line acquisition mode the gray scale gradient is restricted to the odd lines while the even lines stay black In Raw Line B First and Enhanced Raw Line B First line acquisition mode the gray scale gradient is restricted to the even lines while the odd lines stay black The lines of the test image for e g 8 bit output modes and Raw Line A First or Enhanced Raw Line A First line acquisition mode are generated in the following way see also Figure 79 left On the first cycle of the ExSync signal or the camera s internal control signal the pixel values refer to line A The first pixel has a red value RA of 0 the second pixel has a gree
198. ectral response for color cameras Note The spectral response curves exclude lens characteristics and light source characteristics To obtain best performance from color models of the camera use of a dielectric IR cut filter is recommended The filter should transmit in a range from 400 nm to 650 nm and it should cut off from 650 680 nm to at least 1100 nm Red Green Line A Green Line B Blue Quantum Efficiency 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 Wavelength nm Fig 4 Camera Spectral Response Basler sprint Color Cameras 11 Specifications Requirements and Precautions AW00069909000 1 5 Mechanical Specifications 1 5 14 Camera Dimensions and Mounting Points for 2k and 4k Cameras The cameras are manufactured with high precision Planar parallel and angular sides guarantee precise mounting with high repeatability The camera s dimensions in millimeters are as shown in Figure 5 on page 13 Camera housings are equipped with four mounting holes on the front and two mounting holes on the sides as shown in the drawings 12 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions
199. ed Raw line acquisition modes only 134 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Video Data Output Modes MDR Conn 2 Transmitter Y Port Camera Frame Bit Assignment Grabber 4 Tap 12 Bit 4 Tap 10 Bit 4 Tap 8 Bit Port DO TxINO RxOutO D3 Bit 0 D3 Bit 0 D3 Bit 0 Port D1 TxIN1 RxOut1 D3 Bit 1 D3 Bit 1 D3 Bit 1 Port D2 TxIN2 RxOut2 D3 Bit 2 D3 Bit 2 D3 Bit 2 Port D3 TxIN3 RxOut3 D3 Bit 3 D3 Bit 3 D3 Bit 3 Port D4 TxIN4 RxOut4 D3 Bit 4 D3 Bit 4 D3 Bit 4 Port D5 TxIN6 RxOut6 D3 Bit 5 D3 Bit 5 D3 Bit 5 Port D6 TxIN27 RxOut27 D3 Bit 6 D3 Bit 6 D3 Bit 6 Port D7 TxIN5 RxOut5 D3 Bit 7 D3 Bit 7 D3 Bit 7 MSB Port EO TxIN7 RxOut7 D2 Bit 0 D2 Bit 0 Not used Port E1 TxIN8 RxOut8 D2 Bit 1 D2 Bit 1 Not used Port E2 TxIN9 RxOut9 D2 Bit 2 D2 Bit 2 Not used Port E3 TxIN12 RxOut12 D2 Bit 3 D2 Bit 3 Not used Port E4 TxIN13 RxOut13 D2 Bit 4 D2 Bit 4 Not used Port E5 TxIN14 RxOut14 D2 Bit 5 D2 Bit 5 Not used Port E6 TxIN10 RxOut10 D2 Bit 6 D2 Bit 6 Not used Port E7 TxIN11 RxOut11 D2 Bit 7 D2 Bit 7 Not used Port FO TxIN15 RxOut15 D2 Bit 8 D2 Bit 8 Not used Port F1 TxIN18 RxOut18 D2 Bit 9 D2 Bit 9 MSB Not used Port F2 TxIN19 RxOut19 D2 Bit 10 Not used Not used Port F3 TxIN20 RxOut20 D2 Bit 11 MSB Not used Not used Port F4 TxIN21 RxOut21 D3 Bit 8 D3 Bit 8 Not used Port F5 TxIN22 RxOut22 D3 Bit 9 D3 Bit 9 MSB Not used Port F6 TxIN16
200. eeesssss 37 line valid delay 45 151 lookup table seins 217 lookup table index control and status register za favet e 277 lookup table mode control and status OGISION xiaactatexcibcmmt aede 276 lookup table selector control and status Teglst r nene ree 276 lookup table value control and status register mo 278 low line rate compensation 102 control and status register 245 M maximum allowed line rate 106 maximum specified line rate 114 medium full Camera Link Configuration s cire eie ta 26 33 model info inquiry register 236 mounting holes 2k and 4k cameras 12 8k cameras seseseeenee 16 O Offset 157 offset control and status register 252 operating recommendations 94 output signals Camera Link clock 38 data Valid bit itii 37 EXSYNC treed etn dein ro 99 frame valid bit ssus 36 line valid bit eienn se 37 pixel data bits sesseesssss 37 serial to frame garbber 39 overtemperature seseess 223 over triggering eeeeneeee 101 overvoltage protection 222 Basler sprint Color Cameras Index P parameter error sss 239 303 para
201. els llle 2 1 2 2 Camera Models with 4k Pixels llle 4 1 28 Camera Model with 8k Pixels llle eee 5 1 3 Lens Adapters ee oe eee eR cR eme ee ee ee a eee 6 1 3 4 Lens Adapters for 2k and 4k Cameras 00 0c eee eee 6 1 3 2 Lens Adapters for the 8k Camera 000 ccc eee tee 6 1 3 2 1 Adapting with the UNIFOC 100 95 V Basler Helical Mount 7 1 3 2 2 Adapting with the M58 x 0 75 V Basler Lens Mount 9 1 4 Spectral Response 0 ee ern 11 1 5 Mechanical Specifications lile 12 1 5 1 Camera Dimensions and Mounting Points for 2k and 4k Cameras 1 n 12 1 5 2 Sensor Positioning Accuracy for 2k and 4k Cameras Cs anser panies eed ss Eire E ber d nese x IOS DUI ODE nd 14 1 5 3 Sensor Line Location for 2k and 4k Cameras 00 0000 eee ee 15 1 5 4 F mount Adapter Dimensions 2k and 4k Cameras 0 00 re 16 1 5 5 Camera Dimensions and Mounting Points for 8k Cameras 16 1 5 6 Sensor Positioning Accuracy for 8k Cameras 000 0c eee eee 18 1 5 7 Sensor Line Location for 8k Cameras 0 0 00 c eee ee 19 16 gt Color Greation iu sels gms mne RE eR RR ae e a RR s 20 1 7 Environmental Requirements 0 0 00 cette ee 21 1 7 1 Temperature and Humidity llle 21 1 7 2 HeatDissipation rs oi srira dni I RR ERREUR REOR RR 21 1 8 Preca utionS sss rr xooeg o ke Iw REOR Ra add woe on X kt wg 22 2 Physica
202. eneration process will be equal to 64 times the line period 7 Once 64 acquisitions have been completed the camera calculates the DSNU values a The camera uses the data from the 64 acquisitions to calculate an average gray value for the pixels in each line b The camera finds the pixel with the highest average gray value in each line c For each of the other pixels in the line the camera determines the offset that would be needed to make the pixel s average value equal to the average value for the highest pixel d The camera generates a set of DSNU shading values that contains the calculated offsets 8 The generated set of DSNU values is automatically saved in the user shading values file in the camera s non volatile memory Existing values in the file will be overwritten Basler sprint Color Cameras 169 Features AW00069909000 9 The user shading value file is automatically activated See Section 6 4 6 on page 173 for more information about what it means to activate a shading file Generating and Saving User PRNU Shading Correction Values The procedure below describes how to generate user PRNU shading correction values When you generate the values they will automatically be stored in the camera s user shading value file You should be aware that the camera uses one set of PRNU values when it is operating in single line acquisition mode and a different set of values when it is operating in any one of the other line acq
203. ensor Line Location for 2k and 4k Cameras The location of the lines on the sensor chip is as shown in the drawing below SE Camera Link medium full oO efc 3J e et Je 9 Camera Link base l J Sensor lines Line B pixel 1 Line A pixel 1 gt reference plane Tolerances are typical Drawings are not to scale Fig 7 Sensor Line Location 2k and 4k Cameras Basler sprint Color Cameras 15 Specifications Requirements and Precautions AW00069909000 1 5 4 F mount Adapter Dimensions 2k and 4k Cameras 31 5 H ly J Tle i i tle FRAN Photosensitive surface 46 5 E of the CMOS sensor Drawing is not to scale Fig 8 Camera with F mount Adapter Attached in mm 2k and 4k Cameras 1 5 5 Camera Dimensions and Mounting Points for 8k Cameras The cameras are manufactured with high precision Planar parallel and angular sides guarantee precise mounting with high repeatability The camera s dimensions in millimeters are as shown in Figure 5 on page 13 Camera housings are equipped with four mounting holes on t
204. ep 4 Make corrections as required 6 Begin acquiring lines either by generating an ExSync signal to trigger line capture or by setting the camera for a free run exposure time control mode Note When you generate the PRNU values in the step below you will have two options 1 You can generate the PRNU values without using DSNU shading correction If you do this the pixel values used to calculate the PRNU correction values will not be corrected for DSNU 2 You can generate the PRNU values with using DSNU shading correction If you do this the pixel values used to calculate the PRNU correction values will be corrected for DSNU For this option to work correctly you must have already generated DSNU values before you generate the PRNU values For optimum correction results we strongly recommend to generate both DSNU and PRNU shading correction values 7 Signal the camera to generate a set of PRNU values a You can start the generation of a set of PRNU values with the Camera Configuration Tool Plus see Section 7 1 on page 234 With the CCT set the value of the Generate parameter in the DSNU amp PRNU Shading Correction parameters group to Generate PRNU Values or to Generate PRNU Values with DSNU b You can also start the generation of a set of PRNU values by using a binary write command see Section 7 3 on page 288 to write a value to the Generate field of the Shading Value Generate CSR see page 262 8 The camera must
205. equirements 2 4 1 Camera Link Cable The Mini D Ribbon MDR cables used between the camera and your frame grabber must comply with the Camera Link cable specification specified in the Camera Link Standard Compliant MDR cable assemblies in several different lengths are available from Basler as stock items Contact your Basler sales representative for more information The maximum allowed length for the MDR cable used with a sprint camera is 10 meters Note Generally Camera Link cables of up to 10 m length can be used for Camera Link cameras However when operating cameras at pixel clock speeds of 80 MHz we strongly recommend to use shorter cables to ensure the integrity of data transmission e g 6 m cables Keep in mind that the maximum cable length not only depends on the Camera Link clock speed but also on other factors e g on the capabilities of the frame grabber and on the harshness of the electromagnetic environment 2 4 2 Power Cable A Hirose 6 pin locking plug will be shipped with each camera This plug should be used to connect the output cable on your power supply to the camera For proper EMI protection the power supply cable that is terminated with the Hirose connector and attached to the camera must be a twin cored shielded cable Also the Hirose plug must be connected to the cable shield and the shield must be connected to earth ground at the power supply An Incorrect Plug Can Damage the Camera s 6 pi
206. er all of the pixel data for the line has been transmitted the line valid and data valid bits both become low indicating that valid pixel data is no longer being transmitted Figure 20 on page 48 shows the data sequence when the camera is operating in edge controlled or level controlled exposure mode or in programmable exposure mode Basler sprint Color Cameras 141 Video Data Output Modes MDR Conn 1 Transmitter X Port Camera Frame Bit Assignment Grabber 6 Tap 8 Bit Port AO TxINO RxOutO DO Bit 0 Port A1 TxIN1 RxOut1 DO Bit 1 Port A2 TxIN2 RxOut2 DO Bit 2 Port A3 TxIN3 RxOut3 DO Bit 3 Port A4 TxIN4 RxOut4 DO Bit 4 Port A5 TxING RxOut6 DO Bit 5 Port A6 TxIN27 RxOut27 DO Bit 6 Port A7 TxIN5 RxOut5 DO Bit 7 MSB Port BO TxIN7 RxOut7 D1 Bit 0 Port B1 TxIN8 RxOut8 D1 Bit 1 Port B2 TxIN9 RxOut9 D1 Bit2 Port B3 TxIN12 RxOut12 D1 Bit 3 Port B4 TxIN13 RxOut13 D1 Bit4 Port B5 TxIN14 RxOut14 D1 Bit 5 Port B6 TxIN10 RxOut10 D1 Bit 6 Port B7 TxIN11 RxOut11 D1 Bit 7 MSB Port CO TxIN15 RxOut15 D2 Bit 0 Port C1 TxIN18 RxOut18 D2 Bit 1 Port C2 TxIN19 RxOut19 D2 Bit 2 Port C3 TxIN20 RxOut20 D2 Bit 3 Port C4 TxIN21 RxOut21 D2 Bit 4 Port C5 TxIN22 RxOut22 D2 Bit 5 Port C6 TxIN16 RxOut16 D2 Bit 6 Port C7 TxIN17 RxOut17 D2 Bit 7 MSB LVAL TxIN24 RxOut24 Line Valid FVAL TxIN25 RxOut25 Not Used DVAL TxIN26 RxOut26 Data Valid Spare TxIN23
207. er segments will yield the best results from formula two Note We recommend using an AOI that is centered on the sensor When an AOI is centered on the sensor the number of pixels outside of the AOI will be the same on both sides of the AOI If an AOI is not centered the maximum allowed line acquisition rate may be lower than suggested by the formulas given above If you are using an AOI that is not centered determine the maximum allowed line acquisition rate via the CCT or the Line Period CSR Check the Line Period parameter in the Exposure parameter group of the CCT or check the absolute min field of the Line Period CSR see page 249 and use the line period value to calculate the maximum allowed line acquisition rate Knowing the maximum allowed line acquisition rate or the minimum line period will be particularly important when you want to operate the camera under the control of an external sync signal see page 35 Check the line period value before setting the camera to operate under the control of an external sync signal Otherwise the line period value will not be indicated 110 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Exposure Start and Exposure Time Control 4 3 2 Example of Calculating the Maximum Allowed Line Rate Minimum Line Period Note The above formulas for determining the maximum allowed line rate will apply to most camera settings For some camera settings however the maximum allowed line acquisition r
208. er the camera is powered up or reset Assume for example that the UserSet01 file is the activated file In this case when the camera is powered on or reset the values from the UserSet01 file will be copied into the volatile memory of the camera and will be the actively used parameter settings You can activate a saved user set file or the factory set file by using the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary read write commands from within your own application to set the camera s bulk data control and status registers CSRs With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 234 you use the File Name Select parameter and the Activate button in the User Set Files parameters group to activate a saved user set file or the factory set file By Setting CSRs You can activate a saved user set file or the factory set file by writing values to the bulk data CSR for configuration sets The bulk data activate process is used to activate a stored file Section 7 2 3 on page 280 explains bulk data CSRs and using the bulk data activate process Section 7 3 1 on page 289 explains using read write commands Basler sprint Color Cameras 229 Features AW00069909000 6 15 3 Which Configuration Set File Will Load at Startup or at Reset On the initial wake up after delivery the camera loads the factory configuration set into the work set At each subsequent power on or reset the configuration set file that was last activated is
209. era link clock speed setting The delays also depend on whether the camera is a 2k 4k or 8k camera Each delay can vary slightly within the stated minimum and maximum values 2k Cameras Line Valid Delays for 3 Tap Modes 2k Cameras Line Valid Delay for the RGB Line Acquisition Mode 40 MHz Min Max Programmable 3 08 us 3 20 us Edge Controlled Exposure 3 13 us 3 25 us Level Controlled Exposure 3 08 us 3 20 us Line Valid Delay for the RGB Line Acquisition Mode 80 MHz Min Max Programmable 2 91 us 3 01 us Edge Controlled Exposure 2 96 us 3 04 us Level Controlled Exposure 2 91 us 3 01 us Table 18 Line Valid Delays with the 2k Camera Set for 3 Tap Video Data Output Modes 130 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 4k Cameras Video Data Output Modes Line Valid Delays for 3 Tap Modes 4k Cameras Line Valid Delay for the RGB Line Acquisition Mode 40 MHz Min Max Programmable 3 10 us 3 23 us Edge Controlled Exposure 3 15 us 3 28 us Level Controlled Exposure 3 10 us 3 23 us Line Valid Delay for the RGB Line Acquisition Mode 80 MHz Min Max Programmable 2 94 us 3 04 us Edge Controlled Exposure 2 99 us 3 09 us Level Controlled Exposure 2 94 us 3 04 us Table 19 Line Valid Delays with the 4k Camera Set for 3 Tap Video Data Output Modes 8k Camera Line Valid Delays for 3 Tap Modes 8k Camera
210. eras AW00069909000 Configuring the Camera Serial Communication CSR An RS 644 serial connection is integrated into the Camera Link interface between the frame grabber installed in your computer and the camera The serial connection is used to issue commands to the camera for changing modes and parameters You can use the serial communication CSR to set the bitrate for the camera s RS 644 serial port The default setting is 9600 bps The setting is changed immediately after the successful receipt of this command Register Base Address 0x0D00 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Bitrate Offset 0x0001 Size 1 Byte Type Read Write Description Writing an integer to this field sets the bit rate OxOF 9600 bps default 0x11 19200 bps 0x12 38400 bps 0x13 57600 bps 0x14 115200 bps See Section 2 9 1 on page 39 and Section 7 3 on page 288 for more information about serial communication Note When changing a setting for serial communication use the following procedure 1 Issue the write command with the new setting 2 Wait one second 3 Change the setting on the frame grabber s RS 644 serial port 4
211. ers and control how the camera s features will operate There are three types of registers in the camera Inquiry Registers these registers provide basic information about the camera Section 7 2 1 on page 236 explains inquiry registers in more detail lists the inquiry registers in the camera and describes the function of each register Feature Control and Status Registers these registers let you set the parameters associated with the camera s features Section 7 2 2 on page 242 explains feature control and status registers in more detail lists the feature control and status registers in the camera and describes the function of each register Bulk Data Control and Status Registers these registers let you store and recall sets of values that the camera uses as a group Section 7 2 3 on page 280 explains bulk data and the bulk data control and status registers in more detail It also lists the bulk data registers in the camera and describes the function of each register A special binary read write command protocol is used to read from and write to the registers in the camera Read and write commands are sent to the camera via the RS 644 serial link between the camera and the frame grabber Section 7 3 1 on page 289 describes the binary read write command protocol in detail and also provides information about using the serial link Sample code that illustrates how to use the read write commands is available from Basler see Section 7 4 on pag
212. es a line with the camera viewing a uniform light colored target in bright light all of the pixel values in the line should be near their maximum gray value and they should be equal In practice slight variations in the performance of the pixels in the sensor variations in the optics and variations in the lighting will cause some variation in the pixel values output from the camera This type of variation is know as Photo Response Non uniformity PRNU The PRNU shading correction feature on the camera can correct for the variations caused by PRNU The Factory Shading Value File and the User Shading Value File To perform DSNU and PRNU shading correction the camera needs a set of DSNU and PRNU shading correction values The camera has two files in its nonvolatile memory where it stores the values that it needs to perform shading correction 166 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Features The first shading values file is called the factory shading file This file contains a complete collection of the values needed to perform both DSNU shading correction and PRNU shading correction The values in this file are generated during the camera s factory setup procedure and they essentially serve as default shading values The values in the factory file are optimized for performing shading correction with standard optics and lighting Using the factory settings will give you reasonable DSNU and PRNU shading correction performance in most s
213. es the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Absolute Exposure Time Offset 0x0001 Size 4 Bytes Type Read Write Description Writing a floating point value to this field sets the exposure time in us For example if the value in this field is set to 5 2 the exposure time will be 5 2 us The allowed range for the exposure time can vary depending on the camera model and how the camera is configured You should check the absolute min and absolute max fields of this register to determine the allowed range with the current configuration The increment is 0 1 The value in this field is a standard IEEE 754 single precision 32 bit floating point number See Chapter 4 on page 99 for more information about exposure time Field Name Absolute Min Offset 0x0005 Size 4 Bytes Type Read only Description Minimum allowed floating point value for the absolute exposure time setting This field is updated to reflect limitations caused by the way that any related features are set The value in this field is a standard IEEE 754 single precision 32 bit floating point number Field Name Absolute Max Offset 0x0009 Size 4 Bytes Type Read only Description Maximum allowed floating point value for the absolute exposure time setting This field is updated to reflect limitation
214. especially useful for service purposes and for failure diagnostics In test mode the image is generated with a software program and the camera s digital devices and does not use the optics imaging sensor or ADCs Nonetheless the test image generation takes account of the fact that the sensor includes two different pixel lines providing either red and green or green and blue pixel values Guidelines When Using Test Images When using a test image take the following guidelines into account If the camera is set for an exposure mode that uses an ExSync signal the ExSync signal must be present and must toggle in order to output a line on the test image Multiple transitions of the ExSync signal will produce a two dimensional image as shown e g in Figure 72 on page 192 or Figure 78 on page 197 If the camera is set for free run each cycle of the camera s internal control signal will trigger the output of a line on the test image The length of the exposure time has no effect on test images The detailed descriptions of the test patterns assume that the AOI feature is set to use the full area of the sensor The test images will look different depending on the line acquisition mode Test images generated with the RGB line acquisition mode see Section 3 2 on page 42 will include RGB pixel values of virtual pixels Note The test images presented here for the RGB line acquisition mode assume that a 3 tap or 6 tap output m
215. est Starting Pixel CSR Register Base Address 0x1000 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Starting Pixel Offset 0x0001 Size 2 Bytes Type Read Write Description Writing an integer to this field sets the starting pixel for the area of interest AOI feature The area of interest starting pixel can be set to a minimum of 1 If the RGB line acquisition mode is selected the area of interest starting pixel can be set in increments of 16 If the Raw line acquisition mode or the Enhanced Raw line acquisition mode is selected the area of interest starting pixel can be set in increments of 32 If the value for the area of interest starting pixel is set to 1 the starting pixel for the AOI will be 1 If the value is set to 33 the starting pixel for the AOI will be 33 And so on The allowed range for this value can vary depending on how the area of interest length parameter is set You should check the raw min and raw max fields of this register to determine the allowed range with the current configuration The 2 bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the starting pixel value Byte 2 High byte of the st
216. est image is formed with a fixed horizontal gray scale gradient derived from all green pixels When e g an 8 bit output mode is selected the gray scale gradient ranges from 0 to 255 and repeats every 512 pixels as shown in Figure 83 The odd lines in the test image refer to the sensor lines transmitted first by the selected line acquisition mode and the even lines refer to the sensor lines transmitted second see Section 1 6 on page 20 In Raw Line A First and Enhanced Raw Line A First line acquisition mode line A is transmitted first and line B second Accordingly the odd lines in the test image refer to lines A and the even lines refer to lines B In Raw Line B First and Enhanced Raw Line B First line acquisition mode line B is transmitted first and line A second Accordingly the odd lines in the test image refer to lines B and the even lines refer to lines A The lines of the test image for e g 8 bit output modes and Raw Line A First or Enhanced Raw Line A First line acquisition mode are generated in the following way see also Figure 82 left On the first cycle of the ExSync signal or the camera s internal control signal the pixel values refer to line A The first pixel has a red value RA of 0 the second pixel has a green value GA of 0 the third pixel has a red value of 0 the fourth pixel has a green value of 1 the fifth pixel has a red value of 0 the sixth pixel has a green value of 2 and so on On the
217. etect the characteristics of the serial port on the frame grabber and will determine the appropriate settings so that the tool can open and use the port Note In order for the CCT to detect and use the port the characteristics of the port must comply with the Camera Link standard and the clser dll called for in the standard must be present When the camera is powered on or when a camera reset is performed your PC may receive one random character on the serial interface We recommend clearing the serial input buffers in your PC after a camera power on or reset If you are configuring the camera using binary commands from within your application software your software must be able to access the frame grabber serial port and to determine the appropriate settings so that it can open and use the port Consult your frame grabber s documentation to determine the port access method and the port characteristics 40 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Line Acquisition Modes 3 Line Acquisition Modes 3 1 Introduction Several different methods can be used to acquire capture lines with the sensor in the camera Each of these different methods is referred to as a line acquisition mode The line acquisition modes include RGB Raw Line A First B Delayed Raw Line B First A Delayed 2k and 4k cameras only Enhanced Raw Line A First B Delayed Enhanced Raw Line B First A Delayed 2k and 4k cameras only The line a
218. f Test Image Seven Generated with RGB Line Acquisition Mode 196 Basler sprint Color Cameras AWO00069909000 Features 255 Gray Level 1 256 512 768 1024 1280 1536 1792 2048 Pixel Number Fig 77 Formation of Test Image Seven for 8 bit Output Modes Generated with RGB Line Acquisition Mode on a Camera with 4096 Pixels Per Line 2048 Virtual Pixels Fig 78 Test Image Seven for 8 bit Output Modes Generated with RGB Line Acquisition Mode on a Camera with 4096 Pixels Per Line 2048 Virtual Pixels Test image two is useful for checking the integrity of the data transmitted by the camera If you capture lines and examine the pixel values in the captured lines the values should be exactly as described above Note When the camera is set for an 8 bit output mode the pixel values in test image seven range from 0 to 255 as described above If the camera is set for a 10 bit output the pixel values will range from 0 to 1023 If the camera is set for a 12 bit output the pixel values will range from 0 to 4095 Basler sprint Color Cameras 197 Features AW00069909000 6 7 2 2 Test Image Seven Generated with the Raw and Enhanced Raw Line Acquisition Modes When the camera is set for a Raw or Enhanced Raw line acquisition mode see Section 3 3 on page 50 and Section 3 4 on page 69 and test image seven a test image is formed with a fixed horizontal gray scale gradient derived from the red pixels When e g an 8 bit output mode is sel
219. follows 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 OpCode BCC AddrLen Code The MSB of the FTF field is on the left highest bit of the opcode and the LSB of the field is on the right lowest bit of the address length Basler sprint Color Cameras 289 Configuring the Camera AW00069909000 290 The value in the OpCode portion of the FTF field defines the function of the binary command that is whether it is a read command or a write command The following OpCodes are available OpCode Function 0b00000 This is a write command used to write a single setting to the camera 0b00001 This is a read command used to read a single setting from the camera 0b00010 This is a read response frame without an address field The AddrLen bits are don t care 0b00100 This is a bulk write command used to upload a file into the camera 0500101 This is a bulk read command used to download a file from the camera 0500110 This is a bulk read response frame without an address field The AddrLen bits are don t care The BCC Code portion of the FTF field indicates the presence of a Block Check Character BCC The use of a BCC is optional BCC Code Function ObO This frame and also the response frame contains no BCC field 0b1 This frame and also the response frame contains a BCC field The AddrLen portion of the FTF field indicates the size of the command and stat
220. for read commands 0 bytes Size for write commands the number of bytes indicated in the DataLen field of the frame Block Check Character field The use of a block check character in read write commands is optional If bit 2 of the FTF field is 0 the BCC is not used and the BCC field will contain no data If bit 2 of the FTF field is 1 the BCC field will contain the block check character Size 0 bytes if bit 2 of the FTF field is 0 1 byte if bit 2 of the FTF field is 1 The block check character is the exclusive or sum XOR sum of the bytes in the FTF DataLen Address and Data fields see Section 7 3 2 3 on page 295 Binary Frame End field Identifies the end of a binary frame Size 1 byte The value of the BFE byte is always 0x03 ACK NAK Response Positive frame acknowledge negative frame acknowledge D Size 1 byte The value for a positive frame acknowledgement ACK is 0x06 and for a negative frame acknowledgement NAK is 0x15 Note All values are formatted as little endian Intel format Basler sprint Color Cameras 291 Configuring the Camera AW00069909000 7 3 1 1 Error Checking and Responses ACK NAK When the camera receives a frame it checks to see if the order of the bytes in the frame is correct If the FTF field indicates that the frame includes a BCC the camera checks to see if the XOR sum of the relevant frame fields matches the block check character The camera also checks to see if the number
221. g the Camera Gain CSR Note The gain can be set by writing a floating point value to the Absolute Gain field or by writing an integer value to the Raw Gain field See Section 7 2 2 1 on page 242 for an explanation of the difference between these two fields Register Base Address 0x0E00 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Absolute Gain Offset 0x0001 Size 4 Bytes Type Read Write Description Writing a floating point value to this field sets the gain in dB The value in this field is a standard IEEE 754 single precision 32 bit floating point number See Section 6 1 on page 155 for more information about gain Field Name Absolute Min Offset 0x0005 Size 4 Bytes Type Read only Description Minimum allowed floating point value for the absolute gain setting The value in this field is a standard IEEE 754 single precision 32 bit floating point number Field Name Absolute Max Offset 0x0009 Size 4 Bytes Type Read only Description Maximum allowed floating point value for the absolute gain setting The value in this field is a standard IEEE 754 single precision 32 bit floating point number Field Name Raw Gai
222. ge An FPGA related error is present 4 flashing Please contact Basler technical support Repeated pattern of 6 An erroneous parameter set has been loaded 5 slow orange flashes Load another parameter set Repeated pattern of 5 Parameter error For example a parameter is set out of range or to a 6 Table 45 Camera Status Indicators 298 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Troubleshooting and Support LED Description Priority Repeated pattern of 4 One of the following errors is present 7 slow orange flashes A byte time out has occurred see Section 7 3 1 1 on page 292 Invalid OpCode in a read or write command see Section 7 3 1 on page 289 Incoming data has been discarded since no BFS was included see Section 7 3 1 on page 289 Invalid BCC in a read or write command see Section 7 3 1 on page 289 Invalid address in a read or write command see Section 7 3 1 on page 289 Invalid data length in a read or write command see Section 7 3 1 on page 289 An unknown error with the binary read write command format has occurred Repeated pattern of 3 The last shading table generation process failed The flashing will 8 slow orange flashes stop when you successfully complete a generation process or you reset the camera Repeated pattern of 2 One of the following errors is present 9 slow orange flashes The maximum allowed line rate has been exceeded see Section lowest Section 4 3 on page 106 ExSy
223. ge 19 Corrected Section 4 3 2 on page 111 to indicate that formula 3 returns the maximum allowed line rate Modified explanations in Figure 22 through Figure 25 in Section 3 3 and in Figure 36 through Figure 41 in Section 3 4 for improved clarity Removed explanations related to haloing from Section 3 5 on page 94 Corrected the minimum hight time for the ExSync signat in level controlled mode in Section 4 1 4 on page 103 Changed the jitter related to exposure times to 100 ns in Section 4 1 4 on page 103 Modified the explanation related to using a loo long exposure time for ExSync programmable mode in Section 4 1 4 on page 103 Added advice for increasing the line rate in Section 4 3 3 on page 113 Corrected the frame valid delay values for enhanced raw line acquisition mode 40 MHz for 4k cameras in Section 5 2 on page 118 Added line valid frame valid delay values for 2k and 8k cameras in Section 5 2 on page 118 Indicated the increments of the AOI starting pixel settings depending on the line acquisition mode in Section 6 3 on page 163 and on page 260 Indicated on page 238 that a black image results if a parameter error has occurred Corrected the minimum gain value in Section 7 2 2 1 on page 242 Removed the references to binning in the descriptions of the AOI starting pixel CSR on page 260 and of the AOI length CSR on page 261 Basler sprint Color Cameras 309 Revision History AW00069909000 Doc ID Numbe
224. ging sensor temperature inquiry register cee 241 input signals EXSyfHlC e aieea elite 35 serial to camera ssssss 35 inquiry registers 235 236 IR cutfilter Rex 11 L LED pA 298 lens adapter seeseseeeeeeee 9 2k cameras iihi inikot ninini diaii 2 4k cameras sessseseeeee 4 BK cameras aiseid e ianiai ideaa 5 lens adapter 2k and 4k cameras 16 lens mount M58 x 0 75 V Basler 6 9 level controlled exposure time control mode ssseeessss 100 line acquisition mode control and status register eneeier 244 line acquisition modes 41 Enhanced Raw Line A First B Delayed 70 Enhanced Raw Line B First A Delayed 82 Raw Line A First 51 Raw Line B First 60 RGB idiot tedieetemid 42 line contrast reen aia eaii 209 line period control and status register 249 line rate maximum allowed 106 maximum specified 114 line Stamip erre 206 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 line stamp high pixel threshold control and status register ceee 275 line stamp low pixel threshold control and status register eeen 274 line stamp mode control and status fGglSter xia ic nemine ge 273 line valid bit sssesee
225. gister is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Length Offset 0x0001 Size 2 Bytes Type Read Write Description Writing an integer to this field sets the length in pixels for the area of interest AOI feature The area of interest length can be set to a minimum of 256 and increased in increments of 32 If the value is set to 256 the length of the AOI will be 256 If the value is set to 288 the length of the AOI will be 288 And so on The allowed range for this value can vary depending on how the area of interest starting pixel parameter is set You should check the raw min and raw max fields of this register to determine the allowed range with the current configuration The 2 bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the length setting Byte 2 High byte of the length setting See Section 6 3 on page 163 for more information about the AOI feature Field Name Min Offset 0x0003 Size 2 Bytes Type Read only Description Minimum allowed integer value for the AOI length setting This field is updated to reflect limitations caused by the way any related features are set The 2 bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the min value Byte 2 High byte of the min value Field Name Max Offset 0x0005 Size 2 Bytes Type Read only Description Maximum allowed integer value for the AOI length setting This field is u
226. grammed Exposure Enhanced Raw Line B First Basler sprint Color Cameras 93 Line Acquisition Modes AW00069909000 3 5 Operating Recommendations 3 5 1 Camera Operating Recommendations To achieve the best results certain operating requirements should be met Exposure start should be triggered by an ExSync signal see Chapter 4 on page 99 Use of the programmable exposure mode is recommended to ensure uniform exposure The edge controlled or level controlled exposure modes can be used but only if the conveyor speed is 100 stable If the conveyor speed is not stable unacceptable variations in exposure time will result 3 5 2 System Design Recommendations When you are using the RGB or the Raw line acquisition mode the camera s line rate and the conveyor speed must be attuned to ensure that the object is completely covered and that exposures do not overlap When you are using the Enhanced Raw line acquisition mode for a given point on the object to be captured correctly its image must fall precisely on line A in the sensor and then precisely on line B in the sensor Position Encoder You should use a position encoder to monitor the movement of the system s conveyor You should also use the encoder output to trigger line acquisition for attuning the camera s line rate and the conveyor speed Conveyor Travel The conveyor must travel in a straight line If the conveyor motion is not straight each line in the sensor will scan
227. h pixel has a green value of 0 and so on On the second cycle the pixel values refer to line B The first pixel has a green value GB of 0 the second pixel has a blue value BB of 0 the third pixel has a green value of 0 the fourth pixel has a blue value of 1 the fifth pixel has a green value of 0 the sixth pixel has a blue value of 2 and so on The following odd lines are identical to the first line The following even lines are identical to the second line 204 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Features RA 0 GA 0 RA 0 GA 0 RA 0 GA 0 GB 0 BB 2 GB 0 BB 0 RA 0 GA 0 RA 0 GA 0 GB 0 BB 0 GB 0 BB 1 GB 0 BB 2 GB 0 BB 0 RA 0 GA 0 RA 0 GA 0 RA 0 GA 0 Raw Line A First and Enhanced Raw Line A First Raw Line B First and Enhanced Raw Line B First Fig 85 Pixel Values in the Upper Left Corner of Test Image Nine Generated with a Raw or Enhanced Raw Line Acquisition Mode 255 Gray Level 1 512 1024 1536 2048 2560 3072 3584 4096 Pixel Number Fig 86 Gray Scale Gradients of Test Image Nine Formed by the Blue Pixels for 8 bit Output Modes and Generated with a Raw or Enhanced Raw Line Acquisition Mode on a Camera with 4096 Pixels Per Line Fig 87 Test Image Nine for 8 bit Output Modes Generated with a Raw or Enhanced Raw Line Acquisition Mode Raw Line A First and Enhanced Raw Line A First as a
228. he AOI Starting Pixel can be set to a minimum of 1 If the RGB line acquisition mode is selected the area of interest starting pixel can be set in increments of 16 for cameras that have 2048 or 4096 pixels and in increments of 32 for cameras that have 8192 pixels If a Raw line acquisition mode or an Enhanced Raw line acquisition mode is selected the area of interest starting pixel can be set in increments of 32 for cameras that have 2048 or 4096 pixels and in increments of 64 for cameras that have 8192 pixels The AOI Length must be a minimum of 256 pixels and can be increased in increments of 32 The AOI Starting Pixel AOI Length lt Number of Pixels in Each Sensor Line 1 For example if a Raw line acquisition mode is selected and if you are working with a camera that has 2048 pixels in each sensor line The AOI Starting Pixel can be set to 1 33 65 97 etc The AOI Length can be set to 256 288 320 352 etc The AOI Starting Pixel AOI Length lt 2049 If you are working with a camera that has 4096 pixels in each sensor line The AOI Starting Pixel can be set to 1 33 65 97 etc The AOI Length can be set to 256 288 320 352 etc The AOI Starting Pixel AOI Length lt 4097 Basler sprint Color Cameras 163 Features AW00069909000 If you are working with a camera that has 8192 pixels in each sensor line The AOI Starting Pixel can be set to 1 65 129 193 etc The AOI Length can be set to 256 320 384 448 etc
229. he OpCode As shown in the OpCode table on page 290 an OpCode value of 0b00001 indicates that this is a read command frame Bit 2 indicates the presence or absence of a BCC in the frame As shown in the OpCode table when this bit is set to 0b1 it indicates that a BCC is present Bits 1 and 0 indicate the AddrLen As shown in the OpCode table a value of 0b00 for the AddrLen indicates that the address portion of this frame contains a 16 bit address If you check the table on page 273 you will find that the address for the Status field of the Test Image Mode CSR is 0x1800 a 16 bit address You are free to use any supported AddrLen as long as the CSR address will fit into it 0x01 is the DataLen field This field indicates the data size in bytes that will be transferred by using this read command As shown in the table on page 273 the data size for the Status field of the Test Image Mode CSR is 1 byte Note that for read commands the data size specified in the DataLen field represents the number of bytes of data that you expect to see in the response frame No data bytes are actually included in the read command 0x00 0x18 is the Address field in little endian This field indicates the CSR address from which the data bytes will be read The little endian values of 0x00 0x18 in the address field translate to an address of 0x1800 If you check the table on page 273 you will find that 0x1800 is the address for the Status field of t
230. he Test Image Mode CSR 0x15 is the BCC field See Section 7 3 2 3 on page 295 for instructions on calculating a BCC Note that the use of a BCC is optional In this example we assume that a BCC is used 0x03 is the BFE The value in the BFE field is always 0x03 Basler sprint Color Cameras 293 Configuring the Camera AW00069909000 7 3 2 2 Write Command This section includes a text description the hex digits included in a command message used to write a value of 0x01 to the Mode field of the Test Image Mode CSR see page 273 The intent of this section is to give you a basic understanding of the elements included in a write command Sample code that illustrates how to send a write command is available from Basler see Section 7 4 on page 296 The hex digits included in the write command are 0x01 0x04 0x01 0x01 0x18 0x01 0x1D 0x03 0x01 is the BFS field The value in the BFS field is always 0x01 0x04 is the FTF field The hex value of 0x04 in the FTF field converts to a binary value of 0b00000100 Bits 7 through 3 of the binary value indicate the OpCode As shown in the OpCode table on page 290 an OpCode value of 0b00000 indicates that this is a write command frame Bit 2 indicates the presence or absence of a BCC in the frame As shown in the OpCode table when this bit is set to 0b1 it indicates that a BCC is present Bits 1 through 0 indicate the AddrLen As shown in the OpCode table a value of 0b00 for the Addr
231. he front and two mounting holes on the sides as shown in the drawings 16 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 4 x M4 6 deep i ei A o x fl oo 4 CN o al o Y L N L 9 29 4i 4 x M4 6 deep H h Os BASLER E z Ee awe surface e o z oc of the sensor o t Ws spp nit i i l 0 1 5 4 x M3 setscrews PEN MED to for locking a lens mount 21007 mud Laem 55 reference plane Tolerances are typical Drawings are not to scale Camera Link base 10 2 4 95 Camera Link medium full J Fig 9 Mechanical Dimensions in mm 8k Cameras Basler sprint Color Cameras 17 Specifications Requirements and Precautions AW00069909000 1 5 6 Sensor Positioning Accuracy for 8k Cameras The sensor positioning accuracy is as shown in the drawings below TS LJ
232. he hue magenta value setting 272 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Configuring the Camera Test Image Mode CSR Register Base Address 0x1800 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Mode Offset 0x0001 Size 1 Byte Type Read Write Description Writing an integer to this field sets the test image mode 0x00 Test images disabled 0x02 Test image 2 enabled moving gray gradient 0x07 Test image 7 enabled fixed red gradient 0x08 Test image 8 enabled fixed green gradient 0x09 Test image 9 enabled fixed blue gradient See Section 6 7 on page 189 for more information about the test image feature Line Stamp Mode CSR Register Base Address 0x2B00 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Mode Offset 0x0001 Size 1 Byte Type Read Write Description Writing an integer to this field sets the li
233. he tool a startup graphic should appear and then a window that shows a list of parameter settings should appear If this is the first time that you are using the tool you will see an empty window with a drop down menu at the top which says No port selected In this case use the drop down menu to select the RS 644 port that you want to use RS 644 ports are identified in the list by a name starting with clser followed by a port number Once you select the correct port the list of parameter settings should appear Did the list of parameter settings appear Yes Are you controlling the camera with an ExSync signal or is the camera in free run I ExSync signal y Check the setup on your frame grabber and make sure that the ExSync signal period is not too short The period of the ExSync signal must not be lower than the calculated minimum as explained in Section 4 3 on page 106 You can also access the line period CSR see page 249 to check the minimum On many frame grabbers the period of the ExSync signal is adjusted by changing a setting for the line rate Your line rate should not exceed 1 line period Is the ExSync period OK Check your exposure setting The exposure time must be at least 1 3 us less than the ExSync period Is the exposure OK Yes Switch on test image one Can the test image be seen Yes Replace the camera 302 Free run Correct the
234. he transmission of acquired pixel data As shown in Figure 19 on page 47 Figure 27 on page 58 and Figure 43 on page 80 the camera samples and transmits data on each rising edge of the Camera Link clock The Camera Link pixel clock frequency is as stated in Section 2 8 5 on page 38 The frame valid bit indicates that line A is being transmitted in the Raw Line A First and in the Enhanced Raw Line A First B Delayed line acquisition modes only The line valid bit indicates that a valid line is being transmitted The data valid bit indicates that valid pixel data is being transmitted Pixel data is only valid when the frame valid in the Raw and Enhanced Raw line acquisition modes only line valid and data valid bits are all high 4 Tap 10 Bit Output Mode Operation in 4 tap 10 bit mode is similar to 4 tap 12 bit mode In 10 bit mode however the two least significant bits output from the camera s ADCs are dropped and only the 10 most significant bits of data per pixel are transmitted 4 Tap 8 Bit Output Mode Operation in 4 tap 8 bit mode is similar to 4 tap 12 bit mode In 8 bit mode however the four least significant bits output from the camera s ADCs are dropped and only the 8 most significant bits of data per pixel are transmitted Note The video data output mode that you select may affect the camera s maximum allowed line rate See Section 4 3 on page 106 The data sequence outlined below along with Figure 19 on page 47 F
235. hen making connections and the first connector that you unplug from the camera when breaking connections An Incorrect Plug Can Damage the Camera s 6 pin Connector The plug on the cable that you attach to the camera s 6 pin connector must be a plug for 6 pins Using a plug designed for a smaller or a larger number of pins can damage the pins in the camera s 6 pin connector Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions Avoid Dust on the Sensor The 2k and 4k cameras are shipped with caps on the lens mounts To avoid collecting dust on the camera s sensor make sure that the cap is always in place when there is no lens mounted on the camera Whenever you remove the cap to mount a lens be sure that the lens mount is pointing down The 8k cameras are shipped with protective self adhesive foils covering the lens mounts To avoid collecting dust on the camera s sensor make sure that the foil is always in place when there is no lens mounted on the camera Whenever you remove the foil to mount a lens be sure that the lens mount is pointing down CAUTION Basler sprint Color Cameras 23 Specifications Requirements and Precautions AW00069909000 Warranty Precautions To ensure that your warranty remains in force Do not remove the camera s serial number label If the label is removed and the serial number can t be read from the camera s registers the warranty is void Do
236. igure 27 on page 58 and Figure 43 on page 80 describes what is happening at the inputs to the Camera Link transmitters in the camera 132 Basler sprint Color Cameras AWO00069909000 Video Data Output Modes Video Data Sequence for 4 Tap Modes The following assumes that the Raw or Enhanced Raw line acquisition mode is selected where a frame valid signal is transmitted If the RGB line acquisition mode is selected the frame valid signal will not be transmitted When the camera is not transmitting valid data the frame valid line valid and data valid bits sent on each cycle of the pixel clock will be low Once the camera has completed an exposure there will be a delay while data is read out of the sensor When readout is complete the camera will begin to transmit pixel data On the clock cycle where valid pixel data transmission begins the frame valid line valid and data valid bits all become high Four data streams DO D1 D2 and D3 are transmitted in parallel on this clock cycle On this clock cycle data stream DO will transmit data for pixel 1 in the line Data stream D1 will transmit data for pixel 2 Data stream D2 will transmit data for pixel 3 And data stream D3 will transmit data for pixel 4 Depending on the video data output mode selected the pixel data will be at either 12 bit 10 bit or 8 bit depth On the next cycle of the pixel clock the frame valid line valid and data valid bits will all be high On this clock cycle
237. imum line rate based on the amount of time it takes to transmit the pixel data for an acquired line from the camera to the host PC 7 CL Clk x Taps Max nines S eI Readout Gaps Taps AOI Leng p Where CL Clk is the Camera Link clock speed for your camera model Taps is the number of taps being used as determined by the current video data output mode setting see Chapter 5 on page 115 CL Readout Gap is the Camera Link readout gap parameter for the camera This parameter is the minimum time in Camera Link pixel clocks between the readouts of two consecutive lines This parameter depends on the Camera Link clock speed For 40 MHz 16 For 80 MHz 24 AO Length is the length of the AOI based on the current AOI length setting see Section 6 3 on page 163 p 0 if the line stamp feature is not enabled see Section 6 8 on page 206 p 16 when the line stamp feature is enabled Section 4 3 2 on page 111 includes an example that illustrates how to use these formulas Once you have determined the maximum allowed line rate you can easily determine the minimum allowed line period 1 Min Line Period Max Line Rate 4 3 1 Max Segment AOI Pixels Each sensor line in a camera is divided into segments with each segment including 2048 pixels In cameras equipped with sensors that have 2048 pixels per line each line has only one segment In cameras equipped with sensors that have 4096 pixels per line each line has two segments as shown i
238. inary read write commands from within your own application to set the camera s bulk data control and status registers CSRs With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 234 you use the File Name Select parameter to select a shading values file and the Activate button in the Shading Files parameters group to activate the selected file By Setting CSRs You can activate a shading values file by writing values to the shading values bulk data CSR Section 7 2 3 on page 280 explains bulk data CSRs and using the bulk data activate process Section 7 3 1 on page 289 explains using read write commands Basler sprint Color Cameras 173 Features AW00069909000 6 4 7 Copying the Factory Shading Values into the User Shading Values File As explained in Section 6 4 on page 165 the camera contains a set of factory determined shading correction values in a file in its non volatile memory As explained in Section 6 4 5 on page 168 you can also generate a set of user shading values and save them to a separate file in the non volatile memory In some situations it may be advantageous for you to be able to simply copy the contents of the factory shading values files into the file for user shading values You can copy the values from the factory file into the user file with the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary read write commands from within your own application to set the camera s bulk data control and status registe
239. ing an integer value to this field sets the gain for the blue pixels The dB of gain blue that the camera will achieve at a given setting is determined by the formula shown in Section 6 2 on page 159 The bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the raw value Byte 2 High byte of the raw value Field Name Raw Min Offset 0x000F Size 2 Bytes Type Read only Description Minimum allowed integer value for the raw gain blue setting The bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the min value Byte 2 High byte of the min value Field Name Raw Max Offset 0x0011 Size 2 Bytes Type Read only Description Maximum allowed integer value for the raw gain blue setting The bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the max value Byte 2 High byte of the max value Basler sprint Color Cameras 257 Configuring the Camera AW00069909000 Gain Green 2 CSR Note The gain specifically for the green pixels of sensor line B can be set by writing a floating point value to the Absolute Gain Green 2 field or by writing an integer value to the Raw Gain Green 2 field See Section 7 2 2 1 on page 242 for an explanation of the difference between these two fields If Gain Green 2 is enabled using the Gain Green 2 Enable CSR the settings in the Gain Green CSR will only relate to sensor line A Register Base Address 0x4600 Field Name Register Status Off
240. integer value for the saturation red value setting Field Name Saturation Red Max Offset 0x0008 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description Maximum allowed integer value for the saturation red value setting Field Name Saturation Red Increment Offset 0x0009 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description An integer value indicating the increment for the saturation red value setting Basler sprint Color Cameras 265 Configuring the Camera AW00069909000 Register Base Address 0x4400 Field Name Hue Red Status Offset 0x000A Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of the hue adjustment for red 0x00 The adjustment is not available 0x01 The adjustment is available and all related settings are OK Field Name Hue Red Value Offset 0x000B Size 1 Byte Type Read Write Description Writing an integer to this field sets the hue value of red for predominantly red colors in the image The hue red value can be set to a minimum of 128 and can be increased to a maximum of 127 If the hue red value is set to a negative number red will be mixed with yellow If the hue red value is set to a positive number red will be mixed with magenta If the hue red value is set to 128 corresponding to a rotation in negative direction by 60 in the color hexagon red will be completely transformed into yellow If the value is set to 127 corresponding to a rotation in posi
241. ion 2 8 5 on page 38 The line valid bit indicates that a valid line is being transmitted The data valid bit indicates that valid pixel data is being transmitted Pixel data is only valid when the line valid and data valid bits are both high 3 Tap 8 Bit Output Mode Operation in 3 tap 8 bit mode is similar to 3 tap 10 bit mode In 8 bit mode however the two least significant bits output from the camera s ADCs are dropped and only the 8 most significant bits of data per pixel are transmitted Note The video data output mode that you select may affect the camera s maximum allowed line rate See Section 4 3 on page 106 The data sequence outlined below along with Figure 18 on page 46 describes what is happening at the inputs to the Camera Link transmitters in the camera 126 Basler sprint Color Cameras AWO00069909000 Video Data Output Modes Video Data Sequence for 3 Tap Output Modes When the camera is not transmitting valid data the line valid and data valid bits sent on each cycle of the pixel clock will be low Once the camera has completed an exposure there will be a delay while data is read out of the sensor When readout is complete the camera will begin to transmit pixel data On the clock cycle where valid pixel data transmission begins the line valid and data valid bits both become high Three data streams DO D1 and D2 are transmitted in parallel on this clock cycle On this clock cycle data stream DO will
242. ion 7 1 on page 234 Check the Camera Status parameter in the Camera Information parameters group to see if any error codes are present by using binary read write commands from within your own application to read the value in the Camera Status field of the Camera Status inquiry register see page 238 Section 7 2 1 on page 236 explains inquiry registers and Section 7 3 1 on page 289 explains using read write commands by checking the LED on the back of the camera If certain error conditions are present the LED will flash see Section 8 3 on page 298 6 14 Camera Reset You can initiate a camera reset with the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary write commands from within your own application to set the camera s control and status registers CSRs A reset is the equivalent of switching off power to the camera and switching power back on With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 234 click on Camera in the menu at the top of the CCT window and a drop down list will appear Click on Reset Camera in the drop down list to initiate a reset By Setting CSRs You can initiate a reset by writing the appropriate value to the Reset field of the Camera Reset CSR see page 278 See Section 7 2 2 on page 242 for an explanation of CSRs and Section 7 3 1 on page 289 for an explanation of using read write commands Note Whenever the camera is powered on or when a camera reset is performed your PC may
243. ion are stored in a different file For more information about shading correction and shading correction values see Section 6 4 on page 165 Basler sprint Color Cameras 227 Features AW00069909000 6 15 1 Saving the Work Set to a User Set File As mentioned above the work configuration set is stored in the camera s volatile memory and the parameter settings in the work set are lost if the camera is reset or if power is switched off The camera can save the current work set values in the volatile memory to files in the camera s non volatile memory Files in the non volatile memory are not lost at reset or power off There are four files available for holding a saved user configuration set UserSet01 UserSet02 UserSet03 and UserSet04 Saved configuration sets are commonly referred to as user configuration sets or user sets Note For the 8k camera only two user sets UserSet01 and UserSet02 are available Saving a User Configuration Set You can save the current work set to one of the files in the non volatile memory by using the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary read write commands from within your own application to set the camera s control and status registers CSRs With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 234 you use the File Name Select parameter and the Copy button in the User Set Files parameters group Clicking the copy button will copy the work set settings to the sele
244. iption Minimum allowed floating point value for the absolute gain red setting The value in this field is a standard IEEE 754 single precision 32 bit floating point number Field Name Absolute Max Offset 0x0009 Size 4 Bytes Type Read only Description Maximum allowed floating point value for the absolute gain red setting The value in this field is a standard IEEE 754 single precision 32 bit floating point number Field Name Raw Gain Red Offset 0x000D Size 2 Bytes Type Read Write Description Writing an integer value to this field sets the gain for the red pixels The dB of gain red that the camera will achieve at a given setting is determined by the formula shown in Section 6 2 on page 159 The bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the raw value Byte 2 High byte of the raw value Field Name Raw Min Offset 0x000F Size 2 Bytes Type Read only Description Minimum allowed integer value for the raw gain red setting The bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the min value Byte 2 High byte of the min value Field Name Raw Max Offset 0x0011 Size 2 Bytes Type Read only Description Maximum allowed integer value for the raw gain red setting The bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the max value Byte 2 High byte of the max value 254 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Configuring the Camera G
245. irst line acquisition mode you can select a 2 4 or 8 tap video output mode for transmitting pixel data at bit depths of 8 10 or 12 Not all camera models support 4 or 8 tap video data output mode Not all combinations of video data output modes and bit depths are available For information about the available video data output modes and bit depths for your camera model see Section 5 1 on page 115 The Enhanced Raw Line A First line acquisition mode provides a frame valid FVAL signal which indicates line A in a sequence of consecutive lines being transmitted When the frame valid signal goes high the line being transmitted will include pixel data from line A with red and green pixel values And the next line transmitted will include pixel data from line B The length of the frame valid signal can be set to multiples of two If for examples the length is set to two the FVAL signal will go low after two lines have been transmitted if the length is set to four the FVAL signal will go low after four lines have been transmitted and so on If the length is set to zero the FVAL signal will stay low throughout For information about setting the frame valid signal for the number of lines it will stay high see page 245 The assignment of pixel data bits to output ports depends on the video data output mode of the camera The video data output modes and the bit assignments are explained in detail in Chapter 5 on page
246. is set for RGB line acquisition mode see Section 3 2 on page 42 and test image seven a test image is formed with a fixed horizontal red gradient When e g an 8 bit output mode is selected the red gradient ranges from 0 to 255 and repeats every 256 pixels as shown in Figure 77 The pixel values refer to virtual pixels Section 3 2 on page 42 Therefore each line of the test image includes 1024 pixels for 2k cameras 2048 pixels for 4k cameras and 4096 pixels for 8k cameras The lines of the test image for e g 8 bit output modes are generated in the following way see also Figure 76 On the first cycle of the ExSync signal or the camera s internal control signal the first pixel has a red value R of 0 a green value G of 0 and a blue B value of 0 the second pixel has a red value of 1 a green value of 0 and a blue value of 0 the third pixel has a red value of 2 a green value of 0 and a blue value of 0 and so on The following lines are identical to the first line oo Pao Ooc PoJ AR oSA UJ 0 20 l o PoP oon DOD bn I I ow I ool I oo R G B 0 R G B Pez l ojoo POP o QD WG D obo PoJ Li o I on I I oo I ow DD ooo DOD w DOD l QD PoI I ow I of l ON Oo QD D CO DU o l ou Ter obo DOD P oO P eo Pon ol oO DOD pos eo eo Fig 76 Pixel Values in the Upper Left Corner o
247. is set to 0 the FVAL signal will stay low throughout The allowed range for this value can vary depending on how the camera is configured You should check the min max and increment fields of this register to determine the allowed range and increment with the current configuration The 2 bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the length setting Byte 2 High byte of the length setting See Section 2 8 1 on page 36 for more information about the FVAL signal Field Name Min Offset 0x0003 Size 2 Bytes Type Read only Description Minimum allowed integer value for the FVAL length setting This field is updated to reflect limitations caused by the way any related features are set The 2 bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the min value Byte 2 High byte of the min value Basler sprint Color Cameras 245 Configuring the Camera AW00069909000 Register Base Address 0x4200 Field Name Max Offset 0x0005 Size 2 Bytes Type Read only Description Maximum allowed integer value for the FVAL length setting This field is updated to reflect limitations caused by the way any related features are set The 2 bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the max value Byte 2 High byte of the max value Field Name Increment Offset 0x0007 Size 2 Bytes Type Read only Description An integer value indicating the increment for the FVAL leng
248. ition Modes AW00069909000 3 2 1 Pixel Value Transmission for the RGB Line Acquisition Mode For the RGB line acquisition mode you can select a 2 3 4 6 or 8 tap video output mode for transmitting pixel data at bit depths of 8 10 or 12 Not all camera models support 4 6 or 8 tap video data output mode Not all combinations of video data output modes and bit depths are available For information about the available video data output modes and bit depths for your camera model see Section 5 1 on page 115 The assignment of pixel data bits to output ports depends on the video data output mode of the camera The video data output modes and the bit assignments are explained in detail in Chapter 5 on page 115 The bit assignments comply with the Camera Link standard The tables also show the assignments for the line valid bit the data valid bit and the pixel clock These assignments are constant for all output modes The following diagrams illustrate the sequences of pixel values for each tap and the related timing patterns for the pixel clock the line valid and the data valid signals Edge or level controlled exposure and programmed exposure are considered 44 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Line Acquisition Modes 3 2 1 1 ExSync Signal Or End of Programmed Time Line Valid Data Valid Pixel Clock DO Pixel Data 12 10 or 8 bits D1 Pixel Data 12 10 or 8 bits 2 Tap
249. itted When the camera is not transmitting valid data the frame valid line valid and data valid bits sent on each cycle of the pixel clock will be low Once the camera has completed an exposure there will be a delay while data is read out of the sen sor When readout is complete the camera will begin to transmit pixel data On the clock cycle where valid pixel data transmission begins the frame valid line valid and data valid bits all become high Two data streams DO and D1 are transmitted in parallel on this clock cycle On this clock cycle data stream DO will transmit data for pixel 1 in the line Data stream D1 will transmit data for pixel 2 Depending on the video data output mode selected the pixel data will be at 12 bit 10 bit or 8 bit depth On the next cycle of the pixel clock the frame valid line valid and data valid bits will all be high On this clock cycle data stream DO will transmit data for pixel 3 in the line Data stream D1 will transmit data for pixel 4 On the next cycle of the pixel clock the frame valid line valid and data valid bits will all be high On this clock cycle data stream DO will transmit data for pixel 5 in the line Data stream D1 will transmit data for pixel 6 This pattern will continue until all of the pixel data for the line has been transmitted After all of the pixel data for the line has been transmitted the frame valid line valid and data valid bits all become low indicating that v
250. ituations The factory shading values file is in a protected area of the camera s memory and can t be changed One advantage of the factory values is that they serve as a good default The second shading values file is called the user shading file This file can also hold a complete collection of the values needed to perform both DSNU and PRNU shading correction The values stored in this file must be generated by the camera user while the camera is operating under its real world conditions This file contains the shading values that will normally be used for day to day camera operation A procedure describing how to generate the values in this file appears on the next page Guidelines When Using Shading Correction When using the shading correction feature make sure to take the following guidelines into account Any time you make a change to the optics or lighting or if you change the camera s exposure mode or exposure time you must generate a new set of user PRNU shading values and a new set of DSNU shading values Using out of date shading values can result in poor image quality 6 4 4 Enabling Shading Correction You can enable shading correction with the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary read write commands from within your own application to set the camera s control and status registers CSRs With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 234 you use the Shading Mode parameter in the DSNU and PR
251. iu cz 5 F X 5 I z5 _ pasion I ENN Ad X E ez i ez Eed n l ZX AT niam Pesnion ex I I zx pasmon I A I l zx pasnioN S S l I Ler f pemon vowed il res 2X or 0L 4 Jed m m X vox cok I An rin cowed I 0 Hod PN Bie I I aie PEIN I zousg 61 LOLXL Zo vod PESTON Bast ION xi Feux sueg p Ez l TT I EX XL su ied l I Towed a I I kn Towed epa can 8 6 1 ex I 05 ued 00 Hod EL Dm zva FE Hed samea ne x 2 l l pL saued I un ed os FIZ s l S 48ued zz l zz Z el EU iod I I sarg H thu Cah ve Zed TB 1X en EL zin zx frag 84 l Le ma l ea E mar m yelled a Ior x n ea uod I 7 l Fux l zavod OH uod ea ar omas ci Tavog 9 l LSXL 18Wod soma 9a ot L sovea l ew 9 l l XL Hoama ora OZ amp 6i piled 8 Ire oz vowg I i oxy I l xL g Dy XL Sv uod SV uod N zu l zxL foved wwe ox zl Sz Iz ox xL pW HOd 29 uod ZO Vod s 3 Aled z 3 zu val 0Z 9 9 L ded z E 02 XL To uod I I ev uod Pie E I E V Uog J jo 09g ony l I Lou 09 Hod I l ed en 0X a zi led SL IE 70X ixi a ve l Z 191399 V9gzWH206SQ NL 20520002 yaw l Zsemusued L8Z4206S0 l l Ow Hod oe I FORE Ov Hod I 9jew urd 9z I I X 1941890 Y88ZHI06SA X Jopiwsueds 924206S0 jeqqeuc aue l 20139002 YAW l d l I e qe2 l ojeuio ld oz juuds Iqe2 YAW fy eue ro neas rrr or B s al d L y uuo2 Yaw ice i Basler sprint Color Cameras 34 AW00069909000 Physical Interfa
252. ixel values are equal to zero A user set load has failed A file operation has failed A camera power undervoltage or overvoltage condition is present see Section 6 12 2 on page 224 A binary read write command protocol error has been detected For more information about the error read the Binary Command Protocol Status Inquiry Register see page 241 This bit is auto cleared on read Reserved An FPGA not ready error has occurred For more information about the error read the FPGA Status Inquiry register see page 240 This bit clears when you read the FPGA Status Inquiry register A trigger error has occurred Either the maximum allowed line rate has been exceeded or the ExSync signal is missing For more information about the error read the FPGA Status Inquiry register see page 240 This bit clears when you read the FPGA Status inquiry register Reserved The last shading value generation process failed The DSNU shading value generation process can fail if the pixel values in the lines captured during the generation process are too high This process should be performed in darkness or in very low light conditions The PRNU shading value generation process can fail if the values for the darkest pixels in the captured lines are less than 1 2 of the values for the highest pixels This problem is often caused by extremely non uniform lighting or by poor quality optics This bit will clear when you perform a successful shading val
253. ject and line B will capture a different point on the object Also notice that on these cycles the pixel data for line A will be transmitted while the pixel data for line B will be buffered The transmission of the pixel data for line B will be delayed until the third ExSync cycle after the data were acquired On the ExSync cycles where acquisition is not performed the buffered pixel data for line B will be transmitted Basler sprint Color Cameras 71 Line Acquisition Modes ExSync Cycle 1 Garbage UPPER BUFFER Garbage LOWER BUFFER B1 Image of point 1 acquired by line B Line B Line A AW00069909000 Drawing not to scale Object Passing Camera o Point 3 Point 2 Point 1 lt a Movement Fig 36 Enhanced Raw Line A First B Delayed Line Acquisition ExSync Cycle 1 Start up Situation 72 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Line Acquisition Modes ExSync Cycle 2 Garbage A H UPPER BUFFER Drawing not to scale f LOWER BUFFER B1 Image of point 1 acquired by line B 19 PAN e IL Line B SBnen Object Passing Camera N
254. l Interface siie oA OE QOE QR JE C an D e eR hl REOR RA a 25 2 1 General Description of the Connections 0 0 eee ee 26 2 2 Connector Pin Assignments and Numbering llli elles 27 2 2 1 Pin Assignments for the MDR Connectors 00002 c eee eee 27 2 2 2 Pin Assignments for the 6 pin Micro miniature Receptacle 29 2 2 3 Pin Numbering 2 oer ees wing nodes iw ea eee ERA ERE 29 2 3 CONNECON T yp6S ciunt ent cit de See St eee LAE i Sad REN ne 30 2 3 1 26 pin Connectors sd srine doeane a Ep e E Eea era i E eee 30 2 3 2 O pir Connector se o omei ek eee Sa ete e e a o b ea e EXT RE 30 2 4 GCablirig Hegulrermients sperem Mewes Sete be EE eee A 31 241 Gamera Link Cable iram tete a oe AEn ee Sa a 31 2 4 2 Power Cable oibus a de a be E DE a ee E e 31 2 5 Camera POW I sisira odo te EI e Tou tetra mete pa ee 32 2 6 Camera Link Implementation 0 0 00 eee ee 33 Basler sprint Color Cameras Table of Contents AW00069909000 2 7 JNPUUSIQNAlS 2 2 48 eet an eb Pata it RONG eee eon ke Va l 35 2 7 4 Serialto Camera 0 0 ees 35 2 72 0 External syne ExSyn6 o esses xe y Sacer tae ewe RINT 35 2 8 Output signals os ewes wads bo Soa Peet eh eg oo eh anes Be Bt eta ceed 36 2 8 1 Frame Valid Bit arrir ati ieceri ai a eee 36 235 2 June Valid Bib csse ERI e e aE ehh Ons RIO ese deh eee 37 2 8 3 Data Valid Bitnci scat dead eee eee rne ym ee Rd RU eee 37 2 8 4 Pixel Data BitS
255. l Requirements 1 7 1 Temperature and Humidity Housing temperature during operation 0 C X50 C 432 F 122 F Humidity during operation 20 80 relative non condensing Storage temperature 20 C 80 C 4 F 176 F Storage humidity 5 95 relative non condensing 1 7 2 Heat Dissipation You must provide sufficient heat dissipation to maintain the temperature of the camera housing at 50 C or less Since each installation is unique Basler does not supply a strictly required technique for proper heat dissipation Instead we provide the following general guidelines In all cases you should monitor the temperature of the camera housing and make sure that the temperature does not exceed 50 C Keep in mind that the camera will gradually become warmer during the first 1 5 hours of operation After 1 5 hours the housing temperature should stabilize and no longer increase If your camera is mounted on a substantial metal component in your system this may provide sufficient heat dissipation Use of a fan to provide air flow over the camera is an extremely efficient method of heat dissipation Using a fan to provide air flow over the camera s heat sinks provides the best heat dissipation The camera includes an overtemperature protection function that will switch off the imaging sensor circuitry if the temperature of the sensor is too high See Section 6 12 1 on page 223 for more information The came
256. l communication To execute the binary programming commands you can call up the functions exported by the DLL Note When the camera is powered on or when a camera reset is performed your PC may receive one random character on the serial interface We recommend clearing the serial input buffers in your PC after a camera power on or reset 288 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Configuring the Camera 7 3 4 The Binary Read Write Command Protocol With the binary read write command protocol data is placed into a frame and sent to the camera When the frame is received it is checked for validity If valid the data is extracted from the frame and the command is executed This section describes the basic layout of a binary command frame Figure 92 shows a graphical representation of the fields within a binary command frame The text below the graphic describes each field of the command frame in detail 1 Frame gt i BFS FTF DataLen Address DATA BCC BFE 8 bits 8 bits 8 bits Length specified in FTF Length specified in DataLen 8 bits 8 bits ACK NAK 8 bits Transmit Response Fig 92 Representation of a Command Frame and Response BFS Binary Frame Start field Identifies the start of a binary frame Size 1 byte The value of the BFS byte is always 0x01 FTF Frame Type and Format field Identifies the frame type and format Size 1 byte The bits in the FTF field are assigned as
257. le below Start Delay ExSync Programmable 1 21 us 20 ns ExSync Level Controlled ExSync Edge Controlled 2 51 us 20 ns Table 8 Exposure Start Delay Delay Due to Low Line Rate Compensation When low line rate compensation operates see Section 4 1 3 on page 102 a delay of 14 2 us precedes each line acquisition in addition to exposure start delay Basler sprint Color Cameras 103 Exposure Start and Exposure Time Control AW00069909000 4 2 Free Run 4 2 1 Basics of Free Run Controlled Operation In free run an ExSync signal is not required The camera generates its own internal control signal based on two programmable parameters Line Period and Exposure Time The camera s internally generated control signal rises and falls in a fashion similar to an ExSync signal In free run the camera exposes and outputs lines continuously and 4 e li Line R the line period parameter setting determines the camera s line rate ine Rate Line Period In free run two modes of operation are available edge controlled and programmable In free run edge controlled mode line acquisition begins on the rising edge of the internal control signal The pixels are exposed and charge is accumulated over the full line period from rising edge to rising edge of the internal control signal The falling edge of the control signal is irrelevant The pixel values are read out of the sensor on the rising edge
258. le of the ExSync signal will trigger the start of image acquisition i e exposure on both lines in the sensor The exposure time you are using will apply to both lines time the start of pixel data readout for both lines time the start of transmission of line A pixel data The values from line B are held in a buffer in the camera Their output will be delayed until the sixth cycle of the ExSync signal The fourth cycle of the ExSync signal will time the start of transmission of line B pixel data This data was acquired on the first ExSync cycle and relates to the data from line A that was transmitted on the preceding ExSync cycle i e the third cycle No exposure will occur 70 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Line Acquisition Modes The fifth cycle of the ExSync signal will trigger the start of image acquisition i e exposure on both lines in the sensor The exposure time you are using will apply to both lines time the start of pixel data readout for both lines time the start of transmission of line A pixel data The values from line B are held in a buffer in the camera Their output will be delayed until the eighth cycle of the ExSync signal The sixth cycle of the ExSync signal will time the start of transmission of line B pixel data This data was acquired on the third ExSync cycle and relates to the data from line A that was transmitted on the preceding ExSync cycle i e the fifth cycle No exposure will o
259. le will be written Values that are outside of the current AOI will be copied from the previously activated shading file 3 Ensure that the camera will be capturing lines in complete darkness by covering the camera lens closing the iris in the lens or darkening the room 4 Begin acquiring lines either by generating an ExSync signal to trigger line acquisition or by setting the camera for a free run exposure time control mode 5 Signal the camera to generate a set of DSNU values a You can start the generation of a set of DSNU values with the Camera Configuration Tool 168 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Features Plus see Section 7 1 on page 234 With the CCT set the value of the Generate parameter in the DSNU amp PRNU Shading Correction parameters group to Generate DSNU Values b You can also start the generation of a set of DSNU values by using a binary write command see Section 7 3 on page 288 to write a value to the Generate field of the Shading Value Generate CSR see page 262 6 The camera must make at least 64 acquisitions to create a set of DSNU shading correction values If your camera is set to control exposure with an ExSync signal you must generate at least 64 ExSync signal cycles after you signal the camera to begin generating the values If you are running the camera in a free run exposure time control mode you must wait long enough for the camera to complete at least 64 acquisitions a When the
260. line stamp feature and the low pixel threshold Field Name Min Offset 0x0003 Size 2 Bytes Type Read only Description Minimum allowed integer value for the low pixel threshold This field is updated to reflect limitations caused by the way any related features are set The 2 bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 2 Low byte of the min value Byte 2 High byte of the min value Field Name Max Offset 0x0005 Size 2 Bytes Type Read only Description Maximum allowed integer value for the low pixel threshold This field is updated to reflect limitations caused by the way any related features are set The 2 bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the max value Byte 2 High byte of the max value Field Name Increment Offset 0x0007 Size 2 Bytes Type Read only Description An integer value indicating the increment for the low pixel threshold setting The 2 bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the increment Byte 2 High byte of the increment 274 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Configuring the Camera Line Stamp High Pixel Threshold CSR Register Base Address 0x2B40 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all relate
261. line valid bit a data valid bit and a pixel clock The assignment of the bits to the output ports on Camera Link Transmitters X and Y is as shown in Table 26 on page 142 and Table 27 on page 143 respectively The Camera Link clock is used to time the transmission of acquired pixel data As shown in Figure 20 on page 48 the camera samples and transmits data on each rising edge of the clock The Camera Link pixel clock frequency is as stated in Section 2 8 5 on page 38 The line valid bit indicates that a valid line is being transmitted The data valid bit indicates that valid pixel data is being transmitted Pixel data is only valid when the line valid and data valid bits are both high Note The video data output mode that you select may affect the camera s maximum allowed line rate See Section 4 3 on page 106 The data sequence outlined below along with Figure 20 on page 48 describes what is happening at the inputs to the Camera Link transmitters in the camera 140 Basler sprint Color Cameras AWO00069909000 Video Data Output Modes Video Data Sequence for 6 Tap Output Mode When the camera is not transmitting valid data the line valid and data valid bits sent on each cycle of the pixel clock will be low Once the camera has completed an exposure there will be a delay while data is read out of the sensor When readout is complete the camera will begin to transmit pixel data On the clock cycle where valid pixel data transmis
262. lk data file is available from Basler see Section 7 4 on page 296 Note When you upload a bulk data file from the PC to the camera it will overwrite any existing data in the camera file with the same name For example if you upload a configuration set file called UsetSet02 from a PC to a camera it will overwrite the existing contents of the UserSet2 file in the camera You can download the factory configuration set file from the camera to the PC but you can t upload the factory configuration set from the PC to the camera The factory configuration set in the camera is protected and can t be overwritten Basler sprint Color Cameras 285 Configuring the Camera 7 2 3 4 AW00069909000 Bulk Data Control and Status Register Details Configuration Set CSR See Section 7 2 3 1 on page 281 for information about using the configuration set bulk data control register Register Base Address 0x2800 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Control Offset 0x0001 Size 1 Byte Type Read Write Description Writing an integer to this field selects a bulk data control function 0x00 Enumerate 0x01 ENext 0x02 Read 0x
263. ll include pixel data from line B with green and blue pixel values And the next line transmitted will include pixel data from line A The length of the frame valid signal can be set to multiples of two If for examples the length is set to two the FVAL signal will go low after two lines have been transmitted if the length is set to four the FVAL signal will go low after four lines have been transmitted and so on If the length is set to zero the FVAL signal will stay low throughout For information about setting the frame valid signal for the number of lines it will stay high see page 245 The assignment of pixel data bits to output ports depends on the video data output mode of the camera The video data output modes and the bit assignments are explained in detail in Section 5 on page 115 The bit assignments comply with the Camera Link standard The tables also show the assignments for the frame valid bit the line valid bit the data valid bit and the pixel clock These assignments are constant for all output modes The following diagrams illustrate the sequences of pixel values for each tap and the related timing patterns for the pixel clock the frame valid the line valid and the data valid signals Edge or level controlled exposure and programmed exposure are considered 90 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Line Acquisition Modes 2 Tap Output Mode ExSync Signal Or End of Programmed Time Frame Valid
264. lled Exposure 2 96 us 3 06 us Level Controlled Exposure 2 91 us 3 01 us Frame Valid De lay for the Raw Line Acquisition Mode 80 MHz Min Max Programmable 3 07 us 3 19 us Edge Controlled Exposur 3 07 us 3 19 us Level Controlled Exposure 3 07 us 3 19 us Frame Valid Delay for the Enhanced Raw Line Acquisition Mode 80 MHz Min Max Programmable 3 10 us 3 21 us Edge Controlled Exposure 3 10 us 3 21 us Level Controlled Exposure 3 10 us 3 21 us Table 15 Line Valid Frame Valid Delays with the 8k Camera Set for 2 Tap Video Data Output Modes Basler sprint Color Cameras 125 Video Data Output Modes AW00069909000 5 2 2 3 Tap Output Modes 3 Tap 10 Bit Output Mode In 3 tap 10 bit mode on each pixel clock cycle the camera transmits data for three pixels at 10 bit depth a line valid bit and a data valid bit In the 3 tap output modes the camera uses the output ports on Camera Link Transmitter X and Y to transmit pixel data a line valid bit a data valid band and a pixel clock The assignment of the bits to the output ports on Camera Link Transmitter X and Y are as shown in Table 16 on page 128 and Table 17 on page 129 respectively The Camera Link clock is used to time the transmission of acquired pixel data As shown in Figure 18 on page 46 the camera samples and transmits data on each rising edge of the clock The Camera Link pixel clock frequency is as stated in Sect
265. lor Cameras AW00069909000 Features For ease of imagination the color cube C B can be projected onto a plane such that a color hexagon is formed The primary and secondary colors define the corners of the color hexagon in an alternating fashion The edges of the color hexagon represent the colors resulting from mixing the primary and secondary colors The center of the color hexagon represents all G shades of gray including black and white Gray Decrease The representation of any arbitrary color of the RGB color space will lie within the color hexagon The color will be characterized by its hue and saturation Saturation Adjustment Increase Hue Adjustment Hue specifies the kind of coloration Y R whether e g the color is red yellow orange etc Fig 64 Hue and Saturation Adjustment In the Color Saturation expresses the Hexagon colorfulness of a color At maximum Adjustments Are Indicated for Red as an Example saturation no shade of gray is present At minimum saturation no color but only some shade of gray including black and white is present 6 6 1 2 Hue and Saturation Adjustment The color adjustment feature lets you adjust hue and saturation for the primary and the secondary colors Each adjustment affects those areas in the image where the adjusted color predominates For example the adjustment of red affects the colors in the image with a predominantly red component When you adju
266. lse not be indicated In general the maximum allowed line acquisition rate can be limited by four factors The exposure time for the acquired lines If you use long exposure times you can acquire fewer lines per second The amount of time it takes to read an acquired line out of the imaging sensor and into the camera s line buffer This time can vary depending on the length of the area of interest AOI for the acquired lines Smaller AOls can take less time to read out The amount of time that it takes to process the pixels before they are ready for transmission This time varies by camera model The amount of time it takes to transmit the pixel data for an acquired line from the camera to the host PC This time can vary depending on the length of the area of interest AOI for the acquired lines Smaller AOls take less time to transmit For information about the camera settings to obtain the maximum specified line rate of the camera see Section 4 3 4 on page 114 To determine the maximum allowed line acquisition rate with your current camera settings you must calculate a result for the four formulas that appear below The formula that returns the lowest value will determine the maximum allowed line rate with the current settings In other words the factor that restricts the line rate the most will determine the maximum allowed line capture rate 106 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Exposure Start and Exposure Time Contr
267. m of 128 and can be increased to a maximum of 127 If the hue yellow value is set to a negative number yellow will be mixed with green If the hue yellow value is set to a positive number yellow will be mixed with red If the hue yellow value is set to 128 corresponding to a rotation in negative direction by 60 in the color hexagon yellow will be completely transformed into green If the value is set to 127 yellow will be completely transformed into red If the value is set to 0 yellow will not be changed See Section 6 6 1 on page 179 for more information about the color adjustment feature Field Name Hue Yellow Min Offset 0x0016 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description Minimum allowed integer value for the hue yellow value setting Field Name Hue Yellow Max Offset 0x0017 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description Maximum allowed integer value for the hue yellow value setting Field Name Hue Yellow Increment Offset 0x0018 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description Description An integer value indicating the increment for the hue yellow value setting Field Name Saturation Green Status Offset 0x0019 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of the saturation adjustment for green 0x00 The adjustment is not available 0x01 The adjustment is available and all related settings are OK Field Name Saturation Green Value Offset 0x001A Size 1 Byte Type Read Write Writing an
268. me control mode If you select the ExSync programmable mode you can use the Exposure Time parameter to set the exposure time By Setting CSRs You select the exposure time control mode by writing the appropriate value to the Mode field of the Exposure Time Control Mode CSR see page 246 If you select the ExSync programmable mode you will also need to set the exposure time You set the exposure time by writing a value to the Absolute Exposure Time field or to the Raw Exposure Time field of the Exposure Time CSR see page 247 Section 7 2 2 on page 242 explains CSRs and the difference between using the absolute field and the raw field in a CSR Section 7 3 1 on page 289 explains using read write commands Do not over trigger the camera because the camera might freeze and might not deliver any images any more If you over trigger the camera and you change the Exposure Time Control Mode parameter this has no effect i e the camera may still not deliver any images In such a case Undo the over triggering of the camera Afterwards you can change the Exposure Time Control Mode parameter if required Call Basler technical support for assistance Basler sprint Color Cameras 101 Exposure Start and Exposure Time Control AW00069909000 4 1 3 Low Line Rate Compensation The low line rate compensation is used at low line rates to clear retained pixel charges in a sensor line To achieve this clearance the l
269. meter sets saving 226 pin assignments sees 27 pin numbering sene 29 pixel data bits ssesessessesss 37 pixel SIZE inier 2 4 5 pixel value transmission sequence Enhanced Raw Line A First 78 Enhanced Raw Line B First 90 Raw Line A First 56 Raw Line B First 65 laic EE 44 DOWER 2 2 ise eed deii tents 32 power cable eese 31 precautions eiie nilo enne 22 Primary COM t e thee 180 PRNU shading correction 166 product ID inquiry register 237 programmable exposure time control mode sssseses 100 104 R Raw line acquisition mode 50 raw Vales 5 n ie E erts 242 read write commands 288 recommendations Operating ett egere 94 system design sss 94 IGgiSleIS zeit toe ete 235 GSOL uice p ete 225 return material authorization 297 RGB color space sesess 180 RGB line acquisition mode 42 RMA number sssseeeeeeeee 297 RS 644 serial communication 39 S sample code sees 296 saturation eriaren iaria naiten 181 saving camera parameter sets 226 secon
270. mm without lens adapter or connectors L x W x H 84 9 mm x 87 0 mm x 62 0 mm with F mount adapter and connectors Weight 360 g without lens adapter Table 2 General Specifications for 4k Cameras Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 AW00069909000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 2 3 Camera Model with 8k Pixels Specification spL8192 39kc Sensor Size 2 lines 8192 pixels per line Sensor Type Linear CMOS with Bayer color filter Pixel Size 10 um x 10 um Camera Link 40 MHz or 80 MHz switchable Clock Speed Maximum Line Rate in Raw Line Acquisition Mode in Enhanced Raw Line Acquisition Mode 38 6 kHz 77 2 KHz Data Output Type Camera Link base medium full configuration Data Output Modes 2 tap 8 10 or 12 bit 3 tap 8 or 10 bit 4 tap 8 10 or 12 bit 6 tap 8 bit 8tap 8 bit Synchronization Via external trigger signal or free run Exposure Control Edge controlled level controlled or programmable Gain and Offset Programmable via a serial link Requirements Connectors One 6 pin Hirose micro miniature receptacle Two 26 pin female MDR connectors Power 12 VDC 10 Max 13 5 W 12 VDC Lens Adapters Sets of optical components including a helical mount or a lens mount with V Basler interface Housing Size 49 0 mm x 92 0 mm x 102 0 mm without optical components or connectors L
271. n each model are also shown in Table 11 For more information about setting the Camera Link pixel clock speed see Section 2 8 5 on page 38 Basler sprint Color Cameras 115 Video Data Output Modes AW00069909000 For Models Video Data Outmode Modes Camera link Clock Speed s spL2048 39kc 2tap 8bit 2tap 10bit 2tap 12 bit 3 tap 8 bit 40 MHz or 80 MHz spL2048 70kc spL4096 39kc spL4096 70kc spL8192 39kc 2 tap 8 bit 2tap 10bit 2 tap 12 bit 3 tap 8 bit 3 tap 10 bit 4 tap 8 bit 4 tap 10 bit 4 tap 12 bit 6 tap 8 bit 8 tap 8 bit 40 MHz or 80 MHz Table 11 Available Video Data Output Modes and Pixel Clock Speed s For information about the camera settings to obtain the maximum specified line rate of the camera see Section 4 3 4 on page 114 116 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Video Data Output Modes 5 1 1 Setting the Video Data Output Mode You can set the video data output mode with the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary write commands from within your own application to set the camera s control and status registers CSRs With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 234 you use the Video Data Output Mode parameter in the Output Mode parameters group to set the output mode By Setting CSRs You select the video data output mode by writing the appropriate value to the Mode field of the Video Data Output Mod
272. n 6 13 on page 225 slow orange flashes value that is not valid LED Description Priority LED is not lit Power to the camera is not present or the input voltage is too low see Section Section 2 5 on page 32 and Section 6 11 on page 222 LED is solid green for This is the normal LED sequence at power on or after a camera reset several seconds flashes orange and then becomes solid orange Solid orange The camera has power and is OK LED flashes with Indicates that the camera is busy performing a normal operation such gradually increasing as generating shading tables When the operation is complete the frequency flashing stops Continuous red flashing An undervoltage or overvoltage condition has been detected see 1 Section 6 11 on page 222 highest Solid red An internal overvoltage condition has been detected 2 Check whether camera power is supplied with the correct voltage of 12 VDC If the LED is solid red despite correct camera power you must return the camera for repair To do so follow the RMA process see Section 8 2 on page 297 You can check for an internal overvoltage condition by reading the value of bit 22 in the Camera Status field of the Camera Status Inquiry Register see Section on page 238 If the bit is set to 1 an internal overvoltage condition is present Continuous fast orange General error Please contact Basler technical support 3 flashing Continuous slow oran
273. n Connector The plug on the cable that you attach to the camera s 6 pin connector must be a plug for 6 pins Using a plug designed for a smaller or a larger number of CAUTION pins can damage the pins in the camera s 6 pin connector Basler sprint Color Cameras 31 Physical Interface AW00069909000 2 5 Camera Power Camera power must be supplied to the camera s 6 pin connector via a cable from your power supply Nominal camera power voltage is 12 VDC 10 with less than one percent ripple Power consumption is as shown in Table 1 on page 2 The camera has camera power overvoltage protection as described in Section 6 11 on page 222 Applying Incorrect Camera Power Can Damage the Camera The nominal voltage for the camera power is 12 VDC 10 We do not recommend applying a voltage less than 10 8 VDC or greater than 13 2 VDC CAUTION The camera has camera power undervoltage protection that is triggered if the voltage drops below 10 5 VDC It also has camera power overvoltage protection up to 25 VDC See Section 6 11 on page 222 for more detailed information about camera power undervoltage and overvoltage protection Applying a camera power voltage greater than 25 VDC can seriously damage the camera Making or Breaking Connections Incorrectly Can Damage the Camera Be sure that all power to your camera and to your host PC is switched off before you make or break connections to the camera Making or breaking connection
274. n Example on a Camera with 4096 Pixels Per Line Test image one is useful for checking the integrity of the data transmitted by the camera If you capture lines and examine the pixel values in the captured lines the values should be exactly as described above Note When the camera is set for an 8 bit output mode the pixel values in test image nine range from 0 to 255 as described above If the camera is set for a 10 bit output the pixel values will range from 0 to 1023 If the camera is set for a 12 bit output the pixel values will range from 0 to 4095 Basler sprint Color Cameras 205 Features AW00069909000 6 8 Line Stamp The line stamp feature provides you with information about each acquired line For each color individually the information includes e g the line counter value the sum of the pixel values in the line and the contrast value of the line When the line stamp feature is enabled 16 extra stamp pixel values are added for each color to the end of each transmitted line If the line stamp feature is used together with the AOI feature see Section 6 3 on page 163 the stamp pixels are transmitted immediately after the last pixel in the AOI Each stamp pixel carries an 8 10 or 12 bit value that conveys information about the transmitted line Note When the camera is operating in an 8 bit output mode the stamp pixels will be 8 bit values When the camera is operating in a 10 bit output mode the stamp pi
275. n Figure 57 In cameras equipped with sensors that have 8192 pixels per line each line has four segments Segment 1 Segment 2 re Prt L Pixel 1 Pixel 2048 L Pixel 2049 Pixel 4096 Fig 57 Segments in Each Line of a 4096 Pixel Sensor 108 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Exposure Start and Exposure Time Control When you are setting up the area of interest AOI see Section 6 3 on page 163 on a camera with only one segment in each line all of the pixels included in the AOI will fall into that single segment On these cameras the Max Seg AOI Pixels is simply the number of pixels included in the AOI For example if the AOI starting pixel is set to 33 and the AOI length is set to 512 on an spL2048 39kc the Max Seg AO Pixels will be 512 When you are setting up the AOI on a camera with two segments 4096 pixels in each line the pixels within the AO may all fall into one segment Or the AOI could be positioned so that some of the pixels in the AOI fall into segment 1 and some of the pixels in the AOI fall into segment 2 The Max Seg AOI Pixels is defined as the number of AOI pixels included in the segment that contains the largest number of AOI pixels When you are setting up the AOI on a camera with four segments 8192 pixels in each line the pixels within the AO may all fall into one segment Or the AOI could be positioned so that some of the pixels in the AOI fall into one segment and some of the pixels in the A
276. n Offset 0x000D Size 2 Bytes Type Read Write Description Writing an integer value to this field sets the gain The dB of gain that the camera will achieve at a given setting is determined by the formula shown in Section 6 1 on page 155 The bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the raw value Byte 2 High byte of the raw value Field Name Raw Min Offset 0x000F Size 2 Bytes Type Read only Description Minimum allowed integer value for the raw gain setting The bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the min value Byte 2 High byte of the min value Field Name Raw Max Offset 0x0011 Size 2 Bytes Type Read only Description Maximum allowed integer value for the raw gain setting The bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the max value Byte 2 High byte of the max value Basler sprint Color Cameras 251 Configuring the Camera AW00069909000 Offset CSR Note The offset can be set by writing a floating point value to the Absolute Offset field or by writing an integer value to the Raw Offset field See Section 7 2 2 1 on page 242 for an explanation of the difference between these two fields Register Base Address 0x0F00 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is n
277. n Receptacle Pins 1 and 2 are tied together inside of the camera Pins 5 and 6 are tied together inside of the camera 2 2 3 Pin Numbering Figure 14 shows the pin numbering for the connectors on the back of the camera for 2k and 4k cameras The pin numberings for 8k cameras are analogous 13 1 9i 26 14 5 4 O 2 13 1 A J Not present on all models see Table 4 and Figure 13 on page 26 Fig 14 Pin Numbering 2k and 4k Cameras 8k Cameras are Analogous Basler sprint Color Cameras 29 Physical Interface AW00069909000 2 3 Connector Types 2 3 1 26 pin Connectors Each 26 pin connector on the back of the camera is a female 0 050 inch MDR connector as called for in the Camera Link specification 2 3 2 6 pin Connector The 6 pin connector on the camera is a Hirose micro miniature locking receptacle part number HR10A 7R 6PB or the equivalent The recommended mating connector is the Hirose micro miniature locking plug part number HR10A 7P 6S A plug of this type should be used to terminate the cable on the power supply for the camera A power supply that has an output cable terminated with the correct connector is available from Basler Contact your Basler sales representative for more information 30 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Physical Interface 2 4 Cabling R
278. n value GA of 0 the third pixel has a red value of 1 the fourth pixel has a green value of 0 the fifth pixel has a red value of 2 the sixth pixel has a green value of 0 and so on On the second cycle the pixel values refer to line B The first pixel has a green value GB of 0 the second pixel has a blue value BB of 0 the third pixel has a green value of 0 the fourth pixel has a blue value of 0 the fifth pixel has a green value of 0 the sixth pixel has a blue value of 0 and so on The following odd lines are identical to the first line The following even lines are identical to the second line 198 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Features RA 0 GA 0 RA 1 GA 0 RA 2 GA 0 GB 0 BB 0 GB 0 BB 0 GB 0 BB 0 GB 0 BB 0 mE GB 0 RA 0 GA 0 RA 0 GA 0 RA 1 GA 0 GB 0 BB 0 GB 0 BB 0 GB 0 BB 0 BB 0 RA 0 GA 0 Raw Line A First and Enhanced Raw Line A First Raw Line B First and Enhanced Raw Line B First Fig 79 Pixel Values in the Upper Left Corner of Test Image Seven Generated with a Raw or Enhanced Raw Line Acquisition Mode 255 Gray Level 1 512 1024 1536 2048 2560 3072 3584 4096 Pixel Number Fig 80 Gray Scale Gradients of Test Image Seven for 8 bit Output Modes Formed by the Red Pixels and Generated with a Raw or Enhanced Raw Line Acquisition Mode on a Camera with 4096 Pixels Per Line Fig
279. nal can be periodic or non periodic as required For simplicity no delays related to line acquisition and readout are considered in this section For more information about delays see Section 4 1 4 on page 103 and Section 5 2 on page 118 Valid for the spL2048 70kc and for the spL4096 70kc only If the enhanced raw line acquisition mode is selected in ExSync operation the maximum line rate for these camera models is 137 kHz When the camera is operating with an ExSync signal three modes of exposure time control are available edge controlled mode level controlled mode and programmable mode In ExSync edge controlled mode line acquisition begins on the rising edge of the ExSyc signal The pixels are exposed and charge is accumulated over the full period of the ExSync signal rising edge to rising edge The falling edge of the ExSync signal is irrelevant The pixel Basler sprint Color Cameras 99 Exposure Start and Exposure Time Control AW00069909000 values read out of the sensor on the rising edge of ExSync see Figure 52 ExSync Period Exposure ExSync O Signal Line Readout Fig 52 ExSync Edge Controlled Mode In ExSync level controlled mode line acquisition begins on the rising edge of the ExSyc signal The exposure time is determined by the time between the falling edge of ExSync and the next rising edge The pixels are exposed and charge is accumulated only when ExSync is low The pi
280. nc has not changed state for 5 seconds or longer Check the cable and the ExSync generating device Table 45 Camera Status Indicators Basler sprint Color Cameras 299 Troubleshooting and Support AW00069909000 8 4 Troubleshooting Charts The following pages contain several troubleshooting charts that can help you find the cause of problems users sometimes encounter The charts assume that you are familiar with the camera s features and settings and with the settings for your frame grabber If you are not we suggest you review the manuals for your camera and frame grabber before you troubleshoot a problem 300 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Troubleshooting and Support 8 4 4 No Image Use this chart if you see no image at all when you attempt to capture an image with your frame grabber in this situation you will usually get a message from the frame grabber such as time out If you see a poor quality image a completely black image or a completely white image use the chart in Section 8 4 2 on page 303 Before making or breaking any camera connections always switch off power to the system camera and host PC Connect the power source to the camera and then check the LED on the back of the camera Is the LED lit constantly Use a voltmeter to check the power source for the camera The output must be 12 VDC x 1 2 V Also make sure that the power source meets the other specs shown in Section 2 5 on page 32 Is th
281. ncludes a description of how the Camera Link standard is implemented in the camera CAUTION CAUTION Applying Incorrect Camera Power Can Damage the Camera The nominal voltage for the camera power is 12 VDC 10 We do not recommend applying a voltage less than 10 8 VDC or greater than 13 2 VDC The camera has camera power undervoltage protection that is triggered if the voltage drops below 10 5 VDC It also has camera power overvoltage protection up to 25 VDC See Section 6 11 on page 222 for more detailed information about camera power undervoltage and overvoltage protection Applying a camera power voltage greater than 25 VDC can seriously damage the camera Making or Breaking Connections Incorrectly Can Damage the Camera Be sure that all power to your camera and to your host PC is switched off before you make or break connections to the camera Making or breaking connections when power is on can result in damage to the camera or to the frame grabber If you can t switch off the power be sure that the camera power plug is the last connector that you plug into the camera when making connections and the first connector that you unplug from the camera when breaking connections Basler sprint Color Cameras 25 Physical Interface AW00069909000 2 1 General Description of the Connections The camera is interfaced to external circuitry via connectors located on the back of the housing one or two 26 pin 0 050 inch Mini D Rib
282. ncrement for the hue green value setting Field Name Saturation Cyan Status Offset 0x0023 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of the saturation adjustment for cyan 0x00 The adjustment is not available 0x01 The adjustment is available and all related settings are OK 268 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Configuring the Camera Field Name Saturation Cyan Value Description Register Base Address 0x4400 Offset 0x0024 Size 1 Byte Type Read Write Writing an integer value to this field sets the saturation value of cyan for predominantly cyan colors in the image If the saturation cyan value is set to 64 the saturation of cyan will not be changed Setting the value to less than 64 will decrease the saturation If for example the value is set to 32 the saturation of cyan will be halved If the value is set to 0 the saturation of cyan is zero and cyan will not be present in the image Setting the value to greater than 64 will increase the saturation If for example the value is set to 128 the saturation of cyan will be doubled See Section 6 6 1 on page 179 for more information about the color adjustment feature Field Name Description Saturation Cyan Min Offset 0x0025 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Minimum allowed integer value for the saturation cyan value setting Field Name Description Saturation Cyan Max Offset 0x0026 Size 1 Byte
283. nd so on On the fourth cycle the pixel values refer to line B The first pixel has a green value of 1 the second pixel has a blue value of 1 the third pixel has a green value of 2 the fourth pixel has a blue value of 2 the fifth pixel has a green value of 3 the sixth pixel has a blue value of 3 and so on The following lines are generated in an analogous way On the 511th cycle the pixel values refer to line A The first pixel has a red value of 255 the second pixel has a green value of 255 the third pixel has a red value of 0 the fourth pixel has a green value of 0 the fifth pixel has a red value of 1 the sixth pixel has a green value of 1 and so on On the 512th cycle the pixel values refer to line B The first pixel has a green value of 255 the second pixel has a blue value of 255 the third pixel has a green value of 0 the fourth pixel has a blue value of 0 the fifth pixel has a green value of 1 the sixth pixel has a blue value of 1 and so on Basler sprint Color Cameras 193 Features AW00069909000 GB 0 BB 0 GB 1 BB 1 GB 2 BB 2 GA 2 BB 3 GA 3 BB 4 Raw Line A First and Enhanced Raw Line A First Raw Line B First and Enhanced Raw Line B First Fig 73 Pixel Values in the Upper Left Corner of Test Image Two Generated with a Raw or Enhanced Raw Line Acquisition Mode E p T ZG zt sl b Gray P x od x udi p P4 Level ux of zf H P
284. ne Acquisition Modes AW00069909000 ExSync Cycle 4 A4 Image of point 4 acquired by line A Drawing not to scale BUFFER Line B mines Object Passing Camera Movement 9 Point 1 Point 2 Point 3 Point 4 Fig 32 Raw Line B First Line Acquisition ExSync Cycle 4 64 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Line Acquisition Modes Before transmission the pixel values are arranged inside the camera in this sequence Line A pixel value red of pixel 1 RA1 pixel value green of pixel 2 GA2 pixel value red of pixel 3 RA3 pixel value green of pixel 4 GA4 and so on Line B pixel value green of pixel 1 GB1 pixel value blue of pixel 2 BB2 pixel value green of pixel 3 GB3 pixel value blue of pixel 4 BB4 and so on The pixel values are transmitted from the camera according to the selected video data output mode using a specific bit depth and number of taps For information about the available video data output modes the assignment of the pixel values to the individual taps and timing details of the data transmission see Section 3 3 2 1 on page 65 For information about bit assignments see Section 5 2 on page 118 3 3 2 1 Pixel Value Transmission for the Raw Line B First Line Acquisition Mode For the Raw Line B First line acquisition mode you can select a 2 4 or 8 tap video output mode for transmitti
285. ne stamp mode 0x00 Line stamp off 0x01 Line stamp on See Section 6 8 on page 206 for more information about the line stamp feature Basler sprint Color Cameras 273 Configuring the Camera AW00069909000 Line Stamp Low Pixel Threshold CSR Register Base Address 0x2B20 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Low Pixel Threshold Offset 0x0001 Size 2 Bytes Type Read Write Description Writing an integer to this field sets the low pixel threshold for the line stamp feature The set low pixel threshold will apply to all colors When the camera is set for 8 bit output you should set the low pixel threshold within a range from 0 0x0000 to 255 OxO0FF When the camera is set for 10 bit output you should set the low pixel threshold within a range from 0 0x0000 to 1023 Ox03FF When the camera is set for 12 bit output you should set the low pixel threshold within a range from 0 0x0000 to 4095 OxOFFF The 2 bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the low pixel threshold Byte 2 High byte of the low pixel threshold See Section 6 8 on page 206 for more information about the
286. ng pixel data at bit depths of 8 10 or 12 Not all camera models support 4 or 8 tap video data output mode Not all combinations of video data output modes and bit depths are available For information about the available video data output modes and bit depths for your camera model see Section 5 1 on page 115 The Raw Line B First line acquisition mode provides a frame valid FVAL signal which indicates line B in a sequence of consecutive lines being transmitted When the frame valid signal goes high the line being transmitted will include pixel data from line B with green and blue pixel values And the next line transmitted will include pixel data from line A The length of the frame valid signal can be set to multiples of two If for examples the length is set to two the FVAL signal will go low after two lines have been transmitted if the length is set to four the FVAL signal will go low after four lines have been transmitted and so on If the length is set to zero the FVAL signal will stay low throughout For information about setting the frame valid signal for the number of lines it will stay high see page 245 The assignment of pixel data bits to output ports depends on the video data output mode of the camera The video data output modes and the bit assignments are explained in detail in Section 5 on page 115 The bit assignments comply with the Camera Link standard The tables also show the assignmen
287. not open the camera housing Do not open the housing Touching internal components may damage them Keep foreign matter outside of the camera Be careful not to allow liquid flammable or metallic material inside of the camera housing If operated with any foreign matter inside the camera may fail or cause a fire Electromagnetic fields Do not operate the camera in the vicinity of strong electromagnetic fields Avoid electrostatic charging Transportation Transport the camera in its original packaging only Do not discard the packaging Cleaning Avoid cleaning the surface of the camera s sensor if possible If you must clean it use a soft lint free cloth dampened with a small quantity of high quality window cleaner Because electrostatic discharge can damage the sensor you must use a cloth that will not generate static during cleaning cotton is a good choice To clean the surface of the camera housing use a soft dry cloth To remove severe stains use a soft cloth dampened with a small quantity of neutral detergent then wipe dry Do not use solvents or thinners to clean the housing they can damage the surface finish Read the manual Read the manual carefully before using the camera 24 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Physical Interface 2 Physical Interface This section describes the camera s physical interface It includes details about connections input signals and output signals It also i
288. ntrol register to store the settings from the current work configuration set in a named file For sprint cameras there are two types of bulk data configuration sets and shading values There is a separate bulk data control and status register for each type of bulk data The configuration set bulk data CSR is used to work with configuration sets the shading value CSR is used to work with shading values By writing to fields within a bulk data CSR you can do things such as saving a block of bulk data to a file in the non volatile memory copying a saved bulk data file from the camera to a PC and creating a list of existing saved bulk data files Section 7 2 3 4 on page 286 lists the bulk data CSRs and provides a general description of the use of each field within the registers The best way to understand the use of the bulk data CSRs is to read about the different tasks that you can perform with them Section 7 2 3 1 on page 281 describes the tasks and procedures that are normally performed by manipulating the Configuration Set Bulk Data CSR Section 7 2 3 2 on page 282 describes the tasks and procedures that are normally performed by manipulating the Shading Values Bulk Data CSR 280 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Configuring the Camera 7 2 3 1 Using the Configuration Set Bulk Data CSR Saving the Work Configuration Set to a User Set File As described in Section 6 15 on page 226 the work configuration set resides in the camera
289. o and yellow will not be present in the image Setting the value to greater than 64 will increase the saturation If for example the value is set to 128 the saturation of yellow will be doubled See Section 6 6 1 on page 179 for more information about the color adjustment feature Field Name Saturation Yellow Min Description Offset 0x0011 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Minimum allowed integer value for the saturation yellow value setting Field Name Saturation Yellow Max Description Offset 0x0012 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Maximum allowed integer value for the saturation yellow value setting 266 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Configuring the Camera Register Base Address 0x4400 Field Name Saturation Yellow Increment Offset 0x0013 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description An integer value indicating the increment for the saturation yellow value setting Field Name Hue Yellow Status Offset 0x0014 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of the hue adjustment for yellow 0x00 The adjustment is not available 0x01 The adjustment is available and all related settings are OK Field Name Hue Yellow Value Offset 0x0015 Size 1 Byte Type Read Write Description Writing an integer to this field sets the hue value of yellow for predominantly yellow colors in the image The hue yellow value can be set to a minimu
290. o monitor the temperature of the imaging sensor The camera also has imaging sensor overtemperature protection If the temperature of the camera s imaging sensor rises above 75 C an overtemperature condition will be detected and the circuitry for the imaging sensor will switch off In this situation you will still be able to communicate with the camera and the camera will still be able to transmit test images however no live images can be generated The imaging sensor circuitry will remain off until its temperature falls below 60 C Once the sensor temperature falls below 60 C the error condition will clear and the camera will begin to operate normally You can check to see if the camera has detected an overtemperature condition with the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary read commands from within your own application to read the camera s inquiry registers With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 234 you use the Overtemperature parameter in the Camera Information parameters group to determine if an overtemperature condition has been detected If the value is 1 an overtemperature condition is present By Reading Inquiry Registers You check for an overtemperature condition by reading the value of bit 20 in the Camera Status field of the Camera Status Inquiry Register see page 238 If the bit is set to 1 an overtemperature condition is present See Section 7 2 1 on page 236 for an explanation of
291. o the Mode field of the Line Acquisition Mode CSR see page 244 Section 7 2 2 on page 242 explains CSRs and Section 7 3 1 on page 289 explains using read write commands Basler sprint Color Cameras 41 Line Acquisition Modes AW00069909000 3 2 RGB Line Acquisition Mode The RGB line acquisition mode provides RGB pixel values of virtual pixels see below based on red green and blue pixel values of the individual pixels of the sensor line acquisition mode is 1024 pixels for a 2k camera 2048 pixels for a 4k camera Using virtual pixels the effective maximum resolution of a line of a camera in RGB and 4096 pixels for an 8k camera For imaging a sensor is used where each individual pixel is covered by a filter that allows light of only one color red green or blue to strike the pixel The pixel values acquired by line A will be red and green values and the pixel values acquired by line B will be green and blue values For more information about color creation and about the assignment of the colors to the individual pixels of the sensor see Section 1 6 on page 20 neighboring green pixels are averaged across both lines make sure to move the image of the object by 20 um between two successive exposures For details of how to relate the extent of the image movement to the extent of the object movement see Section 3 5 3 on page 95 D Since lines A and B are exposed at the same time and since th
292. o things It copies the values from the file into the camera s volatile memory This means that the values will now be actively used by the camera It creates a link to the activated file If the camera is reset or if it is powered off and then back on the shading values from the activated file will be loaded into volatile memory of the camera and actively used by the camera when shading correction is enabled As an example assume that you have generated user shading values and that you want to activate the user shading values file To do so you would follow this procedure 1 Use a binary write command to write the file name UserShading to the Name field of the shad ing value bulk data CSR see page 287 2 Use a binary write command to set the value of the Control field in the shading value bulk data CSR to 0x05 Setting the value to 0x05 initiates an activate function This procedure would find the Usershading file in the non volatile memory and would copy the values in the file into the camera s volatile memory It would also create a link to the file so that the values in the file would be loaded into volatile memory after a reset or a power up If you want to activate the factory shading value file you would following a similar procedure but use FactoryShading as the file name Sample code that illustrates how to activate a saved bulk data file is available from Basler see Section 7 4 on page 296 Copying the Factory Shading Values Fil
293. ode was selected relieving oneself of handling dummy data which are transmitted in the 2 tap 4 tap and 8 tap output modes Test images generated with the Raw or Enhanced Raw line acquisition modes see Chapter 3 3 on page 50 and Chapter 3 4 on page 69 will discriminate between sensor lines A and B will be characterized by the sequence of transmission of lines A and B A first B second or B first A second Basler sprint Color Cameras 189 Features AW00069909000 Enabling Test Images You can enable a test image with the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary write commands from within your own application to set the camera s control and status registers CSRs With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 234 you use the Test Image Mode parameter in the Output Mode parameters group to enable a test image By Setting CSRs You enable a test image by writing the appropriate value to the Mode field of the Test Image Mode CSR see page 273 See Section 7 2 2 on page 242 for an explanation of CSRs and Section 7 3 1 on page 289 for an explanation of using read write commands 190 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Features 6 7 1 Test Image Two Moving Gray Gradient 6 7 1 1 Test Image Two Generated with the RGB Line Acquisition Mode When the camera is set for RGB line acquisition mode see Section 3 2 on page 42 and test image two a test image is formed with a gray scale gradient When
294. of Programmed Time Frame Valid FVAL Length 2 Line Valid Data Valid Pixel Clock DO Pixel Data 12 10 or 8 bits D1 Pixel Data 12 10 or 8 bits D2 Pixel Data 12 10 or 8 bits D3 Pixel Data 12 10 or 8 bits D 3 el B Frame Valid Delay see Table 24 and Table 25 _ I Frame Valid Delay see Table 24 and Table 25 EM l i 0 050 us for 40 MHz Camera Link clock cycle 0 025 us for 80 MHz clock cycle Ld L E E EC MAT Wu OOOOG6G06G00OCOO 09900c0 OOOO 09900OOO066 0e90000 OOOOG6G0 600COOe oeeooco OOOO o e9oCCOO66 0eeo00cO Timing diagrams are not to scale N At full resolution N 4096 on 4k models and 2048 on 2k models If the AOI feature is used N will be determined by the AOI settings Fig 34 Four Tap Mode with Edge Level Controlled or Programmed Exposure Raw Line B First Basler sprint Color Cameras 67 Line Acquisition Modes 8 Tap Output Mode ExSync Signal Or End of Programmed Time Frame Valid FVAL Length 2 Line Valid Data Valid Pixel Clock DO Pixel Data 8 bits D1 Pixel Data 8 bits D2 Pixel Data 8 bits D3 Pixel Data 8 bits D4 Pixel Data 8 bits D5 Pixel Data 8 bits D6 Pixel Data 8 bits D7 Pixel Data 8 bits e E Frame Valid Delay see Table 35 and Table 36 m Frame Valid Delay see Table 35
295. of the Total High Pixels of the related color The Total High Pixels indicates the number of pixels of the color that are above a camera parameter called the High Pixel Threshold see Section 6 8 3 on page 216 for information about setting this parameter As an example assume that the High Pixel Threshold is set to 200 Also assume that the camera has captured a line and that 56 of the pixels of the related color in that line have a value greater than 200 In this case the Total High Pixels in the line would be 56 The total high pixels does not include any of the 16 added stamp pixels If the AOI feature is being used the total high pixels is based only on the pixels within the AOI 208 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Features Stamp Pixels S11 and S12 Stamp pixels S11 and S12 represent the least significant and most significant bytes respectively of the Total Low Pixels of the related color The Total Low Pixels indicates the number of pixels of the color that are below a camera parameter called the Low Pixel Threshold see Section 6 8 3 on page 216 for information about setting this parameter As an example assume that the Low Pixel Threshold is set to 100 Also assume that the camera has captured a line and that 22 of the pixels of the related color in that line have a value less than 100 In this case the Total Low Pixels in the line would be 22 The total low pixels does not include any of the 16 added stam
296. of a color separation filter above each pixel of the sensor This allows only red green or blue light to strike a pixel Accordingly red R green G and blue B will be the primary colors for representing the colors of an image and R G and B will be the primary colors of the RGB color space This color space includes light with the primary colors R G B and all of their combinations When red green and blue light are combined and when the intensities of R G and B are allowed to vary independently between 0 and 100 all colors within the RGB color space can be formed Combining colored light is referred to as additive mixing When two primary colors are mixed at equal intensities the secondary colors will result The mixing of red and green light produces yellow light Y the mixing of green and blue light produces cyan light C and the mixing of blue and red light produces magenta light M When the three primary colors are mixed at maximum intensities white will result In the absence of light black will result The color space can be represented as a AW00069909000 G Fig 63 RGB Color Cube With YCM Secondary Colors Black and White Projected On a Plane color cube see Figure 63 where the primary colors R G B the secondary colors C M Y and black and white define the corners All shades of gray are represented by the line connecting the black and the white corner 180 Basler sprint Co
297. ol Formula 1 calculates the maximum line rate based on the exposure time 1 Max Lines S gi sure time in s 0000013 Formula 2 calculates the maximum line rate based on the sensor readout time B 160000000 x n Max Lines S ux Seg AOI Pixels 224 Where n 1 if the camera is set for the RGB line acquisition mode see Section 3 2 on page 42 n 2if the camera is set for the Raw or Enhanced Raw line acquisition mode see Chapter 3 3 on page 50 and Chapter 3 4 on page 69 Max Seg AO Pixels is the number of AOI pixels in the segment that contains the most AOI pixels see the explanation of Max Seg AOI Pixels on page 108 for more details Formula 3 calculates the maximum line rate based on the amount of time it takes the camera to process the pixels read out from the sensor PPR Max Lines s AOI Length p Where PPR is the pixel processing rate for your camera model as stated in the table below AO Length is the length of the AOI based on the current AOI length setting see Section 6 3 on page 163 p 0 if the line stamp feature is not enabled see Section 6 8 on page 206 p 16 when the line stamp feature is enabled Basler sprint Color Cameras Model PPR Model PPR SpL2048 39kc 80000000 spL4096 39kc 160000000 SpL2048 70kc 145000000 spL4096 70kc 290000000 Model PPR SpL8192 39kc 320000000 Exposure Start and Exposure Time Control AW00069909000 Formula 4 calculates the max
298. or the camera and a typical implementation for a full configuration frame grabber For more information about how the pixel data captured by the camera is assigned to the camera s transmitter s see Chapter 5 on page 115 Basler sprint Color Cameras 33 AW00069909000 Physical Interface l pug aay juuds eoejieju JeqqeJc eujeJ eyeure G 61 s Wa G1 i FT IS apezd v y eunyequiw o1 51 pejeuuoo JON v m em Am ecm peie
299. ot available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Absolute Offset Offset 0x0001 Size 4 Bytes Type Read Write Description Writing a floating point value to this field directly sets the offset in DN digital numbers For example if you set this value to 5 00 you would increase the digital values output from the camera by 5 The allowed range for the absolute offset can vary depending on how the camera is configured You should check the absolute min and absolute max fields of this register to determine the allowed range with the current configuration The increment is 0 01 The value in this field is a standard IEEE 754 single precision 32 bit floating point number See Section 6 1 on page 155 for more information about offset Field Name Absolute Min Offset 0x0005 Size 4 Bytes Type Read only Description Minimum allowed floating point value for the absolute offset setting The value in this field is a standard IEEE 754 single precision 32 bit floating point number Field Name Absolute Max Offset 0x0009 Size 4 Bytes Type Read only Description Maximum allowed floating point value for the absolute offset setting The value in this field is a standard IEEE 754 single precision 32 bit floating point number 252 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Configuring the Camera Field Name Raw Offset Offset 0
300. otal will be divided by 2 and rounded up if necessary The averaged green values will be used as the green pixel value of virtual pixel 2 GAV2 The blue value for pixel 4 in line B BB4 will be left unchanged and will be used as the blue pixel value of virtual pixel 2 B2 And so on In this way RGB data of virtual pixels of the size of 20 um x 20 um are created Each virtual pixel involves lines A and B and includes four neighboring pixels one red pixel one blue pixel and two green pixels whose pixel values are averaged Virtual Virtual Virtual Virtual pixel 1 pixel 2 pixel 3 pixel N 2 Line A Fig 16 Virtual Pixels of the RGB Line Acquisition Mode The pixel values are arranged inside the camera in this sequence red pixel value of virtual pixel 1 R1 averaged green pixel value of virtual pixel 1 GAV1 blue pixel value of virtual pixel 1 B1 red pixel value of virtual pixel 2 R2 averaged green pixel value of virtual pixel 2 GAV2 and so on The pixel values are transmitted from the camera according to the selected video data output mode using a specific bit depth and number of taps For information about the available video data output modes the assignment of the pixel values to the individual taps and timing details of the data transmission see Section 3 2 1 on page 44 For information about bit assignments see Section 5 2 on page 118 Basler sprint Color Cameras 43 Line Acquis
301. ow line rate compensation repeatedly reads out the sensor and discards the pixel data to ensure that a completely read out sensor is present before each line acquisition This is a prerequisite for optimum image quality By default the low line rate compensation is enabled When low line rate compensation is enabled low line rate compensation will automatically operate when low line acquisition rates are entered At higher line rates low line rate compensation does not operate When low line rate compensation operates a low line rate compensation delay of 14 2 us precedes each line acquisition in addition to exposure start delay The low line rate compensation starts and stops at different line rates When low line rate gives way to a high line rate the low line rate compensation stops at a line rate of 3 906 Hz 256 ms line period Note that only the first line acquisition of the series acquired at a line rate above 3 906 Hz will be affected by the low line rate compensation delay When low line rate is entered from a high line rate the low line rate compensation starts at a line rate of 1 953 Hz 512 ms line period For more information about configuring the low line rate compensation feature see Low Line Rate Compensation CSR on page 245 Low line rate compensation is only available for ExSync controlled operation but not for free run controlled operation where relatively high line rates are used 102 Basler s
302. p pixels If the AOI feature is being used the total low pixels is based only on the pixels within the AOI The total high pixel and total low pixel values are useful if you want to perform automatic gain control from within your camera control software application If you find that the total low pixel values are increasing over a period of time an increase in the gain setting would be appropriate If you find that the total high pixel values are increasing over a period of time a decrease in the gain setting would be appropriate Stamp Pixels 13 S14 15 and S16 Stamp pixels 13 S14 S15 and S16 represent the least significant lower middle upper middle and most significant bytes respectively of the line contrast The line contrast is the sum of the difference in pixel values for each pair of successive pixels in the line for the related color For example for the red pixel values acquired with the RGB line acquisition mode pairs of neighboring pixels are considered And e g for the red pixel values acquired with a Raw or Enhanced Raw line acquisition mode pairs of successive odd numbered pixels from line A are considered In mathematical terms the line contrast is expressed in the following ways Line contrast for each color acquired with the RGB line acquisition mode The pixel values refer to virtual pixels last pixel in AOI 1 Line Contrast gt Pixel Value 4 Pixel Value i first pixel in AOI Line cont
303. pdated to reflect limitations caused by the way any related features are set The 2 bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the max value Byte 2 High byte of the max value Field Name Increment Offset 0x0007 Size 2 Bytes Type Read only Description An integer value indicating the increment for the AOI length setting The 2 bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the increment Byte 2 High byte of the increment Basler sprint Color Cameras 261 Configuring the Camera AW00069909000 Shading Mode CSR Register Base Address 0x2000 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Mode Offset 0x0001 Size 1 Byte Type Read Write Description Writing an integer to this field sets the shading correction mode 0x00 Shading correction disabled 0x01 Enable DSNU shading correction only 0x02 Enable PRNU shading correction only 0x03 Enable DSNU and PRNU shading correction See Section 6 4 on page 165 for more information about the shading correction feature Shading Value Generate CSR Register Base Address 0x2100 Field Name Register Status Offset
304. plus the additional delay For information about the FVAL Lenght parameter see Section 2 8 1 on page 36 118 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Video Data Output Modes 5 2 1 2 Tap Output Modes 2 Tap 12 Bit Output Mode In 2 tap 12 bit mode on each pixel clock cycle the camera transmits data for two pixels at 12 bit depth a line valid bit and a data valid bit In the Raw and Enhanced Raw line acquisition modes the camera also transmits a frame valid bit unless the FVAL Length parameter is set to zero For more information about the frame valid bit see Section 2 8 1 on page 36 In the 2 tap output modes the camera uses the output ports on Camera Link Transmitter X to transmit pixel data a frame valid bit in the Raw and Enhanced Raw line acquisition modes only a line valid bit a data valid bit and a pixel clock The assignment of the bits to the output ports on Camera Link Transmitter X is as shown in Table 12 on page 121 The Camera Link clock is used to time the transmission of acquired pixel data As shown in Figure 17 on page 45 Figure 26 on page 57 and Figure 42 on page 79 the camera samples and transmits data on each rising edge of the clock The Camera Link pixel clock frequency is as stated in Section 2 8 5 on page 38 The frame valid bit indicates that line A is being transmitted in the Raw Line A First and in the Enhanced Raw Line A First B Delayed line acquisition modes only The line valid bit in
305. print Color Cameras AW00069909000 Exposure Start and Exposure Time Control 4 1 4 Guidelines When Using an ExSync Signal When using an ExSync signal to control exposure several general guidelines must be followed The ExSync signal must toggle In order for the camera to detect a transition from low to high the ExSync signal must be held high for at least 1 3 us when the camera is set for the level controlled exposure mode and for at least 100 ns when the camera is set for programmable or edge controlled exposure mode The ExSync signal must be held low for at least 2 0 us In ExSync edge controlled mode The actual exposure time line period 1 8 us 100 ns In the ExSync programmable mode The maximum allowed programmed exposure time line period 1 3 us 100 ns If you set the exposure time to be longer than this allowed maximum the camera will use the set exposure time and will ignore the new ExSync signal s while exposure proceeds The line rate will accordingly be decreased Exposure Start Delay In the ExSync edge controlled and ExSync programmable exposure modes there is a slight delay between the rise of the ExSync signal and the actual start of exposure In the ExSync level controlled mode there is a slight delay between the fall of the ExSync signal and the actual start of exposure This delay is commonly referred to as an exposure start delay The exposure start delay for each mode is as shown in the tab
306. ptical components including a UNIFOC 76 helical mount an M39 x 26 tpi adapter and an Apo Componon 4 5 90 lens by Schneider Kreuznach The UNIFOC 76 helical mount allows adjusting its extension over a range of 25 7 mm The assembly shown in Figure 2 as an example is adjusted for a magnification of 1 0 3 The overall length of the adjusted assemblage including the camera with connectors is ca 169 6 mm Taking account of the working distance of the Apo Componon 4 5 90 lens of ca 362 mm the overall distance between the imaged object and the camera s back with connectors is ca 531 6 mm Contact Basler technical support for choosing the optimum lens If you want to use a magnification higher than 1 3 Apo Componon 4 5 90 lens UNIFOC 76 helical mount M39 x 26 tpi adapter M58 x 0 75 V Basler lens mount Camera Photosensitive surface of the CMOS sensor M39 x 26 tpi V Basler V mount mount M58 mount mount e D 9 a lt gt fl fie jg 17 1 44 0 55 15 min 40 8 max 66 5 lt 114 Drawing not to scale Fig 2 Using the M58 x 0 75 V Basler Lens Mount Distances in mm Basler sprint Color Cameras 9 Specifications Requirements and Pre
307. r 246 exposure time control modes edge controlled 99 104 level controlled 100 programmable 100 104 ExSync signal 35 99 F firmware version inquiry register 238 four tap video data output modes 132 FPGA status inquiry register 240 frame valid bit seeusssss 36 frame valid delay 57 151 free run E E 104 FVAL Lengt 2 e 36 FVAL length control and status register 245 G AUN E EEE TE TTET 155 additional color specific 155 159 global teats eee eis 155 159 total lecce ecu 155 159 gain blue control and status register 257 gain control and status register 251 Gain Green 2 feature re 162 gain green 2 control and status register 258 enable CSR 259 gain green control and status register 255 gain red control and status register 254 gamma control and status register 263 gamma correction sesessss 177 314 AW00069909000 H heat dissipation eee 21 helical mount UNIFOC 100 95 V Basler 6 7 UNIFOC 76 sseseeeeeee 9 housing size 2k cameras sss 3 4k cameras sssssesee 4 8k cameras ssssssseee 5 PUG arc TEN 181 humidity iieri 21 l ima
308. r Date Changes Expanded Section 8 1 on page 297 and added Section 8 2 on page 297 describing how to obtain an RMA number Added the parameter error to Section 8 4 2 on page 303 Minor corrections throughout the manual AW00069904000 29 Sep 2009 Updated the telephone number for the European technical support on the contact page Corrected the default setting for cameras with settable clock speed in Section 2 8 5 on page 38 Removed all information related to these cameras throughout the manual spL2048 20kc spL4096 20 kc spL8192 20kc AW00069905000 13 Jul 2010 Updated U S contact address and phone number Updated the camera version ID number in Section 1 1 on page 1 Removed the requirement of a minimum line rate 1 kHz in Section 1 2 on page 2 Changed maximum line rates from 70 kHz to 140 kHz in Section 1 2 on page 2 and Section 4 3 4 on page 114 Added the instruction to have color adjustment enabled for white balance in Section 6 2 on page 159 Added the Gamma Correction section on page 177 Added the Color Adjustment section on page 179 Added the recommendation to generate DSNU and PRNU shading correction values in Section 6 4 5 on page 168 Added the Gamma CSR on page 263 Added the Color Adjustment CSR on page 265 Minor corrections in Section 7 on page 233 AW00069906000 6 Aug 2010 Modified the explanation of color adjustment in Section 6 6 1 2 on page 184 and on page 264
309. r the camera faster than allowed the camera will automatically ignore any trigger signals that would cause a max line rate exceeded condition and this bit will not be Set There is no ExSync signal Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 7 Low line rate compensation activity 1 active O inactive see Section 4 1 3 on page 102 oun c 240 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Configuring the Camera Binary Command Protocol Status Inquiry The camera has been programmed to detect several errors in the format of any binary commands received by the camera When an error condition is detected a flag is set The binary command status inquiry register allows you to read the error flags Register Base Address 0x0C30 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this inquiry register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available Field Name Binary Command Status Offset 0x0001 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description Each bit in this field specifies an error condition see table below Bit O is the least significant bit If a bit is set to 1 the error condition assigned to that bit is present If the bit is set to 0 the error is not present Bit Description 0 A binary command with no BFS was received see Section 7 3 1 on page 289 1 A byte timeout has occurred see Section 7
310. r 8 Tap 8 Bit Port AO TxINO RxOut0 DO Bit 0 Port A1 TxIN1 RxOut1 DO Bit 1 Port A2 TxIN2 RxOut2 DO Bit 2 Port A3 TxIN3 RxOut3 DO Bit 3 Port A4 TxIN4 RxOut4 DO Bit 4 Port A5 TxIN6 RxOut6 DO Bit 5 Port A6 TxIN27 RxOut27 DO Bit 6 Port A7 TxIN5 RxOut5 DO Bit 7 MSB Port BO TxIN7 RxOut7 D1 Bit 0 Port B1 TxIN8 RxOut8 D1 Bit 1 Port B2 TxIN9 RxOut9 D1 Bit2 Port B3 TxIN12 RxOut12 D1 Bit 3 Port B4 TxIN13 RxOut13 D1 Bit4 Port B5 TxIN14 RxOut14 D1 Bit 5 Port B6 TxIN10 RxOut10 D1 Bit 6 Port B7 TxIN11 RxOut11 D1 Bit 7 MSB Port CO TxIN15 RxOut15 D2 Bit 0 Port C1 TxIN18 RxOut18 D2 Bit 1 Port C2 TxIN19 RxOut19 D2 Bit 2 Port C3 TxIN20 RxOut20 D2 Bit 3 Port C4 TxIN21 RxOut21 D2 Bit 4 Port C5 TxIN22 RxOut22 D2 Bit 5 Port C6 TxIN16 RxOut16 D2 Bit 6 Port C7 TxIN17 RxOut17 D2 Bit 7 MSB LVAL TxIN24 RxOut24 Line Valid FVAL TxIN25 RxOut25 Frame Valid DVAL TxIN26 RxOut26 Data Valid Spare TxIN23 RxOut23 Not Used Strobe TxINCLK RxOutClk Pixel Clock Table 31 Bit Assignments for 8 Tap Output Mode MDR Conn 1 Transmitter X Present for the Raw and Enhanced Raw line acquisition modes only 148 AW00069909000 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 MDR Conn 2 Transmitter Y Port Camera Frame Bit Assignment Grabber 8 Tap 8 Bit Port DO TxINO RxOutO D3 Bit 0 Port D1 TxIN1 RxOut1 D3 Bit 1 Port D2 TxIN2 RxOut2 D3 Bit 2 Port D3 TXIN3 RxO
311. r more information about triggering line acquisition and controlling exposure see Section 4 on page 99 To better understand how Raw Line B First line acquisition and object movement relate consider the example that is illustrated in Figure 29 through Figure 32 This example describes Raw Line B First line acquisition when an ExSync signal and the programmable exposure control mode are used The example looks at four contiguous points on an object moving past the camera Each point represents the area on the object that will be captured by one line in the sensor when a line acquisition is performed As you look at the figures notice that on the ExSync cycles where an acquisition is performed line B will capture one point on the object and line A will capture a different point on the object Also notice that on these cycles the pixel data for line B will be transmitted while the pixel data for line A will be buffered On the ExSync cycles where acquisition is not performed the buffered pixel data for line A will be transmitted 60 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Line Acquisition Modes ExSync Cycle 1 B1 Image of point 1 acquired by line B A Drawing not to scale BUFFER A2 Image of point 2 acquired by line A
312. r the related colors This is illustrated in Figure 88 through Figure 90 Stamp pixel values are transmitted on the same taps as the pixel values for the related colors For example when red pixel values R are only transmitted on the DO tap the related stamp pixel values RS will also only be transmitted on the DO tap see Figure 88 through Figure 90 When dummy pixel data are transmitted with the pixel values the stamp pixel values will also be transmitted with dummy pixels in the same transmission pattern see Figure 88 and Figure 90 When the pixel values for two colors alternate on one tap the related stamp pixel values will alternate as well see Figure 90 where red R and blue B pixel values alternate as do the red RS and blue BS stamp pixel values 210 Basler sprint Color Cameras Features AW00069909000 eunsodx3 peuureJ8o4g 10 pejouuoo jaAe7 e6py ym apo 1ndino geq oepiA deL z pue spoyy uonisinboy eur GOH ui uoissiusueJ Jexig dweIS gg i4 sig 8 40 OL z b Byeq Jexid Iq sug 8 10 OL z b eq Jexid od yoold lexid PIIEA eed PIIEA eur oul powwesb e 01d JO pu3 JO jeuDis ou SX3 211 Basler sprint Color Cameras AWO00069909000 Features ainsodxy peuiuej604g 10 paljosjuoD o e 1 96p3 ym apo 1ndino ejeq oepiA de e pue epoyjy uonisinboy eur goH utm uorssiusueJ Jexig duiejs 69 Br Y 1 1 ad 1 Te 003 09 20 005 0 00 93 0 01 93 5 1 Y
313. ra also includes an internal temperature sensor that lets you monitor the temperature of the imaging sensor See Section 6 10 on page 221 for more information Note Keeping the camera cool will give you the best signal to noise ratio When the camera operates hot the signal to noise ratio is reduced Basler sprint Color Cameras 21 Specifications Requirements and Precautions AW00069909000 1 8 Precautions 22 CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION Applying Incorrect Input Power Can Damage the Camera The nominal voltage for the camera power is 12 VDC 10 We do not recommend applying a voltage less than 10 8 VDC or greater than 13 2 VDC The camera has camera power undervoltage protection that is triggered if the input voltage drops below 10 5 VDC It also has camera power overvoltage protection up to 25 VDC See Section 6 11 on page 222 for more detailed information about camera power undervoltage and overvoltage protection Applying a camera power voltage greater than 25 VDC can seriously damage the camera Making or Breaking Connections Incorrectly Can Damage the Camera Be sure that all power to your camera and to your host PC is switched off before you make or break connections to the camera Making or breaking connections when power is on can result in damage to the camera or to the frame grabber If you can t switch off the power be sure that the camera power plug is the last connector that you plug into the camera w
314. rast for the red pixel values RA in Line A and for the green pixel values GB in line B i e for the pixel values of odd numbered pixels in lines A and B acquired with a Raw or Enhanced Raw line acquisition mode last pixel in AOI 2 1 Line Contrast Pixel Values Pixel Values _ 4 i first pixel in AOI 1 2 Line contrast for the green pixels GA in Line A and for the blue pixels BB in line B i e for the pixel values of even numbered pixels in lines A and B acquired with a Raw or Enhanced Raw line acquisition mode Basler sprint Color Cameras 209 Features AW00069909000 last pixel in AOI 2 1 Line Contrast by Pixel Values 427 Pixel Value i first pixel in AOI 1 2 The line contrast does not include any of the 16 added stamp pixels The line contrast is based only on the pixels within the current AOI see Section 6 3 1 on page 164 Line contrast values are useful when you are adjusting the camera s focus Generally the higher the line contrast value the better the focus Generally the contrast value s for green will serve as the best measure of contrast We recommend using the contrast value for red if red predominates in the image and using the contrast value for blue if blue predominates in the image 6 8 1 Line Stamp with RGB Line Acquisition Mode With RGB line acquisition mode the transmission sequence of the stamp pixel values mimics the transmission sequence of the pixel values fo
315. ration If for example the value is set to 128 the saturation of blue will be doubled See Section 6 6 1 on page 179 for more information about the color adjustment feature Field Name Saturation Blue Min Offset 0x002F Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description Minimum allowed integer value for the saturation blue value setting Field Name Saturation Blue Max Offset 0x0030 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description Maximum allowed integer value for the saturation blue value setting Field Name Saturation Blue Increment Offset 0x0031 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description An integer value indicating the increment for the saturation blue value setting Field Name Hue Blue Status Offset 0x0032 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of the hue adjustment for blue 0x00 The adjustment is not available 0x01 The adjustment is available and all related settings are OK Field Name Hue Blue Value Offset 0x0033 Size 1 Byte Type Read Write Description Writing an integer to this field sets the hue value of blue for predominantly blue colors in the image The hue blue value can be set to a minimum of 128 and can be increased to a maximum of 127 If the hue blue value is set to a negative number blue will be mixed with magenta If the hue blue value is set to a positive number blue will be mixed with cyan If the hue blue value is set to 128 corresponding to
316. re 25 This example describes Raw Line A First line acquisition when an ExSync signal and the programmable exposure control mode are used The example looks at four contiguous points on an object moving past the camera Each point represents the area on the object that will be captured by one line in the sensor when a line acquisition is performed As you look at the figures notice that on the ExSync cycles where an acquisition is performed line A will capture one point on the object and line B will capture a different point on the object Also notice that on these cycles the pixel data for line A will be transmitted while the pixel data for line B will be buffered On the ExSync cycles where acquisition is not performed the buffered pixel data for line B will be transmitted Basler sprint Color Cameras 51 Line Acquisition Modes AW00069909000 ExSync Cycle 1 A1 Image of point 1 acquired by line A Drawing not to scale BUFFER B2 Image of point 2 acquired by line B Line B Line A Object Passing Camera X Point 4 44 Movement Point 3 Point 2 Point 1 Fig 22 Raw Line A First Line Acquisition ExSync Cycle 1 52 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Line Acquisition Modes ExSync Cycle 2 B2 Image of point 2 acquired by line B Drawing not to scale BUFFER Line B E Object Passing Camera N Point 4 44 Mo
317. reen pixel values GB are transmitted on all available taps first and the stamp pixel values BS related to the blue pixel values BB are transmitted on all available taps second 214 Basler sprint Color Cameras Features AW00069909000 aunsodxy peuuureJ604g JO pej o41uo o e 1 e6p3 UM po 1ndino eyeq oepiA de z pue ejduiex3 ue se apoy uonisinboy aur jSJl4 V oul Mey peoueuu3 ISJr4 v aur MEY Ul uoissIulsueJ 8xid duels Suq 8 10 OL zL EEEO a a EE E OOO S OG ON O ve ies suq 8 10 TENE ENOT ESOS T OOO E E ETO OEE 940 KJ oa JUUUUUVUUUUYUUUUVUUUUVUUUUVUUUUWUUUUUUUUUUU es pt L m NEN _ m pl eui peuuureJj6 Q o diens TV wa TV a ar Oa a a m jeubis cc NN a n aS ZPO UO I Z L4a a aXzdZiN1Ng D WTMT ou SX3 kink ate Bah oe wt J 2k i ld 215 Basler sprint Color Cameras Features AW00069909000 6 8 3 Enabling and Setting the Line Stamp You can enable and set the stamp feature with the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary write commands from within your own application to set the camera s control and status registers CSRs With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 234 you use the Stamp Mode parameter in the Stamp parameters group to enable the stamp You use the Stamp Low Pixel Threshold parameter and the Stamp High Pixel Threshold parameter to set the low pixel threshold and the high pixel threshold By Setting C
318. ro terminated if less than 20 bytes are needed and unterminated if all 20 bytes are needed Model Information Inquiry Register Base Address 0x0200 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this inquiry register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available Field Name Model Info Offset 0x0001 Size 20 Bytes Type Read only Description String containing the camera s model number The string is zero terminated if less than 20 bytes are needed and unterminated if all 20 bytes are needed 236 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Configuring the Camera Product ID Inquiry Register Base Address 0x0300 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this inquiry register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available Field Name Product ID Offset 0x0001 Size 20 Bytes Type Read only Description String containing the camera s product ID number The string is zero terminated if less than 20 bytes are needed and unterminated if all 20 bytes are needed Serial Number Inquiry Register Base Address 0x0400 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates
319. rol and status register essessssssssse 261 area of interest starting pixel control and status register seeren 260 B base Camera Link configuration 26 33 Bayer filter cererii ee 20 binary command protocol status inquiry register eeen 241 binary read write commands 288 bulk data rettet 280 bulk data registers 235 280 C Cabling 3 5 eio ee b edie 31 calculations design 95 camera configuration tool 234 Camera Link cable 31 Camera Link clock speed 38 Camera Link clock speed control and status register ssesssssussss 243 Camera Link implementation 33 camera pOWer sssssee 32 camera reset control and status register ete ees 278 camera status inquiry register 238 Basler sprint Color Cameras Index camera version inquiry register 237 GT Ae ey Len fits 234 cleaning the camera and sensor 24 cleaning the sensor ssss 24 clock speed Camera Link 38 code samples eeeeesss 296 color Iixing aceti itp UOI IS 180 e rcr A AEE EEE 180 secondary oine aa 180 color adjustment cecen 179 color adjustment control and status register secsec 265 color GUDE eric dels 180 color
320. rol how the feature operates By using binary write commands to write to fields within a feature s CSR s you can change the parameter settings for the feature By using binary read commands you can determine the current setting for the parameters and get information about the feature s status The address for any field within a register is equal to the register base address plus the offset for the field Look at the Video Data Output Mode CSR on page 251 as an example The Mode field of this register has an address of 0x1701 the base address of 0x1700 plus the offset of 0x0001 By writing a value to this address you can set the video data output mode By reading the value at this address you can determine the current output mode setting The Video Data Output Mode CSR is a simple CSR with only two fields Most of the other feature CSRs have several read write fields that let you set the parameters associated with the feature They may also have read only fields that contain information about the minimum and maximum allowed setting for each parameter Section 7 2 2 2 on page 243 lists the feature CSRs in the camera and shows detailed information about the use of each field within the register 7 2 2 4 Raw Value Fields vs Absolute Value Fields As you look through the descriptions of the feature CSRs you will notice that some CSRs have a parameter that can be set by writing a value to a raw field or by writing a value to an absolut
321. rom the camera according to the selected video data output mode using a specific bit depth and number of taps For information about the available video data output modes the assignment of the pixel values to the individual taps and timing details of the data transmission see Section 3 3 1 1 on page 56 For information about bit assignments see Section 5 2 on page 118 3 3 1 1 Pixel Value Transmission for the Raw Line A First Line Acquisition Mode For the Raw Line A First line acquisition mode you can select a 2 4 or 8 tap video output mode for transmitting pixel data at bit depths of 8 10 or 12 Not all camera models support 4 or 8 tap video data output mode Not all combinations of video data output modes and bit depths are available For information about the available video data output modes and bit depths for your camera model see Section 5 1 on page 115 The Raw Line A First line acquisition mode provides a frame valid FVAL signal which indicates line A in a sequence of consecutive lines being transmitted When the frame valid signal goes high the line being transmitted will include pixel data from line A with red and green pixel values And the next line transmitted will include pixel data from line B The length of the frame valid signal can be set to multiples of two If for examples the length is set to two the FVAL signal will go low after two lines have been transmitted if the length is se
322. rs CSRs With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 234 you use the File Name Select parameter and the Copy button in the Shading Files parameters group to copy the data in the factory shading values file to the user shading values file By Setting CSRs You can copy the data in the factory shading values file to the user shading values file by writing values to the shading values bulk data CSR Section 7 2 3 on page 280 explains bulk data CSRs and using the bulk data copy process Section 7 3 1 on page 289 explains using read write commands 174 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Features 6 4 8 Downloading a Shading Values File to Your PC Once you have generated a set of user shading values in the user shading values file as described in Section 6 15 1 on page 228 you can download the user shading values file to your PC You can also download the factory shading values file to your PC Using the download function together with the upload function that is described on the next page is useful if you want to transfer a user shading values file from one camera to another camera of the same type You can download the user or the factory shading values file by using the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary read write commands from within your own application to set the camera s control and status registers CSRs With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 234 you use the File N
323. rs for the 8k Camera Basler sprint 8k cameras feature specific V Basler interfaces which allow connecting to Basler specific adapters Two Basler specific adapters are available UNIFOC 100 95 V Basler helical mount a Basler specific modification of UNIFOC 100 95 of Schneider Kreuznach M58 x 0 75 V Basler lens mount a Basler specific conical tube The choice of a Basler specific adapter further optical components and lens depends e g on the magnification and the working distance required by your application Contact Basler technical support for selecting the Basler specific adapter further optical components and the lens that will best suit your requirements For information about obtaining the UNIFOC 100 95 V Basler helical mount or the M58 x 0 75 V Basler lens mount contact Basler technical support For information about additional optical components and about how to obtain them visit e g the Schneider Kreuznach website www schneiderkreuznach com 6 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions The following sections illustrate how the Basler sprint 8k cameras connect to Basler specific adapters which serve as adapters for further optical components As examples components by Schneider Kreuznach are considered 1 3 2 1 Adapting with the UNIFOC 100 95 V Basler Helical Mount The following example illustrates the use of the UNIFOC 100 95 V Basler helical mount connected
324. s caused by the way that any related features are set The value in this field is a standard IEEE 754 single precision 32 bit floating point number Field Name Raw Exposure Time Offset 0x000D Size 4 Bytes Type Read Write Description Writing an integer value to this field sets the exposure time The allowed range for this value can vary depending on the camera model and how the camera is configured You should check the raw min and raw max fields of this register to determine the allowed range with the current configuration The integer value represents a multiplier and the actual exposure time is equal to the value in this field times 0 1 us For example if the value in this field is set to 1200 then Exposure Time 1200 x 0 1 us Exposure Time 120 us The bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the raw value Byte 2 Mid byte of the raw value Byte 3 High byte of the raw value Byte 4 Always 0 not used Basler sprint Color Cameras 247 Configuring the Camera AW00069909000 Field Name Raw Min Offset 0x0011 Size 4 Bytes Type Read only Description Minimum allowed integer value for the raw exposure time setting This field is updated to reflect limitations caused by the way that any related fields are set The bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the min value Byte 2 Mid byte of the min value Byte 3 High byte of the min value Byte 4 Always 0
325. s set to 1 5259 the gamma correction value will be 1 5259 The value in this field is a standard IEEE 754 single precision 32 bit floating point number See Chapter 6 5 on page 177 for more information about gamma correction Field Name Absolute Min Offset 0x0005 Size 4 Bytes Type Read only Description Minimum allowed floating point value for the absolute gamma setting The value in this field is a standard IEEE 754 single precision 32 bit floating point number Field Name Absolute Max Offset 0x0009 Size 4 Bytes Type Read only Description Maximum allowed floating point value for the absolute gamma setting The value in this field is a standard IEEE 754 single precision 32 bit floating point number Field Name Raw Gamma Offset 0x000D Size 4 Bytes Type Read Write Description Writing an integer value to this field sets the gamma correction value The value represents a multiplier and the actual gamma correction value is equal to the value in this field times 65536 i e 0x10000 For example if the value in this field is set to 2 then Gamma 65536 x 2 Gamma 131072 The bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the raw value Byte 2 Mid byte of the raw value Byte 3 High byte of the raw value Byte 4 Always 0 not used The value in this field is a standard IEEE 754 single precision 32 bit floating point number Field Name Raw Min Offset 0x0011 Size 4 Bytes Type Read
326. s useful for checking the integrity of the data transmitted by the camera If you capture lines and examine the pixel values in the captured lines the values should be exactly as described above Note When the camera is set for an 8 bit output mode the pixel values in test image two range from 0 to 255 as described above If the camera is set for a 10 bit output the pixel values will range from 0 to 1023 If the camera is set for a 12 bit output the pixel values will range from 0 to 4095 192 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Features 6 7 1 2 Test Image Two Generated with the Raw and Enhanced Raw Line Acquisition Modes When the camera is set to a Raw or Enhanced Raw line acquisition mode see Section 3 3 on page 50 and Section 3 4 on page 69 and test image two a test image is formed with a gray scale gradient When e g an 8 bit output mode is selected the gray scale gradient ranges from 0 to 255 and repeats every 512 pixels as shown in Figure 74 The odd lines in the test image refer to the sensor lines transmitted first by the selected line acquisition mode and the even lines refer to the sensor lines transmitted second see Section 1 6 on page 20 In Raw Line A First and Enhanced Raw Line A First line acquisition mode line A is transmitted first and line B second Accordingly the odd lines in the test image refer to lines A and the even lines refer to lines B In Raw Line B First and Enhanced Raw Line
327. s when power is on can result in damage to the camera or to the CAUTION frame grabber If you can t switch off the power be sure that the camera power plug is the last connector that you plug into the camera when making connections and the first connector that you unplug from the camera when breaking connections 32 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Physical Interface 2 6 Camera Link Implementation The camera uses National Semiconductor DS90CR287 devices as Camera Link transmitters For the Camera Link receivers on your frame grabber we recommend that you use the National Semiconductor DS90CR288 the National Semiconductor DS90CR288A or an equivalent Detailed data sheets for these components are available at the National Semiconductor web site www national com The data sheets contain all of the information that you need to implement Camera Link including application notes The camera uses a National Semiconductor D890LV048A and a DS90LVO12 differential line receiver to receive the RS 644 camera control input signals and the serial communication input signal defined in the Camera Link specification A DS90LV011 differential line transmitter is used to transmit the serial communication output signal defined in the specification Detailed spec sheets for these devices are available at the National Semiconductor web site www national com All camera models have one MDR connector MDR connector 1 see Table 4 and Figure 13 on
328. second cycle the pixel values refer to line B The first pixel has a green value GB of 0 the second pixel has a blue value BB of 0 the third pixel has a green value of 1 the fourth pixel has a blue value of 0 the fifth pixel has a green value of 2 the sixth pixel has a blue value of 0 and so on The following odd lines are identical to the first line The following even lines are identical to the second line Basler sprint Color Cameras 201 Features AW00069909000 RA 0 GA 0 RA 0 GA 1 RA 0 GA 2 GB 0 BB 0 GB 1 BB 0 GB 2 BB 0 GB 0 BB 0 GB 1 BB 0 GB 2 BB 0 RA 0 GA 1 co on RA 0 GA 2 GB 0 BB 0 GB 1 BB 0 GB 2 BB 0 GB 0 BB 0 RA 0 GA 0 RA 0 GA 2 Raw Line A First and Enhanced Raw Line A First Raw Line B First and Enhanced Raw Line B First Fig 82 Pixel Values in the Upper Left Corner of Test Image Eight Generated with a Raw or Enhanced Raw Line Acquisition Mode 255 Gray Level 1 512 1024 1536 2048 2560 3072 3584 4096 Pixel Number Fig 83 Gray Scale Gradients for Test Image Eight for 8 bit Output Modes Formed by the Green Pixels and Generated with a Raw or Enhanced Raw Line Acquisition Mode on a Camera with 4096 Pixels Per Line Fig 84 Test Image Eight for 8 bit Output Modes Generated with a Raw or Enhanced Raw Line Acquisition Mode on a Camera with 4096 Pixels Per Line 202 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Features
329. see Table 35 and Table 36 Or End of e Programmed Time Line Valid Delay see Table 35 and Table 36 I E M 4 Line Valid 1 E MM XO XxuuWu _ _ oj Data Vaid 7 ee JUV UUUU UU UU UU UU Clock DO Pixel Data 8 bits D1 Pixel Data 8 bits D2 Pixel Data 8 bits D3 Pixel Data 8 bits D4 Pixel Data 8 bits D5 Pixel Data 8 bits D6 Pixel Data 8 bits D7 Pixel Data 8 bits Timing diagrams are not to scale N At full resolution virtual pixels N 4096 on the 8k model 2048 on 4k models and 1024 on 2k mod els If the AOI feature is used N will be determined by the AOI settings Fig 21 Eight Tap Mode with Edge Level Controlled or Programmed Exposure RGB Dummy data are transmitted on the D3 and D7 taps Basler sprint Color Cameras 49 Line Acquisition Modes AW00069909000 3 3 Raw Line Acquisition Mode The Raw line acquisition mode provides either a raw red a raw green or a raw blue pixel value for each point of an imaged object For imaging a sensor is used where each individual pixel is covered by a filter that allows light of only one color red green or blue to strike the pixel The pixel values transmitted from line A will be red and green values and the pixel values transmitted from line B will be green and blue values For more information about color creation and a
330. set 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Absolute Gain Green 2 Offset 0x0001 Size 4 Bytes Type Read Write Description Writing a floating point value to this field sets the gain for the green pixels in line B in dB The value in this field is a standard IEEE 754 single precision 32 bit floating point number See Section 6 2 on page 159 for more information about gain green Field Name Absolute Min Offset 0x0005 Size 4 Bytes Type Read only Description Minimum allowed floating point value for the absolute gain green 2 setting The value in this field is a standard IEEE 754 single precision 32 bit floating point number Field Name Absolute Max Offset 0x0009 Size 4 Bytes Type Read only Description Maximum allowed floating point value for the absolute gain green 2 setting The value in this field is a standard IEEE 754 single precision 32 bit floating point number Field Name Raw Gain Green 2 Offset 0x000D Size 2 Bytes Type Read Write Description Writing an integer value to this field sets the gain for the green pixels in line B The dB of gain green 2 that the camera will achieve at a given setting is determined by the formula shown in Section 6
331. signment of the colors to the individual pixels of the sensor see Section 1 6 on page 20 When the Enhanced Raw line acquisition mode is active both lines of the sensor are exposed at the same time With each ExSync cycle however the pixel data of only one line are transmitted and therefore two ExSync cycles are required to transmit the pixel data of each exposure the object twice Therefore make sure to move the image of the object by 10 jum The Enhanced Raw line acquisition modes are designed for imaging each point of between two successive exposures For details of how to relate the extent of the image movement to the extent of the object movement see Section 3 5 3 on page 95 line acquisition modes in an alternating fashion when the imaged object moves in You can use the Enhanced Raw Line A First and Enhanced Raw Line B First opposite directions Basler sprint Color Cameras 69 Line Acquisition Modes AW00069909000 3 4 1 Enhanced Raw Line A First B Delayed Line Acquisition Mode The Enhanced Raw Line A First B Delayed line acquisition mode is analogous to the Enhanced Raw Line B First A Delayed line acquisition mode see Section 3 4 2 on page 82 with the roles of lines A and B interchanged In the Enhanced Raw Line A First line acquisition mode the two lines which include pixel data from the same area of the object are transmitted immediately one after the other The pixel dat
332. sion begins the line valid and data valid bits both become high Six data streams DO through D5 are transmitted in parallel on this clock cycle On this clock cycle data stream DO will transmit data for pixel 1 in the line Data stream D1 will transmit data for pixel 2 Data stream D2 will transmit data for pixel 3 Data stream D3 will transmit data for pixel 4 Data stream D4 will transmit data for pixel 5 And data stream D5 will transmit data for pixel 6 Depending on the video data output mode selected the pixel data will be at 8 bit depth On the next cycle of the pixel clock the line valid and data valid bits will both be high On this clock cycle data stream DO will transmit data for pixel 7 in the line Data stream D1 will transmit data for pixel 8 Data stream D2 will transmit data for pixel 9 Data stream D3 will transmit data for pixel 10 Data stream D4 will transmit data for pixel 11 And data stream D5 will transmit data for pixel 12 On the next cycle of the pixel clock the line valid and data valid bits will be high On this clock cycle data stream DO will transmit data for pixel 13 in the line Data stream D1 will transmit data for pixel 14 Data stream D2 will transmit data for pixel 15 Data stream D3 will transmit data for pixel 16 Data stream D4 will transmit data for pixel 17 And data stream D5 will transmit data for pixel 18 This pattern will continue until all of the pixel data for the line has been transmitted Aft
333. sler sprint Color Cameras 233 Configuring the Camera AW00069909000 7 1 Configuring the Camera with the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT The Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT is a Windows based program used to easily change the camera s parameter settings The CCT is especially useful during initial camera testing and the camera design in process The CCT communicates via the RS 644 serial connection that is integrated into the Camera Link interface between the frame grabber and the camera The tool automatically generates the binary programming commands that are described in Section 7 2 on page 235 The Installation and Setup Guide for Camera Link Cameras includes detailed information about installing the CCT and includes instructions that describe how to use the CCT to change the camera s parameters The guide is available in the downloads section of the Basler website www baslerweb com Note In demo mode the CCT does not cover the full fuctionality of the camera We therefore recommend not to use the CCT in demo mode 234 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Configuring the Camera 7 2 Configuring the Camera By Setting Registers The camera has blocks of mapped memory space known as registers By reading values from the registers you can determine basic information about the camera and information about the camera s current parameter settings By writing values to the registers you can set camera paramet
334. st a color the colors on each side of it in the color hexagon will also be affected to some degree For example when you adjust red yellow and magenta will also be affected In the color hexagon the adjustment of hue can be considered as a rotation between hues Primary colors can be rotated towards and as far as their neighboring secondary colors Secondary colors can be rotated towards and as far as their neighboring primary colors Example When red is rotated in negative direction towards yellow then for example purple in the image can be changed to red and red in the image can be changed to orange Red can be rotated as far as yellow where red will be completely transformed into yellow Adjusting saturation changes the colorfulness intensity of a color Example If saturation for red is increased the colorfulness for red colors in the image will increase If red is set to minimum saturation red will be replaced by gray for red colors in the image Basler sprint Color Cameras 181 Features AW00069909000 You can set the hue and saturation adjustment either with the CCT Camera Configuration Tool Plus or by using binary write commands to set the camera s control and status register CSRs With CCT Color Adjustment group With CSRs Used for Hue Color Name parameter Hue Color Name field Hue adjustment of the selected primary or secondary color Saturation Color Name parameter
335. sure on both lines in the sensor The exposure time you are using will apply to both lines time the start of pixel data readout for both lines time the start of transmission of line B pixel data The values from line A are held in a buffer in the camera Their output will be delayed until the sixth cycle of the ExSync signal The fourth cycle of the ExSync signal will time the start of transmission of line A pixel data This data was acquired on the first ExSync cycle and relates to the data from line B that was transmitted on the preceding ExSync cycle i e the third cycle No exposure will occur 82 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Line Acquisition Modes The fifth cycle of the ExSync signal will trigger the start of image acquisition i e exposure on both lines in the sensor The exposure time you are using will apply to both lines time the start of pixel data readout for both lines time the start of transmission of line B pixel data The values from line A are held in a buffer in the camera Their output will be delayed until the eighth cycle of the ExSync signal The sixth cycle of the ExSync signal will time the start of transmission of line A pixel data This data was acquired on the third ExSync cycle and relates to the data from line B that was transmitted on the preceding ExSync cycle i e the fifth cycle No exposure will occur And so on Note that the pixel data from line B transmitted on the third
336. t Port AO TxINO RxOutO DO Bit 0 DO Bit 0 Port A1 TxIN1 RxOut1 DO Bit 1 DO Bit 1 Port A2 TxIN2 RxOut2 DO Bit 2 DO Bit 2 Port A3 TxIN3 RxOut3 DO Bit 3 DO Bit 3 Port A4 TxIN4 RxOut4 DO Bit 4 DO Bit 4 Port A5 TxIN6 RxOut6 DO Bit 5 DO Bit 5 Port A6 TxIN27 RxOut27 DO Bit 6 DO Bit 6 Port A7 TxIN5 RxOut5 DO Bit 7 DO Bit 7 MSB Port BO TxIN7 RxOut7 DO Bit 8 D1 Bit O Port B1 TxIN8 RxOut8 DO Bit 9 MSB D1 Bit 1 Port B2 TxIN9 RxOut9 Not Used D1 Bit 2 Port B3 TxIN12 RxOut12 Not Used D1 Bit 3 Port B4 TxIN13 RxOut13 D2 Bit 8 D1 Bit 4 Port B5 TxIN14 RxOut14 D2 Bit 9 MSB D1 Bit 5 Port B6 TxIN10 RxOut10 Not Used D1 Bit 6 Port B7 TxIN11 RxOut11 Not Used D1 Bit 7 MSB Port CO TxIN15 RxOut15 D2 Bit 0 D2 Bit 0 Port C1 TxIN18 RxOut18 D2 Bit 1 D2 Bit 1 Port C2 TxIN19 RxOut19 D2 Bit 2 D2 Bit 2 Port C3 TxIN20 RxOut20 D2 Bit 3 D2 Bit 3 Port C4 TxIN21 RxOut21 D2 Bit 4 D2 Bit 4 Port C5 TxIN22 RxOut22 D2 Bit 5 D2 Bit 5 Port C6 TxIN16 RxOut16 D2 Bit 6 D2 Bit 6 Port C7 TxIN17 RxOut17 D2 Bit 7 D2 Bit 7 MSB LVAL TxIN24 RxOut24 Line Valid Line Valid FVAL TxIN25 RxOut25 Frame Valid Not used DVAL TxIN26 RxOut26 Data Valid Data Valid Spare TxIN23 RxOut23 Not Used Not Used Strobe TxINCLK RxOutClk Pixel Clock Pixel Clock Table 16 Bit Assignments for 3 Tap Output Modes MDR Conn 1 Transmitter X 128 AW00069909000 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 MDR Conn 2 Transmitter Y
337. t B Delayed This setting is required because the image of the object being imaged will cross line B in the sensor first and each point of the object is imaged twice Step 6 Capture images Basler sprint Color Cameras 97 Line Acquisition Modes 98 AW00069909000 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Exposure Start and Exposure Time Control 4 Exposure Start and Exposure Time Control This section describes the methods that can be used to trigger the start of exposure and control the length of exposure for each acquisition Exposure start and exposure time can be controlled via an external trigger signal ExSync applied to the camera The camera can also operate in free run In free run the camera generates its own internal control signal and does not require an ExSync signal 4 1 ExSync Controlled Operation 4 1 4 Basics of ExSync Controlled Operation In ExSync operation the camera s line rate and exposure time are controlled by an externally generated trigger ExSync signal The ExSync signal is typically supplied to the camera by a frame grabber board via the Camera Link cable You should refer to the manual supplied with your frame grabber board to determine how to set up the ExSync signal that is being supplied to the camera When the camera is operating under the control of an ExSync signal the length of the ExSync signal period determines the camera s line rate 1 Line Pati ee e Period The ExSync sig
338. t can verify the write by issuing a corresponding read command and checking that the returned data is as expected unless the address is write only The host can read the Camera Status fields in the Camera Status inquiry register see page 240 and check the returned data to see if an error condition has been detected Note For many of the write commands listed in the tables on page 243 through page 279 only data within a specified range or a specified group of vales is valid If the data in a write command is not within the allowed range or specified group of allowed values the camera will not execute the write command 292 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Configuring the Camera 7 3 2 Basic Read Write Command Explanations 7 3 2 1 Read Command This section includes a text description the hex digits included in a command message used to read the Status field of the Test Image Mode CSR see page 273 The intent of this section is to give you a basic understanding of the elements included in a read command Sample code that illustrates how to send a read command is available from Basler see Section 7 4 on page 296 The hex digits included in the read command are 0x01 0x0C 0x01 0x00 0x18 0x01 0x03 0x01 is the BFS field The value in the BFS field is always 0x01 0x0C is the FTF field The hex value of 0x0C in the FTF field converts to a binary value of 0000001100 Bits 7 through 3 of the binary value indicate t
339. t of range Field Name Mode Offset 0x0001 Size 1 Byte Type Read Write Description Writing an integer to this field sets the video data output mode 0x01 2 Tap 8 Bit Mode 0x03 2 Tap 10 Bit Mode 0x05 2 Tap 12 Bit Mode 0x08 3 Tap 8 Bit Mode 0x10 4 Tap 8 Bit Mode 0x11 8 Tap 8 Bit Mode 0x12 4 Tap 10 Bit Mode 0x13 4 Tap 12 Bit Mode 0x30 6 Tap 8 Bit Mode 0x32 3 Tap 10 Bit Mode See Chapter 5 on page 115 for a description of the video data output modes Line Acquisition Mode CSR Register Base Address 0x3600 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Mode Offset 0x0001 Size 1 Byte Type Read Write Description Writing an integer to this field sets the line acquisition mode 0x10 RGB 0x16 Raw Line A First 0x17 Raw Line B First 0x18 Enhanced Raw Line B First A Delayed 0x19 Enhanced Raw Line A First B Delayed See Chapter 3 on page 41 for a description of the line acquisition modes 244 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Configuring the Camera Low Line Rate Compensation CSR Register Base Address 0x4500 Field Name Register Status Offset
340. t settings as a user set This will reflect the status before the color adjustment This user set will include the results from white balance and gamma correction Depending on your light source set the corresponding color enhancement parameters in the Color Adjustment section Table 42 on page 187 shows you the values for different light sources Take again an image of the white and gray fields of the color chart see example in Figure 66 The displayed image on the monitor should look like the image in Figure 66 If the displayed image does not correspond to the captured line check whether the monitor is correctly adjusted Capture images of the blue green red yellow magenta and cyan line of the color chart see example in Figure 68 Check whether the colors are correct If the colors are correctly displayed the color enhancement is complete Go to step a If the colors are not correctly set proceed with the next Fig 68 Checking the Colors step a Depending on what color is not correctly displayed Color Adjustment adjust the corresponding color enhancement Cui Aasian Enable gem T parameters in the Color Adjustment section see Hue Red paese c ae b Set the viewing tool e g Just Color Picker to HSB Saraton Green HSV mode Saturation Cyan Hue Cyan c Capture a new image of the ColorChecker Saturation Blue Hue Blue d Compare the values of the captured image to the Saturation Magenta reference imag
341. t to four the FVAL signal will go low after four lines have been transmitted and so on If the length is set to zero the FVAL signal will stay low throughout For information about setting the frame valid signal for the number of lines it will stay high see page 245 The assignment of pixel data bits to output ports depends on the video data output mode of the camera The video data output modes and the bit assignments are explained in detail in Section 5 on page 115 The bit assignments comply with the Camera Link standard The tables also show the assignments for the frame valid bit the line valid bit the data valid bit and the pixel clock These assignments are constant for all output modes The following diagrams illustrate the sequences of pixel values for each tap and the related timing patterns for the pixel clock the frame valid the line valid and the data valid signals Edge or level controlled exposure and programmed exposure are considered 56 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Line Acquisition Modes 2 Tap Output Mode ExSync Signal P i Frame Valid Delay see Table 13 Table 14 and Table 15 Or End of Programmed de Time 4 E I Frame Valid Delay see Table 13 Table 14 and Table 15 H Frame Valid FVAL Langi _ E 0 050 us for 40 MHz Camera Link clock cycle 0 025 us for 80 MHz clock cycle c Line Valid 14 m l Data lL o Valid ml
342. tation of 0x01 Address Byte 1 0000 01 00 New XOR sum 0000 0100 Previous XOR sum 0001 1000 the binary representation of 0x18 Address Byte 2 0001 1100 2 New XOR sum 0001 11002 Previous XOR Sum 0000 0001 the binary representation of 0x01 Data 0001 11012 Final XOR sum 0001 1101 0x1D the block check character Basler sprint Color Cameras 295 Configuring the Camera AW00069909000 7 4 Binary Command Sample Code Sample code that illustrates how to use binary commands with sprint cameras is available at the Basler web site Please look for the Binary Protocol II programming sample at http www baslerweb com 296 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Troubleshooting and Support 8 Troubleshooting and Support This section outlines the resources available to you if you need help working with your camera It also provides some basic troubleshooting information that you can use to solve problems 8 1 Tech Support Resources The troubleshooting resources in this section of the manual will help you to find the cause of many common problems If you need more assistance you can contact the Basler technical support team for your area Technical support contact information is located in the title pages of this manual You will also find helpful information such as frequently asked questions downloads and application notes on the Basler website at www baslerweb com If you do decide to contact Basler technical support
343. te The number of available features and parameters depends on the camera version Cameras with a lower or higher camera version ID number may have fewer features or have more features than described in this manual Features on cameras with a lower or a higher ID number may not operate exactly as described in this manual There are two possibilities to see the camera version ID number for a sprint camera by using the CCT or by using binary commands to read the Camera Version Inquiry register See Section 7 2 1 on page 236 for an explanation of inquiry registers and Section 7 3 on page 288 for information about using binary commands To see the camera version ID number using the CCT 1 Double click the CCT icon on your desktop or click Start gt All Programs gt Basler gt CCT gt CCT The CCT window will open and the software will connect to your camera 2 Scroll down until you find the Camera Information group heading If there is a plus sign beside the Camera Information group heading click on the plus sign to show the list of parameters in the group 3 Find the parameter called Camera Version The last two numbers of this parameter are the camera version ID number Basler sprint Color Cameras 1 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 2 General Specifications AW00069909000 For information about the combinations of parameter settings for achieving the maximum specified line rates see Table 9 on page
344. ters number of taps of the video data output mode Camera Link clock speed line acquisition mode The combinations listed in this section apply to full resolution When using the AOI feature you may be able to obtain the specified line rates for additional combinations and you may obtain higher line rates than the maximum specified line rates The following table lists all combinations of the relevant parameters for all camera models Model Taps Camera Link Line Acquisition Mode s Clock Speed spL2048 39 kc 2 taps 40 MHz Raw 2 taps 80 MHz RGB Raw Enhanced Raw 3 taps 40 MHz 80 MHz RGB spL2048 70kc 2 taps 80 MHz Raw 3 taps 40 MHz 80 MHz RGB 4 taps 40 MHz Raw 4 taps 80 MHz RGB Raw Enhanced Raw 6 taps 40 MHz RGB 8 taps 40 MHz RGB Raw Enhanced Raw spL4096 39 kc 4 taps 40 MHz Raw 6 taps 40 MHz RGB 8 taps 40 MHz RGB Raw Enhanced Raw spL4096 70kc 4 taps 80 MHz Raw 6 taps 80 MHz RGB 8 taps 40 MHz Raw 8 taps 80 MHz Raw RGB Enhanced Raw spL8192 39kc 4 taps 80 MHz Raw 6 taps 80 MHz RGB 8 taps 40 MHz Raw 8 taps 80 MHz RGB Raw Enhanced Raw Table 9 Combinations of Parameter Settings for the Maximum Specified Line Rates 114 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Video Data Output Modes 5 Video Data Output Modes This section describes the video data output modes available on the camera The video data output mode will determine the format of the pixel data output from
345. th setting The 2 bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the increment Byte 2 High byte of the increment Exposure Time Control Mode CSR Register Base Address 0x1400 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Mode Offset 0x0001 Size 1 Byte Type Read Write Description Writing an integer to this field sets the exposure time control mode 0x00 Free run programmable 0x02 Free run edge controlled 0x04 ExSync level controlled 0x05 ExSync programmable 0x06 ExSync edge controlled See Section 4 1 on page 99 for a description of the exposure time control modes 246 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Configuring the Camera Exposure Time CSR Note The exposure time can be set by writing a floating point value to the Absolute Exposure Time field or by writing an integer value to the Raw Exposure Time field See Section 7 2 2 1 on page 242 for an explanation of the difference between these two fields Register Base Address 0x1500 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicat
346. the appropriate value to the Length field of the FVAL Length CSR see page 245 Section 7 2 2 on page 242 explains CSRs and Section 7 3 1 on page 289 explains using read write commands 36 Basler sprint Color Cameras AWO00069909000 Physical Interface 2 8 2 Line Valid Bit As shown in Figure 15 on page 34 a line valid LVAL bit is assigned to the Tx24 pin on the X Y and Z Camera Link transmitters as defined in the Camera Link standard The line valid bit included in the video data output from the camera indicates that a valid line is being transmitted Pixel data is only valid when this bit is high For more detailed information about the line valid bit see Chapter 5 on page 115 2 8 3 Data Valid Bit As shown in Figure 15 on page 34 a data valid DVAL bit is assigned to the Tx26 pin on the X Y and Z Camera Link transmitters as defined in the Camera Link standard The data valid bit included in the video data output from the camera indicates that valid data is being transmitted Pixel data is only valid when this bit is high For more detailed information about the data valid bit see Chapter 5 on page 115 2 8 4 Pixel Data Bits Pixel data bits are transmitted via output ports on the X Y and Z Camera Link transmitters The ports as defined in the Camera Link standard are shown in Figure 15 on page 34 The assignment of pixel data bits to output ports varies depending on the video data output mode of the camera The availa
347. the appropriate value to the Mode field of the Lookup Table Mode CSR see page 276 See Section 7 2 2 on page 242 for an explanation of CSRs and Section 7 3 1 on page 289 for an explanation of using read write commands 220 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Features 6 10 Imaging Sensor Temperature The camera is equipped with a temperature sensor that lets you monitor the temperature of the imaging sensor You can check the temperature of the imaging sensor with the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary read commands from within your own application to read the camera s inquiry registers With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 234 you use the Sensor Temperature parameter in the Camera Information parameters group to check the temperature of the imaging sensor By Reading Inquiry Registers You check the temperature of the imaging sensor by reading the Temperature field of the Imaging Sensor Temperature Inquiry Register see page 241 See Section 7 2 2 on page 242 for an explanation of Inquiry Registers and Section 7 3 1 on page 289 for an explanation of using read write commands Note If the temperature of the imaging sensor rises above 75 C an overtemperature error will be declared See Section 6 12 1 on page 223 for more information about overtemperature error detection Basler sprint Color Cameras 221 Features AW00069909000 6 11 Camera Power Undervoltage and Overvoltag
348. the camera and will affect the camera s maximum allowed line rate 5 1 Overview The camera can operate in different video data output modes The video data output mode will determine the format of the pixel data output from the camera The video data output modes available vary on each camera model as shown in Table 11 on page 116 The main difference between the video data output modes is the amount of pixel data that will be output on each cycle of the Camera Link pixel clock Tap Mode Pixel Output on Each Pixel Clock Cycle 2 tap modes 2 pixels 3 tap modes 3 pixels 4 tap modes 4 pixels 6 tap modes 6 pixels 8 tap modes 8 pixels Table 10 Tap Modes and Pixel Outputs The selection of a video data output mode also determines the bit depth of the transmitted pixel data The video data output modes are described in detail in Section 5 2 1 on page 119 through Section 5 2 5 on page 146 In general you can operate the camera at a higher maximum line rate when you use an output mode with more taps This is true because the modes with more taps output a greater amount of pixel data on each cycle of the pixel clock and therefore require less time to output a given amount of data For more information about how the video data output mode will affect the camera s maximum allowed line rate see Section 4 3 on page 106 On the camera models the speed can be set to either 40 or 80 MHz The available clock speeds o
349. the image should be as bright as possible but they should not be saturated i e for 8 bit gray values 255 e In CCT In the DSNU amp PRNU Shading Correction group Select Generate PRNU Values with DSNU Values If the generation is successful Last Shading Generation Failed is lt 0 gt The shading values will be saved automatically in the user shading values file Make sure the shading mode is selected See Section 6 4 6 on page 173 for more information about activating user shading values files 6 Depending on your light source set the corresponding Offset DN and color specific gain parameters for white balance in the Gain amp Offset section Table 42 on page 187 shows you the values for different light sources a Capture images of the gray fields of the color chart see example in Figure 66 The brightest white field should be in the focus area of the camera and it must not be saturated i e not too bright Preferably you should start with a gain value of 1 for the brightest color A small value means less noise b Check whether the white balance in the image is correct i e if the values of the colors red green and blue inside a segment preferably the brightest the white segment are the same Via the white balance parameters you adapt the three color channels of the camera red green and blue to the light source in such a way that you obtain a basic gray value Fig 66 Checking White Balance
350. the status of this inquiry register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available Field Name Serial Number Offset 0x0001 Size 20 Bytes Type Read only Description String containing the camera s serial number The string is zero terminated if less than 20 bytes are needed and unterminated if all 20 bytes are needed Camera Version Inquiry Register Base Address 0x0500 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this inquiry register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available Field Name Camera Version Offset 0x0001 Size 3 Bytes Type Read only Description The value in this field indicates the camera s version information The bytes in the field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the camera version BCD coded Byte 2 High byte of the camera version BCD coded Byte 3 Register layout ID BCD coded Basler sprint Color Cameras 237 Configuring the Camera AW00069909000 Firmware Version Inquiry Register Base Address 0x0510 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this inquiry register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available Field Name Firmware Version Offset 0x0001 Size 128 Bytes Type
351. till present Check the camera file that you are using with your frame grabber see the Installation and Setup Guide for Camera Link Cameras Make sure that it is the correct file for your Basler sprint model and current video data output mode Be aware that sometimes different camera files must be used depending on which of the camera s features you have enabled No Exit this Camera files should be available on your frame grabber supplier s website chart After you checked the camera file is the problem still present Yes Contact Basler technical support The contact numbers appear on the front pages of this manual Before you call for support be sure to make note of the camera settings and the frame grabber settings you are using You should also have a captured live image and a captured test image available Basler technical support will frequently request that you e mail copies of these captured images 304 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Troubleshooting and Support 8 4 4 RS 644 Serial Communication Use the serial communication troubleshooting charts if you think that there is a problem with RS 644 serial communication or if you have been directed here from another chart Before making or breaking any camera connections always switch off power to the system camera and host PC The RS 644 port used by the camera is located on the frame grabber Check the documentation for your frame grabber Make sure that
352. tion applies particularly to 10 bit and 12 bit video data output modes see Table 40 For good image quality the following maximum settings should not be exceeded by total gain Gain Setting dB of Gain 12 bit video data output modes 6144 3 5 10 bit video data output modes 8192 6 0 8 bit video data output modes 16383 12 0 Table 40 Values for Total Gain that Should Not be Exceeded D D 160 Note It may be difficult keeping the total gain below the values given in Table 40 and obtaining optimum white balance at the same time This will be particularly true when a halogen lamp is used for illumination where the blue pixel values will require strong correction We recommend to generally use a blue conversion filter which will prevent the need for high additional color specific gain settings Note Make sure color adjustment is disabled before carrying out white balance For more information about color adjustment see Section 6 6 1 on page 179 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Features 6 2 4 Setting the Additional Color specific Gain You can set the white balance with the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary write commands from within your own application to set the camera s control and status registers CSRs With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 234 you use the Gain Red Gain Green Gain Green 2 if Gain Green 2 is enabled and Gain
353. tive direction by 60 in the color hexagon red will be completely transformed into magenta If the value is set to 0 red will not be changed See Section 6 6 1 on page 179 for more information about the color adjustment feature Field Name Hue Red Min Offset 0x000C Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description Minimum allowed integer value for the hue red value setting Field Name Hue Red Max Offset 0xX000D Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description Maximum allowed integer value for the hue red value setting Field Name Hue Red Increment Offset OX000E Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description An integer value indicating the increment for the hue red value setting Field Name Saturation Yellow Status Offset 0Ox000F Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of the saturation adjustment for yellow 0x00 The adjustment is not available 0x01 The adjustment is available and all related settings are OK Field Name Saturation Yellow Value Offset 0x0010 Size 1 Byte Type Read Write Description Writing an integer value to this field sets the saturation value of yellow for predominantly yellow colors in the image If the saturation yellow value is set to 64 the saturation of yellow will not be changed Setting the value to less than 64 will decrease the saturation If for example the value is set to 32 the saturation of yellow will be halved If the value is set to 0 the saturation of yellow is zer
354. to Your Camera Once you have downloaded user configuration set files to your PC as described on the previous page you can upload the files from your PC to a camera Using the download function together with the upload function is useful if you want to transfer a user set file from one camera to another camera of the same type You can upload a user set file by using the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary read write commands from within your own application to set the camera s control and status registers CSRs Note that when you upload a user set file to your camera you will overwrite any existing values in the camera s user set file of the same name With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 234 you use the Upload button in the Configuration Set Files parameters group to upload a user set file When you click the button the CCT will open a window that lets you navigate to your PC and select a file By Setting CSRs You can upload a user set file by writing values to the configuration set bulk data CSR Section 7 2 3 on page 280 explains the bulk data CSRs and Section 7 2 3 3 on page 283 explains how to use the CSRs to upload a file Section 7 3 1 on page 289 explains using read write commands Note The factory configuration set file can be downloaded from the camera to the PC The factory configuration set file can t be uploaded from the PC to the camera because the factory configuration set
355. tor is set to 1 the output pixel brightness will not be corrected A gamma correction factor between 0 and 1 will result in increased overall brightness anda gamma correction factor greater than 1 will result in decreased overall brightness In all cases black output pixel brightness equals 0 and white output pixel brightness equals 255 for 8 bit output 1020 for 10 bit output and 4080 for 12 bit output will not be corrected Enabling Gamma Correction and Setting the Gamma Note The gamma correction feature will only operate when the lookup table feature is enabled Make sure to enable the lookup table feature before setting the gamma correction feature For more information about enabling the lookup table feature see Section 6 9 on page 217 You can set the gamma correction feature with the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT see Section 7 1 on page 234 or by using binary write commands from within your own application to set the camera s control and status registers CSRs With the CCT Gamma correction is enabled when the value of the Gamma parameter is set to gt 0 The correction is determined by the value of the Gamma parameter which can be set in a range from 0 to 3 99902 So if the value is set to 1 2 for example the gamma used for the correction will be 1 2 Basler sprint Color Cameras 177 Features AW00069909000 By Setting CSRs You set the gamma by writing a value to the Absolute Gamma or the Raw Gamm
356. ts for the frame valid bit the line valid bit the data valid bit and the pixel clock These assignments are constant for all output modes The following diagrams illustrate the sequences of pixel values for each tap and the related timing patterns for the pixel clock the frame valid the line valid and the data valid signals Edge or level controlled exposure and programmed exposure are considered Basler sprint Color Cameras 65 Line Acquisition Modes 2 Tap Output Mode ExSync Signal Or End of Programmed Time Frame Valid FVAL Length 2 Line Valid Data Valid Pixel Clock DO Pixel Data 12 10 or 8 bits D1 Pixel Data 12 10 or 8 bits 1 ua AW00069909000 Frame Valid Delay see Table 13 Table 14 and Table 15 E I Frame Valid Delay see Table 13 Table 14 and Table 15 Ls zx Sol 1L 1k 0 050 us for 40 MHz Camera Link clock cycle 0 025 us for 80 MHz clock cycle L2 Lco x UU UU OCOQO66 X O00 090000 XX ODO 09 X009 OO X00 2 4 N 2 N Timing diagrams are not to scale N At full resolution N 2 4096 on 4k models and 2048 on 2k models If the AOI feature is used N will be determined by the AOI settings Fig 33 Two Tap Mode with Edge Level Controlled or Programmed Exposure Raw Line B First 66 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Line Acquisition Modes 4 Tap Output Mode ExSync Signal Or End
357. tus of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Mode Offset 0x0001 Size 1 Byte Type Read Write Description Writing an integer to this field selects either the red green or blue lookup table 0x01 Red lookup table enabled for entering values at selected indices 0x02 Green lookup table enabled for entering values at selected indices 0x03 Blue lookup table enabled for entering values at selected indices See Section 6 9 on page 217 for more information about the lookup table feature 276 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Configuring the Camera Lookup Table Index CSR Register Base Address 0x4108 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Lookup Table Index Offset 0x0001 Size 2 Bytes Type Read Write Description Writing an integer to this field selects an index in the lookup table currently selected in the lookup table selector CSR The 2 bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the lookup table index Byte 2 High
358. ue Cyan Min Offset 0x002A Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description Minimum allowed integer value for the hue cyan value setting Field Name Description Hue Cyan Max Offset 0x002B Size 1 Byte Type Read only Maximum allowed integer value for the hue cyan value setting Field Name Description Hue Cyan Increment Offset 0x002C Size 1 Byte Type Read only An integer value indicating the increment for the hue cyan value setting Basler sprint Color Cameras 269 Configuring the Camera AW00069909000 Register Base Address 0x4400 Field Name Saturation Blue Status Offset 0x002D Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of the saturation adjustment for blue 0x00 The adjustment is not available 0x01 The adjustment is available and all related settings are OK Field Name Saturation Blue Value Offset 0x002E Size 1 Byte Type Read Write Description Writing an integer value to this field sets the saturation value of blue for predominantly blue colors in the image If the saturation blue value is set to 64 the saturation of blue will not be changed Setting the value to less than 64 will decrease the saturation If for example the value is set to 32 the saturation of blue will be halved If the value is set to 0 the saturation of blue is zero and blue will not be present in the image Setting the value to greater than 64 will increase the satu
359. ue generation process An overtemperature condition is present see Section 6 12 1 on page 223 Low line rate compensation activity 1 active O inactive see Section 4 1 3 on page 102 An internal overvoltage condition is present see Section 8 3 on page 298 Reserved Basler sprint Color Cameras 239 Configuring the Camera AW00069909000 FPGA Status Inquiry The camera has been programmed to detect several error conditions in its field programmable gate array FPGA When an error condition is detected a flag is set The FPGA status inquiry register allows you to read the error flags Register Base Address 0x0C10 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this inquiry register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available Field Name FPGA Status Offset 0x0001 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description Each bit in this field except bit 7 specifies an error condition see table below Bit 0 is the least significant bit If a bit is set to 1 the error condition assigned to that bit is present If the bit is set to 0 the error is not present Bit Description 0 No FPGA firmware available 1 FPGA firmware is available but the firmware has failed to load 2 The camera s maximum line rate has been exceeded Note If you are operating the camera in ExSync programmable mode and you trigge
360. uisition modes see Chapter 3 on page 41 for more information about line acquisition modes This means that If you will always be operating the camera in single line acquisition mode you should set the camera for single line acquisition mode and then follow the steps below one time If you will never be operating the camera in single line acquisition mode you should set the camera for any one of the other acquisition modes and then follow the steps below one time If you will sometimes operate the camera in single line acquisition mode and other times operate the camera in one of the other modes you should first set the camera for single line acquisition mode and follow the steps below You should then set the camera for any one of the other acquisition modes and you should go through the steps a second time The camera s user shading values file has one area where it holds the PRNU values it uses for single line mode and another area where it stores the values for all of the other modes To generate a set of user PRNU values 1 Place a uniform white or light colored target in the field of view of the camera Adjust your lighting optics line rate exposure mode exposure time gain and camera temperature as you would for normal system operation 2 Set the camera for the desired line acquisition mode 3 Make sure the area of interest parameters are set so that the camera will use the full length of the sensor see Section 6 3 on p
361. ulk data file Basler sprint Color Cameras 287 Configuring the Camera AW00069909000 7 3 Using Binary Read Write Commands As explained in Section 7 2 on page 235 each camera has control and status registers with one or more fields that are used to set the values for parameters associated with a camera feature For example the gain control and status register has two fields that can be used to set the camera s gain see Section 6 1 on page 155 By writing values to fields in the control registers you configure the camera and control how it operates By reading values from fields in the control registers you can determine how the camera is currently configured Each camera also has inquiry registers with fields that contain basic information such as the camera s serial number and software version numbers By reading values in the inquiry register fields you can determine some basic information about the camera A binary read write command protocol has been developed for use with the camera You can read the data in a register field by sending a binary read command to the camera For example you can use a read command to determine the current value of the Mode field of the Test Image Mode control and status register see page 273 When you issue a read command to the camera the camera responds by sending the requested data back to the host computer You can write data to a register field by sending a write command to the camera For
362. up Table Value Offset 0x0001 Size 1 Byte Type Read Write Description Writing an integer to this field enters a value into the currently selected lookup table at the index currently specified by the lookup table index CSR See Section 6 9 on page 217 for more information about the lookup table feature Field Name Min Offset 0x0002 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description Minimum allowed integer value for a value of the currently selected lookup table Field Name Max Offset 0x0003 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description Maximum allowed integer value for a value of the currently selected lookup table Field Name Increment Offset 0x0004 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description An integer value indicating the increment for a value of the selectedcurrently lookup table Camera Reset CSR Register Base Address 0x0BOO Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Reset Offset 0x0001 Size 1 Byte Type Read Write Description Writing an integer value of 1 0x01 to this field will initiate a camera reset The reset behavior of the camera is similar to power up behavior 278 Basler sprint Color Cam
363. us register CSR address to which the command is being sent AddrLen Length of the Address Field 0b00 16 bits 2 bytes 0b01 32 bits 4 bytes 0b10 48 bits 6 bytes 0b11 64 bits 8 bytes All CSR addresses are 16 bits Example of an FTF field Assume that you are issuing a write command that you are using a BCC and that the CSR address you are writing to is a 16 bit address In this case the OpCode bits would be 0500000 the BCC Code bit would be 0b1 and the AddrLen bits would be 0b00 This would result in a binary value of 06000001 00 which translates to a hex value of 0x04 for the FTF field Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Configuring the Camera DataLen Address Data BCC BFE Data Length field For read commands the DataLen field indicates the number of bytes to read from the given CSR address For write commands the DataLen field indicates the number of bytes contained in the Data field Size 1 byte Range of possible settings O to 255 DataLen 0 will result in an ACK but no further command will be executed Address field For read commands indicates the CSR address for the read For write commands indicates the CSR address for the write Size Number of bytes indicated in the AddrLen portion of the FTF field Data field For read commands this field contains no data For wire commands this field contains the data to be written to the CSR Size
364. ut3 D3 Bit 3 Port D4 TxIN4 RxOut4 D3 Bit 4 Port D5 TxIN6 RxOut6 D3 Bit 5 Port D6 TxIN27 RxOut27 D3 Bit 6 Port D7 TxIN5 RxOut5 D3 Bit 7 MSB Port EO TxIN7 RxOut7 D4 Bit 0 Port E1 TxIN8 RxOut8 D4 Bit 1 Port E2 TxIN9 RxOut9 D4 Bit 2 Port E3 TxIN12 RxOut12 D4 Bit 3 Port E4 TxIN13 RxOut13 D4 Bit 4 Port E5 TxIN14 RxOut14 D4 Bit 5 Port E6 TxIN10 RxOut10 D4 Bit 6 Port E7 TxIN11 RxOut11 D4 Bit 7 MSB Port FO TXIN15 RxOut15 D5 Bit 0 Port F1 TxIN18 RxOut18 D5 Bit 1 Port F2 TxIN19 RxOut19 D5 Bit 2 Port F3 TxIN20 RxOut20 D5 Bit 3 Port F4 TxIN21 RxOut21 D5 Bit 4 Port F5 TxIN22 RxOut22 D5 Bit 5 Port F6 TxIN16 RxOut16 D5 Bit 6 Port F7 TxIN17 RxOut17 D5 Bit 7 MSB LVAL TxIN24 RxOut24 Line Valid FVAL TxIN25 RxOut25 Frame Valid DVAL TxIN26 RxOut26 Data Valid Spare TxIN23 RxOut23 Not Used Strobe TxINCLK RxOutCIk Pixel Clock Table 32 Bit Assignments for 8 Tap Output Mode MDR Conn 2 Transmitter Y Present for the Raw and Enhanced Raw line acquisition modes only Basler sprint Color Cameras Video Data Output Modes 149 Video Data Output Modes MDR Conn 2 Transmitter Z Port Camera Frame Bit Assignment Grabber 8 Tap 8 Bit Port GO TxINO RxOut0 D6 Bit 0 Port G1 TxIN1 RxOut1 D6 Bit 1 Port G2 TxIN2 RxOut2 D6 Bit 2 Port G3 TXIN3 RxOut3 D6 Bit 3 Port G4 TxIN4 RxOut4 D6 Bit 4 Port G5 TxING RxOut6 D6 Bit 5 Port G6
365. ut3 DO Bit 3 DO Bit 3 DO Bit 3 Port A4 TxIN4 RxOut4 DO Bit 4 DO Bit 4 DO Bit 4 Port A5 TxIN6 RxOut6 DO Bit 5 DO Bit 5 DO Bit 5 Port A6 TxIN27 RxOut27 DO Bit 6 DO Bit 6 DO Bit 6 Port A7 TxIN5 RxOut5 DO Bit 7 DO Bit 7 DO Bit 7 MSB Port BO TxIN7 RxOut7 DO Bit 8 DO Bit 8 D1 Bit O Port B1 TxIN8 RxOut8 DO Bit 9 DO Bit 9 MSB D1 Bit 1 Port B2 TxIN9 RxOut9 DO Bit 10 Not used D1 Bit 2 Port B3 TxIN12 RxOut12 DO Bit 11 MSB Not used D1 Bit3 Port B4 TxIN13 RxOut13 D1 Bit 8 D1 Bit 8 D1 Bit 4 Port B5 TxIN14 RxOut14 D1 Bit 9 D1 Bit 9 MSB D1 Bit 5 Port B6 TxIN10 RxOut10 D1 Bit 10 Not used D1 Bit 6 Port B7 TxIN11 RxOut11 D1 Bit 11 MSB Not used D1 Bit 7 MSB Port CO TxIN15 RxOut15 D1 Bit O D1 Bit O D2 Bit 0 Port C1 TxIN18 RxOut18 D1 Bit 1 D1 Bit 1 D2 Bit 1 Port C2 TxIN19 RxOut19 D1 Bit 2 D1 Bit 2 D2 Bit 2 Port C3 TxIN20 RxOut20 D1 Bit 3 D1 Bit 3 D2 Bit 3 Port C4 TxIN21 RxOut21 D1 Bit 4 D1 Bit 4 D2 Bit 4 Port C5 TxIN22 RxOut22 D1 Bit5 D1 Bit5 D2 Bit 5 Port C6 TxIN16 RxOut16 D1 Bit 6 D1 Bit 6 D2 Bit 6 Port C7 TxIN17 RxOut17 D1 Bit 7 D1 Bit 7 D2 Bit 7 MSBO LVAL TxIN24 RxOut24 Line Valid Line Valid Line Valid FVAL TxIN25 RxOut25 Frame Valid Frame Valid Frame Valid DVAL TxIN26 RxOut26 Data Valid Data Valid Data Valid Spare TxIN23 RxOut23 Not Used Not Used Not Used Strobe TxINCLK RxOutClk Pixel Clock Pixel Clock Pixel Clock Table 21 Bit Assignments for 4 Tap Output Modes MDR Conn 1 Transmitter X Present for the Raw and Enhanc
366. uuog JON l I E I z l I 101300002 YAW ajewe ud 9z Jeqqei9 owes I T 10 20uu02 YAW l ejewud oz N ULAZL I l eIqe YAW I z uuo9 udW I I puo I pup l I popaou y az z Ies 1ouu z 92 I I I l Sdooj punoj jue eJd oy 19 l dires peeg l ES l APA pesnequeoio pue jg f 7 vr PISIS 16Uu vi v auuej I Od ffn p zz zz piled E EH pem ito Teuondo si 19 uiuo ojez I I sqong On I DITOXL T eqons l I 8q pinous 4 ioN Ww gu i Bleus jeuuj i pr I PHA aan spied g nE PIDK I i ty eza cox L T pleius souu L T POSTION POSTION Esos pe l aa Ha l I TATU THON TOSSO l l WU HOATOGSG l S3wog 9 EK Z iz gied 8 Ir EA 9IXL duod l I I l 943S 1 amet gapas Dog A M M B en sas 93 uod EA 93 uod 9419s ra aye 9 8 E hokia 8t ler mm exi any I 9415 s 8 I13ed 2 liz sauo 22 l Lu samoa I I p r AW ZLOAT0GSG MG ra l rg Lava l l TUL TEOATOSSd I l AEN B a l 20 ZI l l 55 THI I led oz oz Ones I WAT ZA ez I ez Eed v lv ES SWAN I l Ones ER Saved 2 XXL saved T 0 Lie ou I AR I OLS oz Z zg 1ed 1 1 OLS vog 7 o OF yelled m m ZA ZEZ l I gawod 02 I OexL eaog I I WII VISONTOSSG l GN VEPOATOSd I zavod 83 I Ler z3 vod I I I Tava ery I sp Ta od I I 199 8L 8L ged 6 6 EIOS aH mue 1 qom z um Ga Hog Jk K v zid 5 3 TK Ga vod 100 48 Jed zz 109 aaen l saf raved l l ea Hod FTA 3e I FTA 3 Hod I Za Hod oxy D e ranea ui Be exl Z3Wod z799
367. value of any pixel in an image The tool should be able to display the colors as RGB values and as HSB HSV values Example tool Just Color Picker To adjust the color performance of the Basler sprint color camera Make sure that you use an IR cut filter on the camera lens The filter should transmit in a range from 400 nm to 650 nm and it should cut off from 650 680 nm to at least 1100 nm e g B W 486 filter Arrange your camera so that it is viewing a scene similar to what it will view during actual operation Make sure that the lighting for the scene is as close as possible to the actual lighting you will be using during normal operation Set the exposure time and gain so that you are acquiring good quality images It is important to make sure that the images are not over exposed Over exposure can have a significant negative effect on the fidelity of the color in the acquired images Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Features 5 Carry out DSNU and PRNU shading correction a Close the lens of the camera e g with a cap b In CCT a Set Exposure Exposure Time Control Mode lt Free run programmable gt b In the DSNU amp PRNU Shading Correction group Select Generate DSNU Values If the generation is successful Last Shading Generation Failed is 0 is displayed c Remove the cover from the camera lens d Capture an image of a homogeneous surface e g white sheet of paper The gray values in
368. value will be written to the index you selected in step one Repeat steps two and three to enter values for each index in the table Repeat from step one if you want to enter values for a different color By Setting CSRs Entering an 8 bit value at an index in the lookup table for a color is a three step process 1 Select the lookup table that relates to the color by writing the appropriate value to the Mode field of the Lookup Table Selector CSR see page 276 2 Select an index in the lookup table by writing a value to the Index field of the Lookup Table Index CSR see page 277 3 Write an 8 bit value to the Value field of the Lookup Table Value CSR see page 278 The 8 bit value will be written to the lookup table index you selected in step one Repeat steps one and two to enter values for each index in the table See Section 7 2 2 on page 242 for an explanation of CSRs and Section 7 3 1 on page 289 for an explanation of using read write commands Enabling the Lookup Table Feature You can enable the lookup table feature with the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary write commands from within your own application to set the camera s control and status registers CSRs With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 234 you use the Lookup Table Enable parameter in the Lookup Table parameters group to enable the lookup table feature By Setting CSRs You enable the lookup table feature by writing
369. vement Point 3 Point 2 Point 1 Fig 23 Raw Line A First Line Acquisition ExSync Cycle 2 Basler sprint Color Cameras 53 Line Acquisition Modes AW00069909000 ExSync Cycle 3 A3 Image of point 3 acquired by line A Drawing not to scale BUFFER B4 Image of point 4 acquired by line B Line B LINGA Object Passing Camera N Point 4 lt a Movement Point 3 Point 2 Point 1 Fig 24 Raw Line A First Line Acquisition ExSync Cycle 3 54 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Line Acquisition Modes ExSync Cycle 4 B4 Image of point 4 acquired by line B Drawing not to scale BUFFER Line B Line A Object Passing Camera N poan Point 4 4 Movement Point 3 Point 2 Point 1 Fig 25 Raw Line A First Line Acquisition ExSync Cycle 4 Basler sprint Color Cameras 55 Line Acquisition Modes AW00069909000 Before transmission the pixel values are arranged inside the camera in this sequence Line A pixel value red of pixel 1 RA1 pixel value green of pixel 2 GA2 pixel value red of pixel 3 RA3 pixel value green of pixel 4 GA4 and so on Line B pixel value green of pixel 1 GB1 pixel value blue of pixel 2 BB2 pixel value green of pixel 3 GB3 pixel value blue of pixel 4 BB4 and so on The pixel values are transmitted f
370. wed range with the current configuration The integer value represents a multiplier and the line period is equal to the value in this field times 0 1 us For example if the value in this field is set to 1500 then Line Period 1500 x 0 1 us Exposure Time 150 us The bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the raw value Byte 2 Mid byte of the raw value Byte 3 High byte of the raw value Byte 4 Always 0 not used Basler sprint Color Cameras 249 Configuring the Camera AW00069909000 Field Name Raw Min Offset 0x0011 Size 4 Bytes Type Read only Description Minimum allowed integer value for the raw line period setting This field is updated to reflect limitations caused by the way that any related fields are set The bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the min value Byte 2 Mid byte of the min value Byte 3 High byte of the min value Byte 4 Always 0 not used Field Name Raw Max Offset 0x0015 Size 4 Bytes Type Read only Description Maximum allowed integer value for the raw line period setting This field is updated to reflect limitations caused by the way that any related fields are set The bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the max value Byte 2 Mid byte of the max value Byte 3 High byte of the max value Byte 4 Always 0x00 not used 250 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Configurin
371. x W x H 53 5 mm x 92 0 mm x 102 0 mm without optical components with connectors Weight 580 g without optical components 1480 g with UNIFOC 100 95 V Basler helical mount 780 g with M58 x 0 75 V Basler lens mount Table 3 General Specifications for the 8k Camera Basler sprint Color Cameras Specifications Requirements and Precautions AW00069909000 1 3 Lens Adapters 1 3 1 Lens Adapters for 2k and 4k Cameras An F mount lens adapter is standard for most of the cameras with 2048 pixels per line 2k cameras and with 4096 pixels per line 4k cameras For 2k and 4k cameras a V mount lens adapter is also available For 2k and 4k cameras an optional M42 lens adapter and an optional C mount lens adapter are also available For cameras with 8192 pixels per line 8k cameras a helical mount or a lens mount with V Basler interface are required as adapters For more information about the optical components and how to obtain them see Section 1 3 2 1 on page 7 and Section 1 3 2 2 on page 9 Note When a C mount lens is used with a 2k camera the image produced by the pixels near the ends of the sensor lines may appear degraded This effect is caused by using a lens with a relatively small diameter compared to the length of the sensor lines Typically use of a C mount lens on 2k cameras is appropriate in applications where the image data from pixels near the ends of each line can be discarded 1 3 2 Lens Adapte
372. x000D Size 2 Bytes Type Read Write Description Writing an integer value to this field sets the offset The allowed range for this value can vary depending on how the camera is configured You should check the raw min and raw max fields of this register to determine the allowed range with the current configuration The DN of offset that the camera will apply is determined as follows If the camera is set for an 8 bit video data output mode increasing the integer value by 16 will increase the digital values output from the camera by 1 and decreasing the integer value by 16 will decrease the digital values output from the camera by 1 If the camera is set for a 10 bit video data output mode increasing the integer value by 4 will increase the digital values output from the camera by 1 and decreasing the integer value by 4 will decrease the digital values output from the camera by 1 If the camera is set for a 12 bit video data output mode increasing the integer value by 1 will increase the digital values output from the camera by 1 and decreasing the integer value by 1 will decrease the digital values output from the camera by 1 The bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the raw value Byte 2 High byte of the raw value Field Name Raw Min Offset 0x000F Size 2 Bytes Type Read only Description Minimum allowed integer value for the raw gain setting The bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1
373. x003D Size 1 Byte Type Read Write Description Writing an integer to this field sets the hue value of magenta for predominantly magenta colors in the image The hue magenta value can be set to a minimum of 128 and can be increased to a maximum of 127 If the hue magenta value is set to a negative number magenta will be mixed with red If the hue magenta value is set to a positive number magenta will be mixed with blue If the hue magenta value is set to 128 corresponding to a rotation in negative direction by 60 in the color hexagon magenta will be completely transformed into red If the value is set to 127 corresponding to a rotation in positive direction by 60 in the color hexagon magenta will be completely transformed into blue If the value is set to 0 magenta will not be changed See Section 6 6 1 on page 179 for more information about the color adjustment feature Basler sprint Color Cameras 271 Configuring the Camera AW00069909000 Register Base Address 0x4400 Field Name Hue Magenta Min Offset 0x003E Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description Minimum allowed integer value for the hue magenta value setting Field Name Hue Magenta Max Offset 0x003F Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description Maximum allowed integer value for the hue magenta value setting Field Name Hue Magenta Increment Offset 0x0040 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description An integer value indicating the increment for t
374. xel values are read out of the sensor on the rising edge of the ExSync signal see Figure 53 ExSync Period B Exposure ExSync ja X Signal Line Readout Fig 53 ExSync Level Controlled Mode In ExSync programmable mode line acquisition begins on the rising edge of the ExSyc signal The rising edge of ExSync triggers exposure and charge accumulation for a pre programmed period of time The pixel values are read out of the sensor at the end of the pre programmed period The falling edge of ExSync is irrelevant see Figure 3 4 A parameter called Exposure Time is used to set the length of the pre programmed exposure period ExSync Period pe g ExSync Signal Exposure Time Line Readout Fig 54 ExSync Programmable Mode 100 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Exposure Start and Exposure Time Control 4 1 2 Selecting an ExSync Exposure Mode and Setting the Exposure Time You can select an ExSync exposure time control mode and set the exposure time for the ExSync programmable mode with the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary write commands from within your own application to set the camera s control and status registers CSRs With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 234 you use the Exposure Time Control Mode parameter in the Exposure parameters group to select the ExSync edge controlled ExSync level controlled or ExSync programmable exposure ti
375. xels will be 10 bit values but only the 8 MSBs will carry information The 2 LSBs will be packed with zeros When the camera is operating in a 12 bit output mode the stamp pixels will be 12 bit values but only the 8 MSBs will carry information The 4 LSBs will be packed with zeros spL8192 39kc only On the initial wake up after delivery the camera loads the factory configuration set into the work set In the spL8192 39kc it depends on the firmware version in the camera which feature is available and which is not One firmware version includes the line stamp feature The other firmware version includes the color adjustment feature D Note on availability of color adjustment and line stamp features If you want your camera to wake up with the feature that is not included in the currently installed firmware please contact Basler Technical Support Additional information All other features are available for the spL8192 39kc exceptions see single feature sections 206 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Features The table below lists the function of each stamp pixel A more detailed explanation of how to interpret the pixel values follows the table Position Function S1 A fixed value of OxAA S2 A fixed value of 0x55 RGB line acquisition mode stamps relate to the red averaged green or blue pixels Raw Enhanced Raw line acquisition mode stamps relate to the red
376. y high The number of lines can only be set in multiples of two For example if the setting is two the frame valid bit will be high during the transmission of two consecutive lines and will go low after the lines have been transmitted If the setting is four the frame valid bit will be high during the transmission of four consecutive lines and will go low after the lines have been transmitted If the setting is zero the frame valid bit will stay low and you may not be able to decide which lines in a sequence of lines being transmitted are lines A and which ones are lines B The frame valid bit will only be included in the video data output from the camera if the Raw or the Enhanced Raw line acquisition mode is selected For more detailed information about the frame valid bit see Chapter 5 on page 115 Setting the Number of Consecutive Lines the Frame Valid Bit Will Stay High You can set the camera for the number of consecutive lines the frame valid bit will stay high with the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary write commands from within your own application to set the camera s control and status registers CSRs With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 234 you use the FVAL Length parameter in the Output Mode parameters group to set the number of consecutive lines the frame valid bit will stay high By Setting CSRs You set the number of consecutive lines the frame valid bit will stay high by writing
377. z 4 bz Jz lz 04 PU 1 1024 1536 2048 lines 1 and 2 Pixel Number lines 3 and 4 mies lines 5 and 6 Fig 74 Formation of Test Image Two for 8 bit Output Modes Generated with a Raw or Enhanced Raw Line Acquisition Mode on a Camera with 4096 Pixels Per Line CLL LL Fig 75 Test Image Two Generated with a Raw or Enhanced Raw Line Acquisition Mode When you view the output of a camera that is set for test image two the pattern should appear to be gradually moving up the screen This feature is useful for determining if the camera is receiving 194 Basler sprint Color Cameras AW00069909000 Features an ExSync signal from your frame grabber and if the frame grabber is receiving every line that is output from your camera Test image two is useful for checking the integrity of the data transmitted by the camera If you capture lines and examine the pixel values in the captured lines the values should be exactly as described above Note When the camera is set for an 8 bit output mode the pixel values in test image two range from 0 to 255 as described above If the camera is set for a 10 bit output the pixel values will range from 0 to 1023 If the camera is set for a 12 bit output the pixel values will range from 0 to 4095 Basler sprint Color Cameras 195 Features AW00069909000 6 7 2 Test Image Seven Fixed Red Gradient 6 7 2 1 Test Image Seven Generated with the RGB Line Acquisition Mode When the camera

Sprint Color User's Manual.book

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents